SlideShare a Scribd company logo
Using SiteScope
                                                                                                                                                   July 2008




© Copyright 2008 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in
the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an addi-
tional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

This is an HP copyrighted work that may not be reproduced without the written permission of HP. You may not use these materials to
deliver training to any person outside of your organization without the written permission of HP.

Printed in United States of America

Using SiteScope
Instructor guide
July 2008




                                                                                                             SS95USING-I-01
.detibihorp si PH morf noissimrep nettirw roirp tuohtiw gniniart reviled ot lairetam siht fo esU
July 2008
   Version 9.50
Using SiteScope
kcabdeef/moc.gniniart-crem.www//:ptth
                 aiv meht dnes esaelp ,tnemucod siht gnidrager snoitseggus ro stnemmoc yna evah uoy fI
                                                                                                 8002 yluJ
                                                                                            ediuG rotcurtsnI
                                                                                  05.9 epocSetiS gnisU
                                                                                             ASU ni detnirP
                                                                                           .PH fo noissimrep
  nettirw eht tuohtiw noitazinagro ruoy fo edistuo nosrep yna ot gniniart reviled ot saliretam eseht esu ton
yam uoY .PH fo noissimrep nettirw eht tuohtiw decudorper eb ton yam taht krow dethgirypoc PH na si sihT
                                                 .niereh deniatnoc snoissimo ro srorre lairotide ro lacinhcet
     rof elbail eb ton llahs PH .ytnarraw lanoitidda na gnitutitsnoc sa deurtsnoc eb dluohs niereh gnihtoN
  .secivres dna stcudorp hcus gniynapmocca stnemetats ytnarraw sserpxe eht ni htrof tes era secivres dna
stcudorp PH rof seitnarraw ylno ehT .eciton tuohtiw egnahc ot tcejbus si niereh deniatnoc noitamrofni ehT
                                     .P.L ,ynapmoC tnempoleveD drakcaP-ttelweH yb 8002 thgirypoC ©
Course Overview
Course Objectives .................................................................................................................. 1-2
Topic Outline - First Day....................................................................................................... 1-3
Topic Outline - Second Day .................................................................................................. 1-4


Introducing SiteScope
Key Features of SiteScope ..................................................................................................... 2-2
An Enterprise Management Application ............................................................................... 2-4
Agentless Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 2-5
SiteScope Architecture .......................................................................................................... 2-6
SiteScope Architectural Components .................................................................................... 2-7
Protocols for Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 2-8
Communication Ports for Monitors ....................................................................................... 2-9
SiteScope Monitoring Model............................................................................................... 2-10
Monitors............................................................................................................................... 2-11
Alerts.................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Reports ................................................................................................................................. 2-13
Conceptual Levels of Monitoring ........................................................................................ 2-14
Server versus Server System................................................................................................ 2-15
Server Resources Level Monitoring .................................................................................... 2-16
Network Services Level Monitoring.................................................................................... 2-17
Application and Business Services Level Monitoring......................................................... 2-18
SiteScope Monitors and Categories ..................................................................................... 2-19
Using Help in SiteScope ...................................................................................................... 2-20
Help Options ........................................................................................................................ 2-21
Help Tooltips ....................................................................................................................... 2-22
Support Options ................................................................................................................... 2-23
Summary .............................................................................................................................. 2-24


Installing SiteScope
System Requirements ............................................................................................................ 3-2
Installation Prerequisites........................................................................................................ 3-3
HP Downloads Web Site ....................................................................................................... 3-4
Downloading SiteScope......................................................................................................... 3-5
Installing SiteScope ............................................................................................................... 3-6
Deployment Considerations................................................................................................... 3-8
Opening SiteScope................................................................................................................. 3-9
Launching the SiteScope Interface ...................................................................................... 3-10
Copying Monitor Configurations......................................................................................... 3-11
Using the SiteScope Setup Page to Copy Data.................................................................... 3-12




                                                                                                                                                  1-1
Copy Monitor Configuration Utility.................................................................................... 3-14
Confirming Copy ................................................................................................................. 3-16
Configuration Tool .............................................................................................................. 3-17
Post-Installation Configuration............................................................................................ 3-19
Performing Post-Installation Tasks...................................................................................... 3-20
Summary .............................................................................................................................. 3-21
Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 3-22
Exercise: Downloading and Installing SiteScope ................................................................ 3-23


Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface
Introduction to the SiteScope Interface ................................................................................. 4-2
Exploring the Dashboard Tab ................................................................................................ 4-3
Viewing Group Status............................................................................................................ 4-4
Viewing Metric Level Status ................................................................................................. 4-5
Dashboard Navigation ........................................................................................................... 4-6
Creating Favorite Views ........................................................................................................ 4-7
Availability Status.................................................................................................................. 4-8
Exploring the Contents and Properties Tabs.......................................................................... 4-9
Viewing the Contents Tab ................................................................................................... 4-10
Viewing the Properties Tab ................................................................................................. 4-11
Viewing Monitor Settings.................................................................................................... 4-12
Global Replace..................................................................................................................... 4-13
Performing Replace Operation ............................................................................................ 4-14
Exploring the Preferences Interface..................................................................................... 4-15
General Preferences ............................................................................................................. 4-16
Configuring Historical Data Tracking ................................................................................. 4-17
Infrastructure Settings Preferences ...................................................................................... 4-18
Windows and UNIX Remote Preferences ........................................................................... 4-19
Connection to a Remote Windows Server ........................................................................... 4-20
Log Preferences ................................................................................................................... 4-21
Mail Preferences .................................................................................................................. 4-22
Users Preferences................................................................................................................. 4-23
Credential Preferences ......................................................................................................... 4-24
Summary of Preferences Settings ........................................................................................ 4-25
Match Preferences with Descriptions .................................................................................. 4-26
Understanding Health Monitors........................................................................................... 4-27
Health Monitors Overview .................................................................................................. 4-28
Diagnostic Tools .................................................................................................................. 4-30
Summary .............................................................................................................................. 4-31
Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 4-32
Exercise: Setting Windows Remote Preferences in SiteScope............................................ 4-34
Exercise: Setting Mail Preferences in SiteScope ................................................................. 4-37



1-2
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy
Monitoring Methodology....................................................................................................... 5-2
Introduction to the Grouping Model ...................................................................................... 5-4
Heartbeats and Dependencies ................................................................................................ 5-5
Top-Level Grouping Model Example.................................................................................... 5-6
Top-Level Grouping Model Advantages ............................................................................... 5-7
Grouping Guidelines.............................................................................................................. 5-8
Planning the Monitoring Strategy.......................................................................................... 5-9
SiteScope Server Sizing....................................................................................................... 5-11
Monitored Infrastructure Assessment .................................................................................. 5-12
Summary .............................................................................................................................. 5-13
Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 5-14


Managing Groups and Monitors
Dashboard Views and Nodes ................................................................................................. 6-2
Building Groups..................................................................................................................... 6-3
Creating a Group.................................................................................................................... 6-4
Configuring Group Contents ................................................................................................. 6-5
Creating a Monitor................................................................................................................. 6-6
Monitor Types........................................................................................................................ 6-8
Modifying Monitor Settings .................................................................................................. 6-9
Modifying Main Settings ..................................................................................................... 6-10
Modifying Advanced Settings ............................................................................................. 6-11
Editing Monitor Dependencies ............................................................................................ 6-12
Enabling or Disabling a Monitor ......................................................................................... 6-14
Enabling or Disabling Alerts ............................................................................................... 6-15
Understanding Threshold Settings....................................................................................... 6-16
Using Baselines to Set Thresholds....................................................................................... 6-17
Baseline Settings.................................................................................................................. 6-18
Reviewing the Baseline Data ............................................................................................... 6-19
Baseline Status ..................................................................................................................... 6-21
Modifying Baseline Thresholds........................................................................................... 6-22
Acknowledging an Error in Monitoring .............................................................................. 6-23
Modifying an Acknowledgement ........................................................................................ 6-25
Filter Icon............................................................................................................................. 6-26
Filtering Views in SiteScope ............................................................................................... 6-27
Moving Objects.................................................................................................................... 6-28
Summary .............................................................................................................................. 6-29
Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 6-30
Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor................................................................... 6-31




                                                                                                                                                1-3
Configuring Alerts
Defining an Alert ................................................................................................................... 7-2
Types of Alerts....................................................................................................................... 7-3
Preventing Alert Floods ......................................................................................................... 7-4
Configuring Alerts ................................................................................................................. 7-5
The Alert Icon ........................................................................................................................ 7-6
Adding New Alerts ................................................................................................................ 7-7
Alert Action Wizard: Step 1 .................................................................................................. 7-8
Alert Action Wizard: Step 2 .................................................................................................. 7-9
Alert Action Wizard: Step 3 ................................................................................................ 7-10
Alert Action Wizard: Step 4 ................................................................................................ 7-11
Adding Multiple Actions to an Alert ................................................................................... 7-12
Setting Filters ....................................................................................................................... 7-13
Viewing Alert Logs ............................................................................................................. 7-14
Summary .............................................................................................................................. 7-15
Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 7-16
Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert..................................................................... 7-17
Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down ........................................................................ 7-21
Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood .................................................................................... 7-27


Using Templates
Using Templates to Deploy Monitoring ................................................................................ 8-2
Template Attributes ............................................................................................................... 8-3
User-Defined Templates ........................................................................................................ 8-4
User-Defined Templates Concepts ........................................................................................ 8-5
Templates Planning................................................................................................................ 8-6
User-Defined Template Containers ....................................................................................... 8-7
Adding Templates to Containers ........................................................................................... 8-8
Shortcut to Creating Templates ............................................................................................. 8-9
Deploying Templates ........................................................................................................... 8-10
Publish Template Changes Wizard...................................................................................... 8-11
Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 1.......................................................................... 8-12
Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 2.......................................................................... 8-13
Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 3.......................................................................... 8-14
Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 4.......................................................................... 8-15
Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 5.......................................................................... 8-16
Publish Template Changes Summary Report ...................................................................... 8-17
Overview of Solution Templates ......................................................................................... 8-18
Summary .............................................................................................................................. 8-19
Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 8-20
Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template ...................................................................... 8-21



1-4
Exercise: Change Template and Publish Changes............................................................... 8-28


Using Diagnostic Tools
Diagnostic Tools .................................................................................................................... 9-2
Types of Diagnostic Tools ..................................................................................................... 9-3
Examples of Diagnostic Tools ............................................................................................... 9-4
Using the DNS Lookup Tool ................................................................................................. 9-5
Using the Event Log Tool...................................................................................................... 9-6
Using the FTP Server Tool .................................................................................................... 9-7
Using the LDAP Authentication Tool ................................................................................... 9-8
Using the Network Tool ........................................................................................................ 9-9
Monitor-Specific Tool Selection ......................................................................................... 9-10
Summary .............................................................................................................................. 9-12
Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 9-13
Exercise: Running the Event Log Tool................................................................................ 9-14
Exercise: Running the Ping Tool ......................................................................................... 9-16
Exercise: Running the Services Tool................................................................................... 9-18
Exercise: Running the Trace Route Tool............................................................................. 9-20


Generating Reports
Reports Specific to User ...................................................................................................... 10-2
Types of Reports .................................................................................................................. 10-3
Working with Management Reports.................................................................................... 10-5
Viewing Management Reports ............................................................................................ 10-6
Editing Management Reports .............................................................................................. 10-7
Generating Reports .............................................................................................................. 10-8
Viewing Reports .................................................................................................................. 10-9
Viewing Previous Reports ................................................................................................. 10-10
Working with Alert, Monitor and Quick Reports.............................................................. 10-11
Viewing Alert Reports ....................................................................................................... 10-12
Viewing Quick Reports ..................................................................................................... 10-13
Viewing Monitor Summary Reports.................................................................................. 10-14
Summary ............................................................................................................................ 10-15
Review Questions .............................................................................................................. 10-16
Exercise: Running SiteScope Reports ............................................................................... 10-17
Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor........... 10-19


Maintaining SiteScope
Important Files and Directories ........................................................................................... 11-2
Patches and Service Packs ................................................................................................... 11-3




                                                                                                                                              1-5
Health Page .......................................................................................................................... 11-4
Health Page Metrics............................................................................................................. 11-5
Alert and Error Log Files..................................................................................................... 11-7
Run Monitor, BAC, and Operator Logs .............................................................................. 11-8
Failover Overview ............................................................................................................... 11-9
SiteScope Failover Internals .............................................................................................. 11-10
Security Overview ............................................................................................................. 11-12
User Accounts.................................................................................................................... 11-13
SSL Basics ......................................................................................................................... 11-14
Keytool.exe ........................................................................................................................ 11-15
Configuring SiteScope for SSL ......................................................................................... 11-16
SSH Basics......................................................................................................................... 11-17
SSH Usage ......................................................................................................................... 11-18
Managing the SiteScope License ....................................................................................... 11-19
Summary ............................................................................................................................ 11-20
Review Questions .............................................................................................................. 11-21

Class Evaluation Form ........................................................................................................E-1




1-6
Course Overview




                                        Course Overview
                                                                             1
Purpose
This course is designed to provide you with the knowledge and skills required to work
with SiteScope. After completing this course, you will be able to identify critical
business systems and components of your infrastructure and design a proactive
application monitoring solution implementing a scalable set of monitoring agents. You
will also learn how to configure SiteScope to proactively notify and send alerts about
critical conditions and breach of SLAs. This course also demonstrates how to optimize
and fine-tune the monitoring system, perform analysis and trend reporting on incidents,
and apply best practices for the use and management of SiteScope.




                                                                                    1-1
Course Overview



 Course Objectives
      After completing this course, you will be able to:

      •   Install SiteScope.

      •   Design a scalable and easy to manage monitoring strategy.

      •   Implement a monitoring system leveraging best practices for grouping and alerting.

      •   Efficiently configure individual monitoring entities.

      •   Use templates to speed up the deployment of monitors.

      •   Design an efficient alerting mechanism.

      •   Respond to generated alerts to resolve errors in the IT environment.

      •   Design enterprise-level reports.

      •   Perform maintenance and troubleshooting of the monitoring solution.




1-2                                                                         Course Objectives
Course Overview



 Topic Outline - First Day
          •    Introducing SiteScope
                  This chapter introduces the basic features of SiteScope.


          •    Installing SiteScope
                  This chapter explains the installation process for SiteScope.


          •    Getting Familiar with SiteScope Interface
                  This chapter describes the SiteScope interface.


          •    SiteScope Monitoring Strategy
                 This chapter explains the top-level grouping model in SiteScope, the best practices for developing a grouping
               model, and considerations for deploying SiteScope.


          •    Managing Groups and Monitors
                  This chapter explains how to create and configure groups and monitors in SiteScope.




Topic Outline - First Day                                                                                                 1-3
Course Overview



 Topic Outline - Second Day
      •   Configuring Alerts
             This chapter describes how to configure alerts in SiteScope.


      •   Using Templates
              This chapter explains the concepts of reusability and repeatability of monitor, group, and alert creation through
          the use of templates.


      •   Introducing Diagnostic Tools
             This chapter explains the diagnostic tools available in SiteScope.


      •   Generating Reports
             This chapter explains the SiteScope reports and how to generate them.


      •   Maintaining SiteScope
              This chapter explains the common administrative and maintenance tasks associated with maintaining
          SiteScope.




1-4                                                                                        Topic Outline - Second Day
Introducing SiteScope




                                               Introducing SiteScope
                                                                                                                       2
setoN rotcurtsnI

Purpose
This chapter introduces the basics of SiteScope. It explains the key product features, architecture and flow of monitoring,
monitoring objects, and monitoring levels in SiteScope.



           Objectives
           After completing this chapter, you will be able to:

           •     Identify the key product features.

           •     Describe the architecture and flow of monitoring.

           •     Identify SiteScope monitoring objects.

           •     Identify the monitoring levels.

           •     Use the SiteScope help.




                                                                                                                              2-1
Introducing SiteScope



 Key Features of SiteScope
      SiteScope is a web-based infrastructure monitoring solution designed to ensure the
      availability and performance of distributed IT infrastructure components, such as
      servers, operating systems, network devices, network services, applications, and so on.
      It is lightweight, highly customizable, and does not require data collection agents to be
      installed in the environments being monitored.

      SiteScope has the following features:

      •   Agentless monitoring

          SiteScope monitors without the deployment of agent software on the servers to be
          monitored. This feature makes deployment and maintenance of SiteScope relatively
          simple compared to other performance monitoring solutions.

      •   Enterprise-ready architecture

          SiteScope provides failover capabilities, simultaneous monitoring of large number
          of systems, and support for secure connections.

      •   Simple installation and deployment

          SiteScope is installed on a single server running as a service or a process. This
          results in quick installation and easy monitoring configuration.

      •   Infrastructure performance and availability monitoring

          SiteScope has over 100 types of monitors. SiteScope can monitor utilization,
          response time, usage, and resource availability of a variety of host types and
          application platforms.

      •   Proactive alerting

          SiteScope can be configured to alert whenever it detects a problem in the IT
          infrastructure. There are several types of alert actions, such as sending e-mail
          messages, paging, sending Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps,
          or executing a script.

      •   Self-monitoring

          SiteScope monitors key aspects of its own operability and identifies monitor
          configuration problems and critical server load. It also monitors its own integration
          and data events when configured to report to HP Business Availability Center.




2-2                                                                   Key Features of SiteScope
Introducing SiteScope



         •    Customization capabilities

              SiteScope allows for display of customizations of groups and monitors via custom
              data fields and HTML-sensitive description tags. In addition, SiteScope allows for
              the customization of alert text and report configurations via templates and user-
              defined variables.

         •    Intuitive administration

              SiteScope reduces the time spent managing a monitoring environment by providing
              a user friendly browser-based interface for viewing and administering of the
              monitoring platform.




Key Features of SiteScope                                                                    2-3
Introducing SiteScope



 An Enterprise Management Application
      SiteScope uses a multi-tiered monitoring approach for effective enterprise system
      management. The monitoring process includes the following phases:

      •   Verification:

          –    SiteScope monitors ensure that infrastructure components are functioning with
               expected results and at the expected level of performance and availability.

      •   Diagnosis:

          –    SiteScope Viewing and Dashboard capabilities enable for a quick and accurate
               identification of the underlying cause as problems occur.

      •   Recovery:

          –    SiteScope notification system and advanced monitors provide automated
               corrective action and dispatch of timely alerts.

      •   Prevention:

          –    SiteScope communicates performance data through management and trend
               reports.

      The above process milestones help ensure the availability and uninterrupted operation of
      systems and services.




2-4                                                       An Enterprise Management Application
Introducing SiteScope



 Agentless Monitoring




                                Figure 2-1 Agentless Solution

         SiteScope uses an agentless monitoring model that does not need the deployment of
         agent software on the servers being monitored. The model uses the following
         mechanisms:

         •    Standard protocols: This category includes monitoring through Hyper Text Transfer
              Protocol (HTTP), Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS), File Transfer
              Protocol (FTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Simple Network
              Management Protocol (SNMP), and User Datagram Protocol (UDP).

         •    Platform-specific network services and commands: Windows environments are
              commonly monitored over NETBIOS while Unix/Linux machines are monitored
              using telnet, rlogin, ssh, and so on.

         Figure 2-1 shows an overview of agentless monitoring with SiteScope.

         The advantages of the agentless model are the following:

         •    Ease of initial deployment and setup.

         •    Reduction of ongoing support and maintenance time.




Agentless Monitoring                                                                         2-5
Introducing SiteScope



 SiteScope Architecture




                          Figure 2-2 SiteScope Architecture

      SiteScope's web-enabled architecture allows for the creation and ongoing administration
      of a scalable monitoring environment.




2-6                                                                     SiteScope Architecture
Introducing SiteScope



 SiteScope Architectural Components
         It consists of the following components:

         •   Browser-based interface: Manages end-user status information requests,
             configuration change requests, and access control.

         •   Monitors: Collect performance and availability information about the system being
             monitored.

         •   Alerts: Notifications of exceptions, failures, and status change events in the system
             being monitored.

         •   Reports: A historical representation of monitored data for trending and analysis
             purposes.

         •   Log Files: SiteScope stores performance data in log files, which are aggregated and
             analyzed when generating reports.

         •   Scheduler: Coordinates the running of monitors, alert creation, and report
             generation.




SiteScope Architectural Components                                                              2-7
Introducing SiteScope



 Protocols for Monitoring




                          Figure 2-3 Protocols for Monitoring

      SiteScope uses standard protocols and utilities to request and capture information about
      the performance of applications, servers, and all critical systems. For example, Web
      services are monitored with HTTP and HTTPS. Windows metric statistics are gathered
      via NETBIOS, and sometimes with the Windows Registry or WMI.




2-8                                                                     Protocols for Monitoring
Introducing SiteScope



 Communication Ports for Monitors


          Monitor/Alert                Port
           URL Monitor                  80, 443
           SNMP Monitor                 161 (UDP)
           FTP Monitor                  21
           MAIL Monitor                 25 (SMTP), 110 Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3),
                                        143 Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)
           NEWS Monitor                 119
           E-MAIL Alert                 25
           POST Alert                   80, 443
           SNMP TRAP Alert              162 (UDP)

                    Table 2-1. Ports Associated with Monitors and Alerts

         Successful monitor configuration requires that a certain number of ports be open and
         available. This table lists just some of the ports commonly used by SiteScope for
         monitoring and alerting in a typical monitoring environment.

         As a rule, SiteScope monitors use default ports and protocols. For example, the FTP
         monitor uses the default FTP port 21 and the URL monitor uses the standard HTTP port
         80.

         Ports associated with UNIX monitors include 22 for Secure Shell (SSH), 23 for
         TELNET, and 513 for Remote Login (RLOGIN). Remote NT is monitored on port 139
         which is where NetBIOS (TCP) as well as File and Printer sharing run on Windows.

         A complete list of common port numbers is available at
         http://www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers




Communication Ports for Monitors                                                             2-9
Introducing SiteScope



 SiteScope Monitoring Model
       A well-designed monitoring model enables effective and efficient management of an IT
       infrastructure.

       The following key components are included in the SiteScope monitoring model:

       •   Groups: A group is a container for monitoring assets. Groups may contain
           subgroups and are used to organize monitors. Groups are created prior to monitors.

       •   Monitors: A monitor checks the status of server components, key application
           processes, log files, or network devices, to name a few. It collects data based on
           selected metrics and displays a status of good, warning, or error with respect to the
           configured thresholds.

       •   Alerts: An alert is an action triggered by a change in the status of a monitored asset.
           Alerts notify appropriate users when negative events or failures occur. An alert can
           be sent to a variety of media including e-mail, pager, Short Message Service (SMS)
           messages, or an SNMP trap.

       •   Reports: A report is a historical representation of monitored data. SiteScope offers a
           variety of reports from quick monitor reports to detailed management reports.
           Reports enable you to track trends and operational performance and to troubleshoot
           problems.




2-10                                                                   SiteScope Monitoring Model
Introducing SiteScope



 Monitors




            Figure 2-4 Monitors




Monitors                                         2-11
Introducing SiteScope



 Alerts




          Figure 2-5 Alerts




2-12                                         Alerts
Introducing SiteScope



 Reports




           Figure 2-6 Sample Management Report




Reports                                                         2-13
Introducing SiteScope



 Conceptual Levels of Monitoring
       We can categorize SiteScope monitoring into three conceptual levels of monitoring:

       •   Server Resources. This conceptual level of monitoring measures attributes of the
           servers and operating systems.

       •   Network Services. This conceptual level of monitoring tests availability and
           performance of network services.

       •   Application and Business Services. This conceptual level of monitoring monitors
           applications and business services, such as Web servers, application servers,
           middleware, and ERP/CRM applications.




2-14                                                            Conceptual Levels of Monitoring
Introducing SiteScope



 Server versus Server System




                        Figure 2-7 Server Process and Server System

         The word “server” represents a process, and does not necessarily mean “machine”.
         Servers may run on one or more machines, or server systems. Conversely, more than
         one server can also be run on one system.




Server versus Server System                                                             2-15
Introducing SiteScope



 Server Resources Level Monitoring




                               Figure 2-8 Server Resources

       Server resource level monitoring refers to monitors that retrieve basic system
       management statistics. These are further categorized into operating system-centric
       metrics that displays hardware and operating system statistics, and server-centric
       metrics that displays server and process-based statistics.

       Examples of operating system-centric monitors include CPU and MEMORY monitors,
       INTELLIGENT PLATFORM MANAGEMENT INTERFACE (IPMI) monitors that record values
       of hardware parameters, and FILE and DIRECTORY monitors that record basic metrics
       related to a file system or directory.

       Examples of server-centric monitors include database monitors that verify database
       queries, DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL (DHCP) monitors that verify
       whether it is possible to obtain an Internet Protocol (IP) address, LIGHTWEIGHT
       DIRECTORY ACCESS PROTOCOL (LDAP) monitors that verify the server is authenticating
       as expected, and SERVICE monitors that verify whether a specific service is running.

       COMPOSITE and SCRIPT monitors are also considered as server level monitors. A
       COMPOSITE monitor enables several monitors to be grouped into a single monitor for the
       purpose of generating alerts. A SCRIPT monitor verifies the execution of a script against
       the monitored system. It is often used for recovery operations.




2-16                                                           Server Resources Level Monitoring
Introducing SiteScope



 Network Services Level Monitoring




                                    Figure 2-9 Network Services

         Network service monitors test commonly used network applications and services by
         simulating end user actions, such as e-mail, file downloads, and performing database
         queries. This subcategory also includes monitors for checking lower level network
         statistics and connectivity. For instance, SiteScope provides the NETWORK and
         NETWORK BANDWIDTH monitor types.




Network Services Level Monitoring                                                          2-17
Introducing SiteScope



Application and Business Services Level
Monitoring




                  Figure 2-10 Application Services Level Monitoring

       SiteScope application monitors measure application parameters and retrieve
       performance statistics from web servers, application servers, database servers, and
       ERP/CRM applications. In addition, the URL SEQUENCE and E-BUSINESS TRANSACTION
       monitors enable SiteScope to monitor and report on a chain of actions representing
       business process.




2-18                                         Application and Business Services Level Monitoring
Introducing SiteScope



 SiteScope Monitors and Categories
         SiteScope has over 100 built-in types of monitors that are used to collect metric data
         about different aspects of an IT infrastructure. These include monitors for server
         hardware, network services, operating systems, applications, and application
         components, to name a few.

         You can create instances of these monitor types and configure them to "point" to a
         specific physical element in the IT infrastructure. For instance, to monitor the CPU
         utilization on a server, select the CPU type monitor and set its "Server" attribute to
         address of the server. Some monitors are unlocked by the optional license.

         There are several general purpose monitor categories in SiteScope, which are as follows:

         •    Network Monitors: Monitors that test commonly used network applications and
              services by simulating end user actions. These include accessing Web content, e-
              mail, file downloads, and performing database queries. This subcategory also
              includes monitors for checking lower level network function and connectivity. For
              example, DNS, FTP, and Mail.

         •    Server Monitors: Monitors that measure server availability, resource usage, and
              other operating system attributes. These can be used to monitor remote servers
              running Windows or UNIX-based operating systems. For example, Memory, Disk
              Space, and CPU.

         •    Application Monitors: Monitors designed to check the availability and report on
              performance statistics of specific network applications and servers. Most monitors
              in this category allow you to set monitor status thresholds on more than one
              measurement per monitor instance.

         •    Database Monitors: Monitors in this category monitor different types of database
              applications. There are monitors that access data from specific database
              applications and generic monitors that can be configured to monitor any database
              application.

         •    Generic Monitors: Monitors in this category monitor various types of
              environments. These monitors can monitor networks, applications, and databases
              depending on how they are configured.

         •    Stream Monitors: Monitors in this category monitor applications that play media
              files and stream data.

         •    Web Transaction Monitors: Monitors in this category monitor web-based
              applications.



SiteScope Monitors and Categories                                                                 2-19
Introducing SiteScope



 Using Help in SiteScope
       The SiteScope Help library provides information on deploying, administering,
       customizing, and usage of SiteScope platform and applications. There are the following
       options:

       •   Help link: This link leads to the user guide in Hyper Text Markup Language
           (HTML) form, which opens in a separate pop-up window.

       •   Context help: To view information about the currently displayed page, from the
           HELP menu, select HELP ON THIS PAGE.

           Help is also viewed by clicking the Question Mark button next to the object for
           which you want information.

       •   Printer-friendly help: To view printer-friendly help, on the SITESCOPE HELP pop-up
           window, click the PDFS tab.




2-20                                                                   Using Help in SiteScope
Introducing SiteScope



 Help Options




                                   Figure 2-11 Help Portal

         In SiteScope, the help menu is located on the left-hand corner. Clicking the help menu
         displays the following options:

         HELP ON THIS PAGE: Selecting this option displays the page in SiteScope Help
         depending on the currently selected view and object.

         SITESCOPE HELP: Selecting this option displays the online SiteScope Help for the
         product.

         TROUBLESHOOTING & KNOWLEDGE BASE: Selecting this option displays the
         Troublshooting website of HP Software Support Online.

         HP SOFTWARE SUPPORT: Selecting this option displays the HP Software Support
         Online website.

         HP SOFTWARE WEB SITE: Selecting this option displays the HP Software home page.

         WHAT'S NEW: Selecting this option displays the SiteScope product release notes.

         ABOUT SITESCOPE: Selecting this option displays the version and release information
         for the installed SiteScope product.




Help Options                                                                                2-21
Introducing SiteScope



 Help Tooltips




                                 Figure 2-12 Help Tooltips

       From SiteScope Properties and Contents screens, click the help tooltip icon to display
       the tooltip information for the fields on the screen. Figure 2-12 shows a screen where the
       tooltip icon was selected.

       Tooltip Icon:




2-22                                                                                 Help Tooltips
Introducing SiteScope



 Support Options
         SiteScope support is available through the following channels:

         •   Online support database (Knowledge Base) and Discussion Forum

             –    Visit HTTP://WWW.HP.COM/GO/HPSOFTWARESUPPORT

         •   Phone support

             –    For customers with a valid SiteScope license.




Support Options                                                                          2-23
Introducing SiteScope



 Summary
       In this chapter, we have demostrated the following:

       •   SiteScope is an easy-to-use, versatile IT infrastructure performance and availability
           monitoring solution.

       •   SiteScope provides a comprehensive monitoring solution for the IT infrastructure.

       •   SiteScope provides over 100 types of monitors that are used to monitor different
           aspects of an IT infrastructure.

       •   SiteScope uses groups, monitors, alerts, and reports to keep the IT infrastructure
           functioning efficiently.

       •   SiteScope monitoring can be categorized into 3 conceptual levels: server resources,
           network services, and applications and business services.

       •   SiteScope provides a Help link that links to a user guide, a Context help that
           displays information about the current page, and a printer-friendly help that
           displays the printer friendly documents.




2-24                                                                                   Summary
Installing SiteScope




                                                       Installing SiteScope
                                                                                         3
setoN rotcurtsnI

Purpose
This chapter provides the system requirements and the steps for installation.



           Objectives
           After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

           •     Identify key input requirements when installing SiteScope.

           •     Download and install an evaluation copy of SiteScope.

           •     Use the configuration tool.

           •     Perform post-installation tasks.




                                                                                                3-1
Installing SiteScope



 System Requirements
      SiteScope is supported on the following operating systems:

      •   Microsoft Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server with SP4, Microsoft Windows
          2003 Standard/Enterprise with SP1, SP2 and Microsoft Windows 2003 R2 with
          SP1.

      •   Solaris 2.9, and 2.10

      •   RedHat Linux ES/AS 3.0 or 4.0.

      Note: The exact installation requirements for memory and free hard disk depend on the
      frequency of monitoring, types of monitors deployed, and the number of monitors.

      Note: Minimum requirements are listed in the installation guide for SiteScope. For
      typical implementations, 2gb memory and 10gb free hard disk space are recommended.

      Note: SiteScope can be installed as a 32-Bit application over 64-Bit environments for
      the supported operating systems listed above.




3-2                                                                      System Requirements
Installing SiteScope



 Installation Prerequisites
          Before installing SiteScope, make sure you perform the prerequistes installation
          procedures.

          For Windows operating systems, perform the following prerequisite installation
          procedures before installing SiteScope:

          •     Activate the Remote Registry Service for the remote computers you plan to
                monitor.

          •     Install Service Pack 3 or later on all Windows 2000 servers you plan to monitor.
                    There is a known issue with Windows 2000 Service Pack 2. The Remote Registry Service has a memory leak
                that often causes SiteScope monitors for a remote Windows 2000 server with Service Pack 2 to work
                intermittently.


          For UNIX and Linux operating systems, perform the following prerequisite installation
          procedures before installing SiteScope:

          •     Set the shell of the login account on the remote UNIX server to Bourne or tsch.

                SiteScope can run successfully under most popular UNIX shells. However,
                SiteScope communicates best with a remote UNIX server with the Bourne shell or
                tsch shell.

          •     Resolve command permissions settings to monitor remote UNIX servers, if
                necessary.

          Note: It is recommended not to run SiteScope from the root account and not to configure
          SiteScope to use the root account to access remote servers.




Installation Prerequisites                                                                                           3-3
Installing SiteScope



 HP Downloads Web Site
      Download a trial version of SiteScope from the following URL:

      www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport

      From the HP Support web site, navigate to PRODUCTS -> HP SITESCOPE SOFTWARE.

      To log in, enter your HP Passport user ID and password or register with the HP Software
      Downloads Center.

      Note: Most of the support areas require that you register as an HP Passport user and sign
      in. Many also require an active support contract. To find more information about support
      access levels, go to the following URL:
      http://www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport/new_access_levels

      To register for an HP Passport ID, go to the following URL:
      http://www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport/passport-registration




3-4                                                                     HP Downloads Web Site
Installing SiteScope



 Downloading SiteScope
        From the Technical Resources section, select HP SITESCOPE 9.5 EVALUATION




                Figure 3-1 SiteScope Evaluation Software Download Page




Downloading SiteScope                                                                 3-5
Installing SiteScope



 Installing SiteScope
      SiteScope for Windows is available as a single, self-extracting executable file from the
      HP software download web site. It is installed on a single server, and runs as a Windows
      process or service.

      To install SiteScope for Windows:

      1.   Click the SiteScope setup.exe program to start installation. The InstallShield
           Wizard for SiteScope appears. Click NEXT to begin the installation. The license
           agreement screen appears. Read the SiteScope License Agreement.

      2.   Select I ACCEPT to accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click NEXT
           to continue. The installation directory screen appears.

      3.   Accept the default directory location or click BROWSE to select another directory.
           The installation path must end with a folder named SiteScope. Do not enter any
           spaces in the installation path. After entering the new directory name, click NEXT to
           continue. The setup type screen appears.

      4.   Select the type that is suitable for your site. Click NEXT to continue. The port and e-
           mail definition screen appears.

      5.   Type the port number you want or accept the default port 8080. You can change the
           port later when you run the Configuration Utility. Type a different port if you get an
           error message after entering the port.

      6.   Type the e-mail address to send e-mail alerts to the SiteScope administrator. Click
           NEXT to continue. A screen for license number appears.

      7.   Type the license number for SiteScope. If you have an optional license, type that
           number in the second text box. It is not necessary to enter license information
           during the free evaluation period. Click NEXT to continue. A screen of summary
           information appears.

      8.   Check that the information is correct. Click NEXT to continue or BACK to return to
           previous screens to change your selections. The SiteScope installation process starts
           and an installation progress screen appears.

      9.   Click FINISH when the installation process is complete and a message about the
           successful installation is displayed.

      You are now ready to use SiteScope.

      Note that SiteScope for Solaris and Linux is available as a single, compressed archive
      file on the HP Software download web site.




3-6                                                                           Installing SiteScope
Installing SiteScope



          SiteScope is installed on Solaris or Linux operating systems using the multi-platform
          InstallShield wizard, a command line mode, or console mode. Use the option for
          installing using command line mode when you are installing SiteScope on a remote
          server or do not have Xwindows or similar interface available.
            A 10-day demo license is used for this course. For additional licensing information, refer the students to the support
          Web site to request a license or to sales.




Installing SiteScope                                                                                                          3-7
Installing SiteScope



 Deployment Considerations
      Follow these guidelines for performance and security reasons:

      •   Install SiteScope within the same domain as the system elements to be monitored.
             This is because SiteScope needs to frequently log on to various servers in the infrastructure.


      •   Install SiteScope in the same subnet as the applicable network authentication
          service, such as Active Directory or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
          (LDAP).

      •   Do not install SiteScope in a location where a significant amount of the monitoring
          activity requires communication across a Wide Area Network (WAN).

      •   Do not use SiteScope to monitor servers through a firewall.

          SiteScope licensing is not server-based, and you will need separate SiteScope
          installations for both sides of a firewall. Two or more separate SiteScope
          installations can be accessed simultaneously from a single workstation by using
          HTTP or HTTPS.

          More information on location considerations is provided in the advanced course.




3-8                                                                                      Deployment Considerations
Installing SiteScope



 Opening SiteScope




                            Figure 3-2 SiteScope Launch Page

        After completing the installation, select the OPEN HP SITESCOPE link from the
        Windows start menu to view the SiteScope Administrative interface.

        From the OPEN SITESCOPE Web page, you have access to the SiteScope interface, links
        to tools for moving monitor configurations from previous SiteScope installations, and
        links to additional SiteScope resources.




Opening SiteScope                                                                           3-9
Installing SiteScope



 Launching the SiteScope Interface




                             Figure 3-3 SiteScope Interface

       You can launch SiteScope from the SiteScope launch page or directly from a URL. The
       SiteScope interface is available at http://localhost:8080/SiteScope, where localhost is
       the IP address of your computer or the address of the machine on which SiteScope is
       installed.




3-10                                                          Launching the SiteScope Interface
Installing SiteScope



 Copying Monitor Configurations




                                   Figure 3-4 Copy Monitor

         SiteScope monitors are custom configured instances of monitor templates that
         automatically connect to and collect measurements from different systems and
         application components. You can copy an existing monitor and paste the copy into any
         monitor group in the SiteScope tree. Copying a monitor duplicates the monitor instance
         and all its configuration settings.

         To copy a monitor, perform the following steps:

         1.   On the left menu, select the monitor you want to copy.

         2.   Right-click the container in the left menu to display the container action menu and
              select COPY.

         3.   Select the monitor group node where you want the copy of the monitor to be
              created.

         4.   Right-click the container in the left menu to display the container action menu and
              select PASTE. SiteScope adds a copy of the monitor to the selected monitor group.



Copying Monitor Configurations                                                               3-11
Installing SiteScope



 Using the SiteScope Setup Page to Copy Data




                                    Figure 3-5 SiteScope Setup Page

       From the SiteScope launch page, you can update your license information, modify the
       administrative email address, and launch the Copy Monitor Configuration utility by
       clicking Copy at the bottom of the page.

       The Copy Monitor Configuration utility helps to transfer monitor configuration data in
       bulk from one SiteScope installation to another. It is used when upgrading or simply
       migrating and moving away from a currently running instance of SiteScope to a new
       instance often in a different physical environment.
          You can copy configuration files manually to the new installation from an existing SiteScope implementation. Before
       copying files, stop the SiteScope processes.


       To use the Copy Monitor Configuration utility, perform the following steps:




3-12                                                               Using the SiteScope Setup Page to Copy Data
Installing SiteScope



         1.   Open the SiteScope setup page at
              http://localhost:8080/SiteScope/cgi/go.exe/SiteScope?page=setup, where localhost
              is the IP address of your computer.

         2.   On the setup page as shown in Figure 3-5, click COPY at the bottom portion of the
              page to display the COPY MONITOR CONFIGURATIONS FROM ANOTHER SITESCOPE
              page.




Using the SiteScope Setup Page to Copy Data                                                 3-13
Installing SiteScope



 Copy Monitor Configuration Utility




                Figure 3-6 SiteScope Settings



3-14                                            Copy Monitor Configuration Utility
Installing SiteScope



          From the COPY MONITOR CONFIGURATIONS FROM ANOTHER SITESCOPE page, specify
          the SiteScope settings:

          1.   Enter the host name or address of the server where the source instance of SiteScope
               is running in the REMOTE SITESCOPE SERVER ADDRESS AND PORT field. Include
               the port number that the source SiteScope is listening on.

          2.   Enter the administrator user name and password for source instance of SiteScope in
               the SITESCOPE ADMINISTRATOR USER NAME and SITESCOPE ADMINISTRATOR
               PASSWORD fields. These fields are the user name and password configured in USER
               PREFERENCES on the remote SiteScope and not the user name and password to login
               to the remote server through the file system. If there is no administrator user defined
               for the source SiteScope, leave these fields blank.

          3.   Check the USE HTTPS check box, if you want to use the HTTPS secure protocol
               for data transfer.

          4.   Type the applicable connection information in the PROXY SERVER, PROXY SERVER
               USER NAME, and PROXY SERVER PASSWORD fields, if you want to use a proxy
               server to communicate with the source SiteScope.

          5.   Check the INTERNATIONAL VERSION check box, if this check box is checked in the
               source SiteScope.
                 See the GENERAL PREFERENCES page for the status of the INTERNATIONAL VERSION check
               box.


          6.   Click COPY to display the COPY CONFIGURATION DATA FROM ANOTHER
               SITESCOPE INSTALLATION page.




Copy Monitor Configuration Utility                                                               3-15
Installing SiteScope



 Confirming Copy




                              Figure 3-7 Copy Confirmation

       In the COPY CONFIGURATION DATA FROM ANOTHER SITESCOPE INSTALLATION page,
       click COPY to start the copy operation. A progress display screen appears. The new
       SiteScope installation restarts and processes the copied configurations after successful
       copying.

       The monitor configuration data is transferred from one SiteScope installation to another.




3-16                                                                             Confirming Copy
Installing SiteScope



 Configuration Tool




                                  Figure 3-8 Configuration Tool

         Beginning with SiteScope 8.5 there is a standalone configuration utility. You can run it
         as part of the installation process or independently. The configuration tool has the
         following capabilities:

         •    Basic Configuration: The default port number can be modified. You may want to
              modify the default port setting for security reasons or to avoid conflict with existing
              applications.

         •    Sizing: Sizing is used to optimize the performance of SiteScope by making the
              following changes in Windows Registry keys:

              –      Java Virtual Machine (JVM) heap size: The value is changed from 256mb to
                     768mb.

              –      Desktop heap size: The value is changed from 512mb to 2048mb.

              –      Popup warnings: These messages are turned off.




Configuration Tool                                                                              3-17
Installing SiteScope



       •    Export-Import: This function helps you during an upgrade. It is used to import and
            export SiteScope data, such as templates, logs, and so on.

       To access the configuration tool:

       1.   On the SiteScope server, select START > PROGRAMS > HP SITESCOPE >
            CONFIGURATION TOOL. The InstallShield Wizard appears.

       2.   Click NEXT to start the wizard. The three options are displayed on the screen.

       3.   Select the required option and make changes. The final dialog box appears with the
            status.

       4.   Click FINISH to complete the operation.




3-18                                                                          Configuration Tool
Installing SiteScope



 Post-Installation Configuration
          The following are some post-installation configuration steps:

          •    Enter the license information.

          •    Specify the administrator's e-mail address, e-Mail Server, backup e-Mail server and
               the notification preferences.

          •    Specify backup and logging preferences.

          •    Add a login name and a password to the Administrator account.

          •    Create user accounts or import the accounts from LDAP.




Post-Installation Configuration                                                               3-19
Installing SiteScope



 Performing Post-Installation Tasks




                                  Figure 3-9 Preferences

       After installing SiteScope, perform the following tasks to change the default information
       provided during installation:

       1.   In the GENERAL PREFERENCES section, type your SiteScope license information.

       2.   In the MAIL PREFERENCES section, type the e-mail address for the administrator and
            SMTP mail server for SiteScope to use when sending alerts.

       3.   In the USERS PREFERENCES section, create a name and a password for the SiteScope
            Administrator account.

            This Administrator account is active when the product is installed. This account has
            full privileges to manage SiteScope and is used by all SiteScope users unless it is
            password protected.

            You can also create and configure multiple user accounts and specify their
            permissions and access privileges.



3-20                                                            Performing Post-Installation Tasks
Installing SiteScope



 Summary
          In this chapter, you learned:

          •   SiteScope is supported on Windows, Solaris, and Linux platforms.

          •   Resource requirements depend on the monitoring activity of the SiteScope server.

          •   SiteScope installation file is available from
              WWW.HP.COM/GO/HPSOFTWARESUPPORT.

          •   SiteScope cumulative patches are available from the HP Software support site.

          •   Copy Monitor option duplicates the configuration settings for the monitor.

          •   Copy Monitor Configuration utility copies monitor configurations to a new
              SiteScope installation.

          •   The configuration tool is used to change the default server port, optimize the
              performance by tuning the JVM, and export and import SiteScope data.

          •   Post-installation tasks include specifying the license, administrator e-mail address,
              and a user name and password.




Summary                                                                                        3-21
Installing SiteScope



 Review Questions
            Answer the review questions in your book.
 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the
 end of the day, or beginning of the next day.

 The answers to the questions below will only be printed in the instructor book; the student book will only show blank lines after
 each question.


            1.    How much free hard disk space is recommended for SiteScope?

                  10GB of free hard disk space is recommended for SiteScope. ______________

            2.    What operating systems can run SiteScope?

                  SiteScope runs on Windows 2000/2003 server, Solaris 2.9, 2.10 and Redhat ES/AS
                  Linux 3 or 4. _____________________________________________________

            3.    From where can you download SiteScope?

                  To download SiteScope, go to www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport. Download and
                  install the installation file. After installing the file, download the latest cumulative
                  patches from the HP Software support site. _____________________________

                    _______________________________________________________________

                    _______________________________________________________________

                    _______________________________________________________________

            4.    How long does the unregistered software last?

                  The unregistered software lasts for 10 days. ____________________________

            5.    What are the capabilities of the Configuration tool?

                  The Configuration tool can be used to change the port number, optimize the
                  performance of SiteScope, and export and import user data.________________

                    _______________________________________________________________




3-22                                                                                                           Review Questions
Installing SiteScope



 Exercise: Downloading and Installing SiteScope

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Familiarize yourself with steps to install SiteScope.

 Specific Objectives
 At the end of this exercise, students will be able to do the following to install SiteScope:
 - Download and install SiteScope.


            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to install SiteScope.

            •      Download the HP SiteScope evaluation software from
                   www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport.

            •      Install the HP SiteScope evaluation software using the default values.




Exercise: Downloading and Installing SiteScope                                                                3-23
Installing SiteScope



       Part 1: Download and Install the SiteScope Installation File
       1.   Go to step 5 if the SiteScope installation files are located on the desktop.

       2.   Open the URL: www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport

       3.   Download the SITESCOPE 9.5 free 10-day trial software.

       4.   Click SAVE to save the file on the desktop.

       5.   Double-click the SiteScope setup.exe program saved on the desktop.

       6.   Select the default values as the installer progresses.




3-24                                                 Exercise: Downloading and Installing SiteScope
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface




                                     Getting Familiar with the
                                                                                                                     4
                                          SiteScope Interface


setoN rotcurtsnI

Purpose
This chapter describes the SiteScope interface. It discusses the tabs available on the SiteScope interface, the SiteScope health
monitors, and the tools used for troubleshooting in SiteScope.



           Objectives
           After completing this chapter, you will be able to:

           •     Access SiteScope user interface.

           •     Explore the various tabs on the interface.

           •     Explore the PREFERENCES interface.

           •     Identify the purpose of the SiteScope Health monitors.

           •     Identify the purpose of the SiteScope diagnostics tools.




                                                                                                                              4-1
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Introduction to the SiteScope Interface




                             Figure 4-1 SiteScope Interface

      The SiteScope interface has a design similar to HP Business Availability Center (BAC).
      This interface similarity makes cross-product navigation easier.

      The SiteScope interface has an explorer-style tree on the left representing a hierarchical
      view of configured groups, subgroups, and monitors. Contents and properties of the
      selected node are explored by navigating the respective tabs.

      The interface on the left has the MONITORS, VIEWS, and CATEGORIES tabs. The interface
      on the right has the DASHBOARD, PROPERTIES, CONTENTS, and LOG FILES tabs.

      Note: When SiteScope is first installed, you are logged in as an administrator with no
      password defined. Use the USERS PREFERENCES node to configure additional
      security if required.




4-2                                                         Introduction to the SiteScope Interface
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Exploring the Dashboard Tab




                                  Figure 4-2 Dashboard Tab

         The DASHBOARD tab displays a higher-level view of deployed monitors and their status.
         Depending on the node selection in the explorer tree you can view the monitors
         deployed globally, focus on a particular group, or look in details at a specific monitor.
         The status of each monitor is displayed through indicator lights. You can also view
         historical information about the status of a monitor in addition to being able to view the
         current status.




Exploring the Dashboard Tab                                                                       4-3
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Viewing Group Status




                       Figure 4-3 Current Groups and Monitors

      The DASHBOARD tab enables you to view the STATUS of monitors and groups of
      monitors. In the STATUS column, the color of the indicator lights indicate the current
      status of the monitor groups, as follows:

      •   Red: Indicates error status.

      •   Yellow: Indicates warning status.

      •   Green: Indicates OK status.




4-4                                                                         Viewing Group Status
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Viewing Metric Level Status




                                Figure 4-4 Metric Level Status

         Metric-level status is the status of an individual monitor counter. For instance the
         metric-level status of the "% packets that have reached their destination" counter of the
         PING monitor shown in Figure 4-4 is green, meaning that no packets have been lost.

         In the DASHBOARD tab, access the monitor by clicking its name to view the latest data
         reading and status information. If a group or a monitor is in error, explore the sub-tree of
         individual monitors and counters to detect the counter whose status indicates a problem
         and is propagating to the parent group or monitor.




Viewing Metric Level Status                                                                        4-5
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Dashboard Navigation




                           Figure 4-5 Dashboard Navigation

      Groups may contain subgroups and individual monitors. The DASHBOARD tab enables
      you to view group details and information about the status and data reading of each
      monitor in the group.

      It is possible to organize groups and monitors in a hierarchical manner since groups act
      as organizational units for monitors and other groups. The design of the hierarchy
      should be a logical representation of the actual hierarchy of the monitored IT
      environment.

      Right-click any entity in the left panel to add subgroups, monitors, alerts, and reports.
      The right-click menu consists of options for configuring, running, creating, and deleting
      items.




4-6                                                                        Dashboard Navigation
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Creating Favorite Views




                                  Figure 4-6 Favorite Views

         Favorite views are created for quick navigation. For example, use the sort and filter
         features to view only those monitors for which you are responsible. Then save this view
         as a favorite for quick retrieval at any later time. Figure 4-6 shows the ADD FAVORITE
         and DELETE FAVORITE buttons. Use these buttons to create favorite views of the
         information presented in the interface.

         Figure 4-6 also shows the different buttons that enable you to see the detailed view, icon
         view, child groups and monitors, or all descendant monitors. Use these buttons to
         customize the appearance of groups, subgroups, and monitors in the right pane of the
         SiteScope interface.




Creating Favorite Views                                                                           4-7
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Availability Status




                             Figure 4-7 Monitor Availability

      Figure 4-7 illustrates the active monitor availability icons. Monitor availability is
      represented by the up and down arrows next to the monitor status icons.

      The availability status exists so that more information can be provided about a monitor
      that has reported a "no data" or "Unknown" status. Availability is defined as the ability
      of the monitor to connect to the remote systems and retrieve information. The following
      is a list of possible availability statuses:

      •   GOOD: Indicates that a remote system is responding.

      •   ERROR: SiteScope was unable to connect to the remote system.

      •   WARNING: SiteScope has detected a possible connectivity problem with the system.

      •   UNKNOWN: SiteScope was unable to determine the state of the connection.




4-8                                                                               Availability Status
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Exploring the Contents and Properties Tabs
         The CONTENTS tab is used to define the containers and monitoring objects in SiteScope.
         Use the CONTENTS tab to add and edit groups, monitors, alerts, and reports.

         The PROPERTIES tab is used to configure properties of containers and monitoring
         objects. Use the PROPERTIES tab to perform the following tasks:

         •    View configuration information for specific objects.

         •    Edit the configuration information for groups, monitors, alerts, and reports.




Exploring the Contents and Properties Tabs                                                        4-9
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Viewing the Contents Tab




                              Figure 4-8 The Contents Tab

       The CONTENTS tab includes groups, monitors, alerts, and report information. Use this
       tab to view and edit existing object information or add new objects and configure them.

       Figure 4-8 illustrates the WINDOWS SERVERS group contents.

       •   The GROUPS section shows the existing monitors and sub-groups of this group.

       •   The ALERTS section shows the list of alerts configured for this group.

       •   The REPORTS section shows the list of reports configured for this group.

       •   The MONITORS section shows the list of monitors configured for this group.




4-10                                                                   Viewing the Contents Tab
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Viewing the Properties Tab




                                  Figure 4-9 Properties Tab

         Use the PROPERTIES tab for a selected group to view its properties, such as the group
         name and any dependencies set for it. To edit the sections in the PROPERTIES tab, click
         EDIT. Use the EDIT interface to modify existing dependencies or create a new one.

         Using the DEPENDS ON option, you can make the running of the monitor dependent on
         the status of another monitor or monitor group. This can be used to prevent redundant
         alerting from multiple monitors that are monitoring different aspects of a single system.

         The CATEGORY SETTINGS section at the bottom of the page on the PROPERTIES tab
         contains category assignments helpful when sorting and filtering. Assigning a monitor
         or a group to a category provides the ability to group and view monitoring assets by their
         category. For instance, you can group your applications into the following categories:
         Development, Staging, and Production.




Viewing the Properties Tab                                                                      4-11
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Viewing Monitor Settings




                              Figure 4-10 Monitor Settings

       Use the PROPERTIES tab for a selected monitor to display monitor details and settings,
       including the status, alerts, and threshold settings associated with a monitor.

       •   The ENABLE/DISABLE MONITOR option enables or disables a monitor immediately.
           Disabling monitors prevents alerts from being generated. The disable feature is
           useful when you know a monitor target will be in error, such as a scheduled outage.

       •   The ENABLE/DISABLE ALERTS option is useful when server maintenance or other
           activities are being performed that would logically result in errors for some
           monitors and cause unnecessary alerts to be generated.

       •   The THRESHOLD SETTINGS option sets the conditions that determine the reported
           status of each monitor instance. The status result is based on the results or
           measurements returned by the monitor action on the target system. Status threshold
           criteria for monitor instances are set to one of three status conditions: ERROR IF,
           WARNING IF, and GOOD IF.



4-12                                                                     Viewing Monitor Settings
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Global Replace




                              Figure 4-11 Global Replace Tab

         The GLOBAL REPLACE functionality enables you to change and update configurations
         and definitions across the entire set of deployed groups and monitors.

         Launch the Global Search and Replace Wizard to perform a global replace operation.




Global Replace                                                                               4-13
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Performing Replace Operation
       To perform a global replace operation:

       1.   Access the GLOBAL REPLACE wizard using one of the following options:

            –   Right-click the group, preferences, or monitor in the monitor tree to which you
                want to perform a global replace, and select GLOBAL REPLACE from the
                menu.

                OR

            –   In the CONTENTS tab, click the GLOBAL REPLACE button for the object to
                which you want to perform a global replace. The SELECT TYPE page appears.
                All of the steps of the wizard are visible in the left-hand pane.

       2.   Select one of the options listed in the SELECT TYPE page. The wizard displays only
            those types of objects available for the selected node. Select only one object type
            for each global replace operation.

       3.   Click NEXT. The wizard analyzes the selection and displays the next page, as
            follows:

            –   If you selected ALERT, GROUP or REPORT, the REPLACE MODE page appears.

            –   If you selected ALERT ACTION, MONITOR, or PREFERENCES as the object type,
                the SELECT SUB TYPE page appears. Select the object subtypes for the global
                replace operation. Click NEXT. The REPLACE MODE page appears.

       4.   Select the REPLACE option and click NEXT. The CHOOSE CHANGES page appears.
            The wizard displays only the settings and properties that may be changed for the
            object type selected. Select the needed settings in the drop-down lists.

       5.   Click NEXT. The wizard displays the AFFECTED OBJECT page. The AFFECTED
            OBJECTS tree includes all objects matching the selection criteria.

       6.   Review the tree of the selected object. Click NEXT. The REVIEW SUMMARY page
            appears. The REVIEW SUMMARY list describes the objects selected to undergo
            global replace.

       7.   Verify that all changes in the REVIEW SUMMARY list are correct. Click FINISH. The
            global replace operation is performed, and the CHANGE RESULTS page appears.

       8.   The SUMMARY page reports the changes that were implemented successfully and
            those in which errors occurred. Click OK to close the wizard.




4-14                                                                Performing Replace Operation
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Exploring the Preferences Interface




                             Figure 4-12 The Preferences Container

          The PREFERENCES container enables you to configure specific properties and settings
          related to functional areas of SiteScope. This includes defining profiles for connecting to
          other servers in the network, settings for connecting to e-mail, pager, and SNMP
          systems, schedule profiles, and user profiles.




Exploring the Preferences Interface                                                              4-15
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 General Preferences




                                    Figure 4-13 General Preferences

       The GENERAL PREFERENCES option is used to perform various post-configuration tasks.
       Some of the more common ones are:

       •     Enter standard SiteScope license keys.

       •     Enter keys for optional monitor features.

       •     Control display features.

       •     Set security options.
           International Version setting needs to be enabled from the beginning of the implementation. This setting is required
       for double-byte characters.




4-16                                                                                                 General Preferences
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Configuring Historical Data Tracking




                     Figure 4-14 Dashboard Monitor History View Option

          The DASHBOARD MONITOR HISTORY VIEW area displays historical information about
          monitors, monitor groups, and alerts over the previous 24 hours. This information is
          useful when you need to refer to previous data to isolate the source of a problem. By
          default there is no historical data tracking enabled. The DASHBOARD MONITOR HISTORY
          VIEW option is configurable in the GENERAL PREFERENCES container in order to change
          the default behavior.




Configuring Historical Data Tracking                                                          4-17
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Infrastructure Settings Preferences




                          Figure 4-15 Infrastructure Settings Preferences

       The INFRASTRUCTURE SETTINGS PREFERENCES option is used to define the values of
       global settings that determine how SiteScope runs. Included are:

       •     General Settings

       •     Server Settings

       •     Monitor Settings

       •     Alert Settings

       •     Persistency Settings

       •     Classic UI Settings

       •     Report Settings

       •     Baseline Settings
           New in 9.5 to improve the usability of editing infrastructure setting preferences (master.config file)




4-18                                                                                   Infrastructure Settings Preferences
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Windows and UNIX Remote Preferences




                      Figure 4-16 Windows and UNIX Remote Preferences

        The WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES and UNIX REMOTE PREFERENCES options are
        used to setup the connection properties, such as credentials and protocols, so that
        SiteScope can monitor systems and services running in remote environments.

        To enable SiteScope to monitor systems and services running on remote Windows and
        UNIX server systems you need to create a remote server entry:

        •     Define an individual remote server connection profile for each server.

        •     Set appropriate access privileges to permit SiteScope to access remote servers.

        •     Test the connection to validate credentials and connectivity.
            Emphasize to students that server monitoring requires the use of appropriate credentials for connectivity and for
        retrieving metrics. SiS 9.5 introduces centralized credential management.




Windows and UNIX Remote Preferences                                                                                       4-19
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Connection to a Remote Windows Server
       To establish a connection to a remote Windows server system:

       1.   Expand the PREFERENCES node and select the WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES
            node.

       2.   Click NEW WINDOWS SERVER. A configuration interface appears.

       3.   In the HOST field, type the host computer name or the host IP.

       4.   Configure the access to the remote server by entering one of the following options:

            –   In the LOGIN and PASSWORD fields, type a login name and a password,
                respectively.

                OR

            –   Select a credential profile from the list of CREDENTIALS.

             Note: If you select or enter a credential profile, you do not need to enter a login
             and password. A credential profile takes priority over login and password entries.

       5.   In the ADVANCED SETTINGS section, type secure connection information.

       6.   Click OK. The new connection icon appears on the left.

       Note: Select the UNIX REMOTE PREFERENCES node to establish connection to a
       remote UNIX server.

       You can test the remote server configuration that you just created. To test a remote
       server configuration:

       1.   Right-click the new connection icon.

       2.   Select TEST.

       A pop-up message displays the message whether the test connection succeeded or not.




4-20                                                      Connection to a Remote Windows Server
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Log Preferences




                                 Figure 4-17 Log Preferences

         The LOG PREFERENCES option is used to perform the following tasks:

         •   Specify a retention period for log files. The default duration is 40 days.

         •   Configure connectivity settings to export monitor data to an external database.

             –    Database connection URL

             –    Database user name and password

             –    Backup database connection URL




Log Preferences                                                                                 4-21
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Mail Preferences




                              Figure 4-18 Mail Preferences

       The MAIL PREFERENCES option is used to define e-mail server settings and profiles for
       SiteScope e-mail alerts and status reports.

       The MAIL PREFERENCES node lets you specify the following for an e-mail recipient:

       •   The name and e-mail address.

       •   An optional template with which to create e-mails.

       •   An optional schedule to specify the e-mail receipt timings.

       •   An optional description.




4-22                                                                            Mail Preferences
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Users Preferences




                                Figure 4-19 Users Preferences

         The USERS PREFERENCES option lets you define and manage one or more user login
         profiles that control how others access SiteScope. To create a new user, you need to
         specify the following:

         •   The login name and password for the user.

         •   The LDAP server to which SiteScope connects if LDAP is used for authentication
             and the LDAP security principle.

         •   The optional title for the user, which acts as a description.

         •   Optional groups to restrict user access.

         Note: You cannot disable or delete the SiteScope administrator account. However, you
         can modify the administrator account to include a password.




Users Preferences                                                                               4-23
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Credential Preferences




                            Figure 4-20 Credential Preferences

       The CREDENTIAL PREFERENCES option lets you define and configure centralized
       credential management for SiteScope resources. To create a new credential, you need to
       specify the following:

       •     A unique display name for the credential.

       •     The login name and password to connect to remote/account.

       •     Optional domain name.

       •     A description for the credential can be entered under ADVANCED SETTINGS.
           New in 9.5




4-24                                                                          Credential Preferences
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Summary of Preferences Settings
         The options available on the PREFERENCES node are:

         •   GENERAL PREFERENCES - Used to enter standard SiteScope license keys, license
             keys for optional monitor features, control SiteScope display options and features,
             and set SiteScope security options.

         •   INFRASTRUCTURE SETTINGS PREFERENCES - Used to define global SiteScope
             settings

         •   INTEGRATION PREFERENCES - Used to define preferences for HP Business
             Availability Center integration.

         •   MICROSOFT WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES - Used to define and configure
             connectivity profiles for connecting to and monitoring remote Windows servers.

         •   UNIX REMOTE PREFERENCES - Used to define and configure connectivity profiles
             for connecting to and monitoring remote UNIX/Linux servers.

         •   LOG PREFERENCES - Used to select the period to maintain monitor data locally or
             configure connectivity settings for exporting monitor data to an external database.

         •   MAIL PREFERENCES - Used to define e-mail settings for use with SiteScope e-mail
             alerts.

         •   PAGER PREFERENCES are used to define pager profiles for SiteScope pager alerts.

         •   SNMP TRAP PREFERENCES -Used to configure the communication with an external
             SNMP host or management console.

         •   ABSOLUTE SCHEDULE PREFERENCES are used to define custom schedules to run
             monitors at specific times of the week.

         •   RANGE SCHEDULE PREFERENCES are used to define custom schedules to disable
             monitors and alerts during a specific time period.

         •   USERS PREFERENCES - Used to define and manage user login profiles.

         •   CREDENTIAL PREFERENCES - Used to define and configure centralized credential
             management for SiteScope resources.




Summary of Preferences Settings                                                               4-25
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Match Preferences with Descriptions




                               Figure 4-21 Which Preference Would You Use?

             Match each of the listed descriptions with the appropriate preference.

             Answers: 1. C, 2. F, 3. A, 4. I, 5. B, 6. G, 7. D, 8. E, 9. J, 10. H
 setoN rotcurtsnI

 The slide for this page is an animated slide for discussion purpose. Use this slide as an opportunity to elicit student understanding
 (including misunderstandings) and support peer-teaching.
 Each mouse click will reveal the suggested answer.

 Answer:
 1. C, LOG PREFERENCES are used to modify the retention period for monitoring data.
 2. F, SNMP  PREFERENCES are used to define settings and profiles SiteScope can use to send SNMP Trap alerts.
 3. A, GENERAL PREFERENCES are used to set security options.
 4. I, RANGE SCHEDULE PREFERENCES are used to define custom schedules to disable monitors and alerts during a
 specific time period.
 5. B, WINDOWS REMOTE             PREFERENCES or UNIX REMOTE PREFERENCES are used to establish connection
 for a remote server.
 6. G, DYNAMIC UPDATE            PREFERENCES are used to configure SiteScope to query an external data source and create
 monitors for multiple hosts.
 7. D, MAIL    PREFERENCES are used to define e-mail server settings and profiles for SiteScope e-mail alerts and status
 reports.
 8. E, PAGER PREFERENCES are used to define pager profiles for SiteScope pager alerts.
 9. J, USERS PREFERENCES are used to define multiple user logon profiles.
 10. H, ABSOLUTE SCHEDULE PREFERENCES are used to define custom schedules to run monitors at specific times of
 the week.




4-26                                                                                    Match Preferences with Descriptions
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Understanding Health Monitors
         SiteScope HEALTH is a special group of monitors that display information about the
         performance and availability of SiteScope itself. This information includes:

         •    Monitoring server resource usage

         •    Key processes

         •    Monitor load

         •    Integrity of key configuration files

         By default, the daily monitor logs record the SiteScope HEALTH monitoring data and let
         you create reports on SiteScope HEALTH performance.

         Use the HEALTH page to monitor the operability of SiteScope in real time.




Understanding Health Monitors                                                                 4-27
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Health Monitors Overview




                             Figure 4-22 Health Monitors

       The HEALTH monitor group is displayed as a special health icon within the top-level
       SITESCOPE node. Click the HEALTH node to view the contents of the HEALTH monitor
       group.

       Expand the HEALTH node to view the types of HEALTH monitors. For each HEALTH
       monitor, click the PROPERTIES tab to view the items to add or remove. The following
       HEALTH monitor types are available under the HEALTH node:

       •   BAC INTEGRATION STATISTICS. This monitor checks the system health of Business
           Availability Center (BAC).

       •   HEALTH OF SITESCOPE SERVER. This monitor checks internal SiteScope processes
           and resources.

       •   LOG EVENT CHECKER. This monitor checks for errors and warnings in the
           SiteScope error log.




4-28                                                                  Health Monitors Overview
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



         •    MONITOR LOAD CHECKER: This monitor checks the number of monitors being run
              and waiting to run.




Health Monitors Overview                                                                  4-29
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Diagnostic Tools




                              Figure 4-23 Diagnostics Tools

       SiteScope provides a number of utilities for building and testing monitors and exploring
       reported problems in the monitored environment. You can use these tools to preview the
       system response when configuring a particular monitor. Examples of "testable" monitor
       activities include validating network connectivity or verifying login authentication when
       accessing an external database or service.

       The categories of tools in SiteScope are:

       •   Application diagnostic tools, such as DNS lookup, Database Connection, and FTP
           server.

       •   Server diagnostics tools, such as Server Diagnostic tool, Network, Processes, and
           Services.

       •   Advanced diagnostics tools, such as New Server, Event Log, and Performance
           Counter Test.




4-30                                                                              Diagnostic Tools
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Summary
          In this chapter, you learned:

          •   Favorite views save a particular combination of content and presentation in the
              interface.

          •   The CONTENTS tab enables adding and managing subgroups, monitors, alerts, and
              reports to a group.

          •   The PROPERTIES tab enables you to highlight an existing group node and view its
              properties such as the group name and any dependencies set for it.

          •   The GLOBAL REPLACE tab enables you to update configurations across the entire
              monitoring infrastructure.

          •   The PREFERENCES container enables you to set preferences and options so that
              SiteScope integrates with your network environment.

          •   SiteScope health monitors display information about the performance and
              availability of SiteScope.

          •   SiteScope provides diagnostic tools to diagnose issues and facilitate monitor
              configuration.




Summary                                                                                        4-31
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Review Questions
            Answer the review questions in your book.
 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the
 end of the day.

 The answers to the questions below will be printed in the instructor book; the student book will show blank lines after each
 question.


            1.    What URL would you type in the address bar of a browser to open the new
                  SiteScope interface?

                  HTTP://LOCALHOST:8080/SITESCOPE                     __________________________________

            2.    Which tabs are available on the target interface on the right?

                  The target interface on the right has the DASHBOARD, CONTENTS, PROPERTIES, and
                  LOG FILES tabs.___________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

            3.    What are the different colors of the indicator lights on the Dashboard tab and what
                  do they signify?

                  The indicator lights can be red, yellow, or green. Red indicates an error status when
                  any monitor within a group is in error. Yellow indicates a warning status. Green
                  indicates an OK status. _____________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

            4.    How do you identify the active monitor availability icons?

                  The monitor availability icons are represented by the up and down arrows next to
                  the monitor status icons. ____________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

            5.    What does the GLOBAL REPLACE functionality enable you to do?

                  The GLOBAL REPLACE functionality enables you to change thresholds, logins and
                  passwords, monitor name, and many other values across your entire set of groups
                  and monitors within a SiteScope installation. ___________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________



4-32                                                                                                          Review Questions
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



              _______________________________________________________________

        6.   What is the purpose of health monitors?

             SiteScope HEALTH is a specially designed group of monitors that is used to monitor
             several key aspects of its own environment to help uncover monitor configuration
             problems as well as SiteScope server load.

              _______________________________________________________________

              _______________________________________________________________

              _______________________________________________________________

              _______________________________________________________________

        7.   What is the purpose of diagnostic tools?

             The SiteScope diagnostic tools are used to test the monitoring environment. This
             may include simply testing network connectivity or verifying login authentication
             for accessing an external database or service.

              _______________________________________________________________

              _______________________________________________________________

              _______________________________________________________________




Review Questions                                                                               4-33
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



Exercise: Setting Windows Remote Preferences
in SiteScope

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Become familiar with the steps to set up remote preferences for Windows in SiteScope.

 Specific Objectives
 At the end of this exercise, students should be able to set up remote preferences for Windows in SiteScope. To achieve this,
 students must:
 - Add a Windows server.
 - Test the Windows server.


            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to set up remote preferences for Windows
            in SiteScope.

            •     Part 1: Add a Windows server.

            •     Part 2: Test the Windows server.
                At the beginning of this exercise, create a test user account on the Training Server and provide the computer name,
            IP address, test user name, and password to the students.




4-34                                                  Exercise: Setting Windows Remote Preferences in SiteScope
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



         Part 1: Add a Windows Server
         1.   Open the SiteScope interface.

         2.   Under the PREFERENCES container, click MICROSOFT WINDOWS REMOTE
              PREFERENCES.

         3.   In the CONTENTS tab on the MICROSOFT WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES page,
              click NEW MICROSOFT WINDOWS SERVER. The NEW MICROSOFT WINDOWS
              SERVER page appears in the right panel.

         4.   In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the HOST field, type the computer name or IP
              address of the training server. If you do not know the details for the training server,
              please ask the instructor.

         5.   In the LOGIN field, type the login name for the user account identified by the
              instructor.

         6.   In the PASSWORD field, type the password for the user account identified by the
              instructor.

         7.   In the NAME field, type the name TRAININGSVR.

         8.   In the METHOD list, select the method used to connect to the training server. The
              default value is NETBIOS.
                The applicable services must be enabled on the remote server.


         9.   In the REMOTE MACHINE ENCODING field, type the appropriate encoding. The
              default value is CP1252.

         10. Click OK.




Exercise: Setting Windows Remote Preferences in SiteScope                                                  4-35
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



       Part 2: Test the Windows Server
       1.   Expand the MICROSOFT WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES container.

       2.   Right-click the TRAININGSVR node and then select TEST. A TEST PREFERENCE
            dialog box should appear with the message CONNECTION SUCCESSFUL.

       3.   Click CLOSE.




4-36                                Exercise: Setting Windows Remote Preferences in SiteScope
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



 Exercise: Setting Mail Preferences in SiteScope

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Become familiar with the steps to set up mail preferences in SiteScope.

 Specific Objectives
 At the end of this exercise, students should be able to set up mail preferences in SiteScope. To achieve this, students must:
 - Add an additional e-mail setting.
 - Add template and schedule.


            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to set up mail preferences in SiteScope.

            •     Part 1: Add an additional e-mail setting.

            •     Part 2: Add template and schedule.




Exercise: Setting Mail Preferences in SiteScope                                                                                  4-37
Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface



       Part 1: Add an Additional E-Mail Setting
       1.   Open the SiteScope interface.

       2.   Under the PREFERENCES container, click MAIL PREFERENCES.

       3.   In the CONTENTS tab on the MAIL PREFERENCES page, click NEW E-MAIL
            RECIPIENT. The NEW E-MAIL RECIPIENT page appears in the right panel.

       4.   In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the NAME field, type your name as the e-mail
            recipient.

       5.   In the E-MAIL TO field, type your e-mail address as the recipient for messages and
            alerts.




       Part 2: Add Template and Schedule
       1.   In the ADVANCED SETTINGS section, from the TEMPLATE list, select the template
            you want to use while sending the e-mail alerts.

       2.   From the SCHEDULE list, select the schedule to specify when you want these e-mail
            settings to be enabled.

       3.   Click OK.




4-38                                               Exercise: Setting Mail Preferences in SiteScope
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy




              SiteScope Monitoring Strategy
                                                                                                                    5
setoN rotcurtsnI

Purpose
This chapter explains the best practices for developing a grouping model, planning the monitoring strategy, and SiteScope
deployment.



          Objectives
          After completing this chapter, you will be able to:

          •      Describe the best practice methodology for SiteScope monitoring.

          •      Configure heartbeats and dependencies.

          •      Use a best practice approach for developing a grouping model.

          •      Use a best practice approach for planning a SiteScope deployment and when
                 planning to monitor an IT environment.




                                                                                                                            5-1
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 Monitoring Methodology




                                Figure 5-1 Monitoring Methodology

      Effective SiteScope deployments rely on a process-oriented approach with well defined
      milestones. Figure 5-1 shows the recommended sequence of steps to set up a monitoring
      environment with SiteScope.
         Walk through the SiteScope methodology. Tell a story or use a real-world example. Emphasize the iterative nature of
      some of the configuration activities, such as the alerting strategy.


      Here are the steps of the process:

      •     Review the business environment and identify the critical elements that will be
            monitored.

      •     Identify and configure the remote servers to be monitored.

      •     Decide on a grouping strategy and create a high-level grouping model.

      •     Decide on the alerting strategy and set up SiteScope alerts.

      •     Refine the number and types of monitors and counters and populate the groups.



5-2                                                                                           Monitoring Methodology
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



         •   Identify the reporting requirements.

         •   Set up SiteScope reports.

         •   Review the SiteScope effectiveness periodically and make changes to the
             environment as needed.




Monitoring Methodology                                                                     5-3
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 Introduction to the Grouping Model
      Within SiteScope, you can create any number of groups and subgroups of monitors. A
      well-designed grouping model maximizes coverage with effective alerting and
      informative reporting while minimizing maintenance.

      A poorly designed or ad hoc grouping strategy results in a disorganized and
      unmanageable grouping structure. It can cause problem events to go unnoticed. It can
      also generate an extreme number of alerts making it difficult to identify problems. As
      the number of monitored systems increases, the lack of a planning and strategy may
      cause the need for excessive maintenance and even result in ineffective reporting.

      To avoid these pitfalls, consider the following methods:

      •   Implement heartbeats and dependencies

      •   Practice a top-level grouping model

      •   Leverage guidelines for creating an effective grouping model




5-4                                                              Introduction to the Grouping Model
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 Heartbeats and Dependencies
         Heartbeat elements are key monitors that verify the availability of a business system or a
         resource. A heartbeat is a lightweight monitor that acts as an indicator of availability.
         For example, a ping monitor can indicate whether a server is up. Common candidates for
         heartbeat monitors are PORT and PING monitors.

         A dependency refers to the ability to control the execution of a monitor or a group of
         monitors based on the state of another monitor or a group of monitors. The purpose of a
         dependency is to execute a group of monitors or a single monitor only when the business
         system or resource they target is available thereby limiting the amount of work
         SiteScope performs. In this way dependencies help prevent a flood of monitor errors and
         alerts.

         To further explain dependencies consider the following example. A user wants to
         monitor CPU, disk space, and memory for a server. If these monitors execute against the
         server when it is not available and each triggers an alert, three alerts would be generated.
         To avoid this behavior, place the CPU, DISK SPACE, and MEMORY monitors in a
         group dependent on a ping monitor and make sure that the group executes only if the
         ping monitor returns an OK status. Thus, if the server is unavailable, the ping monitor
         will run, return a error, and generate only a single alert. The dependent group containing
         CPU, Disk Space, and Memory will not run and additional redundant alerts will not be
         generated.




Heartbeats and Dependencies                                                                      5-5
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 Top-Level Grouping Model Example




                  Figure 5-2 Example of Top-Level Grouping Model

      Figure 5-2 shows an example of a grouping model with three top-level groups:
      Application Monitors, Server Monitors, and Heartbeat Monitors. The Server Monitors
      group contains four subgroups for different types of servers. These subgroups contain
      individual monitors for the server and a child group for shared services. The child group
      contains the applicable monitors.

      The three top-level groups represent a logical organization of monitors implemented in
      the given SiteScope installation. These groups are organized as follows:

      •   Application Monitors: Contains monitors and groups targeting the high-level
          business applications and services of the organization.

      •   Server Monitors: Groups specific types of server resource monitors organized by
          platform or vendor.

      •   Heartbeat Monitors: Contains key processes and services that indicate the
          availability and health of a larger set of systems and services.



5-6                                                          Top-Level Grouping Model Example
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 Top-Level Grouping Model Advantages
         The top-level grouping model accomplishes the following:

         •   Alerts are sent to the right system and business owners.

         •   The SiteScope Dashboard is well organized and easy to navigate

         •   Few top-level groups

         •   Pyramid-like structure

         •   Problem areas and root causes are identified more easily.

         •   Easier incremental addition of groups and monitors.




Top-Level Grouping Model Advantages                                                              5-7
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 Grouping Guidelines
      While creating a grouping model, adhere to the following principles:

      •   The model is extensible in the sense that it easily accommodates the addition of new
          groups and monitors.

      •   The model represents logical parent-child relationships between the monitored
          assets.

      •   The model implements a well-defined naming convention for groups, subgroups,
          monitors, and any other monitoring objects.

      •   The complexity of the grouping hierarchy decreases when moving from the top
          level to lower levels.




5-8                                                                          Grouping Guidelines
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 Planning the Monitoring Strategy
         When planning the monitoring strategy for your IT infrastructure, consider the
         following:

         •    What to monitor?

              –    Monitor individual server components such as the CPU, the Memory, or the
                   Disks.

              –    Monitor individual software elements, such as all the applications running on a
                   particular platform.

              –    Monitor key services and processes such as the TNS Listener of an Oracle
                   Database or the availability of a Network Interface.

              –    Monitor transactions and business processes such as the ability of users to
                   login to the Corporate Web Site of a company.

         •    Determine the acceptable thresholds and what threshold represents a change in
              status?

              –    The threshold is based on the nature of the system or business process you are
                   monitoring. For instance, if you are monitoring a CPU, acceptable thresholds
                   are 60%-90% meaning that a utilization of under 60% results in a "Good"
                   status, anything above 60% but lower than 90% results in a "Warning" status
                   and whenever the CPU get to above or over 90%, set its status to "Error".

         •    How often must the system be checked?

              –    Ensure the availability of mission critical information systems by checking
                   regularly.

                   •    Avoid too high a frequency that overloads the system. For instance, there
                        is no need to frequently check the size of disks of a system with low I/O
                        activity. Set the frequency of the Disk Monitor to once every couple of
                        hours.

                   •    Avoid too low a frequency that delays detection of problems. For instance,
                        frequently check the responsiveness of your e-commerce web site since it
                        is most likely critical to the profitability of the business you are
                        monitoring.

         •    What actions to take when an event is detected?




Planning the Monitoring Strategy                                                                 5-9
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



            –     Use SiteScope e-mail or pager alerts to send notification when an event
                  threshold is triggered. This is the easiest and most common way of leveraging
                  SiteScope alerts.

            –     Use script alerts to take corrective actions. For instance, you can have a
                  "Service Restart" batch script execute whenever you detect that the service
                  being monitored is unresponsive or down.

            –     Use SNMP traps to provide integration with external systems. This method can
                  be used in order to provide an integration with other HP Software products or
                  3rd party systems such as Tivoli.
         The supported minimum frequency is 45 seconds. The exact frequency is dependent on the type of monitor.
       However, most monitors can be configured with a frequency of 5 to 15 minutes.




5-10                                                                             Planning the Monitoring Strategy
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 SiteScope Server Sizing
         An important element of successful SiteScope monitoring is the sizing of the server on
         which SiteScope is deployed.

         To size a SiteScope server deployment determine the following:

         •     Number of monitor instances that will execute simultaneously.

         •     Average run frequency for each monitor.

         •     Types of protocols and applications to be monitored.

         •     Amount of monitor data to retain on the server for reporting.
             More information on sizing considerations is provided in the advanced course.
            Refer students to support and articles in the knowledge base for more information on sizing. Sizing is considered
         here for completeness and to introduce the trade-off between the number of monitors on a box versus frequency.
           A four-way with 2 to 4gb of RAM can support approximately 4000 monitors that are a mix of lightweight and heavy
         monitors. This is an approximate and is dependent on the frequency with which monitors run.
            If necessary, free-up resources by lengthening the frequency between the monitor runs. This allows more points per
         box running less frequently.




SiteScope Server Sizing                                                                                                  5-11
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 Monitored Infrastructure Assessment
       A business system infrastructure assessment is recommended to identify the scope,
       deliverables, and constraints around which the monitor model needs to be developed.

       Follow these guidelines for performing business system infrastructure assessment:

       •   Gather technical and business requirements.

           –    Identify the business applications to be monitored.

           –    Identify the servers and network devices that support the business applications.

           –    Identify the heartbeat elements to be monitored.

       •   Identify stakeholders and key deliverables for the monitoring activity.

           –    Identify the reports to be generated.

           –    Identify the alert actions to be taken.

           –    Identify the receivers of alerts.

           –    Identify the SiteScope users.

           –    Identify stakeholders and the SiteScope elements they can access.

       •   Identify constraints for the monitoring system.

           –    Restrictions on protocols.
                   Protocol restrictions impact the types of monitors available to the model. Network traffic restrictions
                impact the number of monitors and the frequency of monitoring.


           –    User authentication requirements.

           –    Network traffic restrictions.




5-12                                                                           Monitored Infrastructure Assessment
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 Summary
          In this chapter, you learned:

          •   SiteScope deployment should be implemented as a well-defined sequence of
              planned milestones.

          •   Heartbeat elements are key monitors that indicate the availability of a particular
              business system or resource.

          •   Dependencies help prevent a flood of errors and redundant alerts.

          •   A well-designed grouping model helps create new groups, facilitates navigation,
              and represents logical parent-child relationships.

          •   When planning a monitoring strategy, identify the monitoring elements, the
              frequency of monitoring, and the action to be taken when an event is detected.




Summary                                                                                        5-13
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



 Review Questions
            Answer the review questions in your book.
 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the
 end of the day.

 The answers to the questions below will be printed in the instructor book; the student book will show blank lines after each
 question.


            1.    Give an example of a heartbeat monitor.

                  A PING monitor can be a heartbeat monitor. ____________________________

            2.    What is the advantage of making other monitors dependent on a heartbeat monitor?

                  Making other monitors dependent on a heartbeat monitor prevents monitor error
                  floods and alert floods. _____________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

            3.    What is a dependency?

                  A dependency refers to the ability to control the execution of a monitor or a group
                  of monitors based on the state of another monitor or a group of monitors. ____

                   _______________________________________________________________

            4.    Which are the three top-level groups in SiteScope’s grouping model?

                  Application Monitors, Server Monitors, and Heartbeat Monitors ____________

                   _______________________________________________________________

            5.    List the guidelines for developing a grouping model.

                  While creating a grouping model, ensure that the model is extensible to
                  accommodate groups and monitors in the future, represents logical parent-child
                  relationships, follows a single naming convention for both groups and subgroups,
                  and the complexity of the grouping hierarchy decreases when moving from the top
                  level to lower levels._______________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________




5-14                                                                                                          Review Questions
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy



        6.   List the steps for planning a monitoring strategy.

             When a planning a monitoring strategy, identify the monitoring elements, the
             threshold that represents a change in status, the frequency of monitoring, and the
             action to be taken when an event is detected.____________________________

              _______________________________________________________________

              _______________________________________________________________

              _______________________________________________________________

        7.   What are the key considerations for deploying SiteScope?

             The key considerations for deploying SiteScope are assessing the business system
             infrastructure, sizing the SiteScope server deployment, determining the network
             location and environment, and fine-tuning the Windows environment. _______

              _______________________________________________________________

              _______________________________________________________________




Review Questions                                                                            5-15
SiteScope Monitoring Strategy




5-16              Review Questions
Managing Groups and Monitors




          Managing Groups and Monitors
                                                                                                                   6
setoN rotcurtsnI

Purpose
This chapter explains how to create and configure groups and monitors, configure SiteScope with Business Availability Center
(BAC), and use filters and Solution Templates in SiteScope.



          Objectives
          After completing this chapter, you will be able to:

          •      Navigate the SiteScope interface using the DASHBOARD tab.

          •      Create and configure groups and monitors.

          •      Acknowledge Monitor errors.

          •      Use threshold settings and baselining.

          •      Use filters.




                                                                                                                               6-1
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Dashboard Views and Nodes




                              Figure 6-1 Views and Nodes

      SiteScope collects real-time performance and availability metric data from infrastructure
      components being monitored such as servers, applications, processes, services, SNMP-
      enabled devices, etc.

      The SiteScope DASHBOARD contains the latest available group and monitor status and
      data readings. At the highest level, the SiteScope node, the DASHBOARD contains a list
      of groups, the status of each group, the time the status was last updated and an indicator
      of triggered alerts for the particular group.

      The data displayed in the DASHBOARD tab represents the context selected in the tree - the
      global SiteScope view, an individual group view, or a specific monitor.

      Figure 6-1 shows the SiteScope (global view) and the monitor nodes along with their
      Dashboard views.




6-2                                                                 Dashboard Views and Nodes
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Building Groups
         Groups are analogous to folders. They act as containers for monitors and other groups.
         By creating hierarchies of groups and sub groups the user can organize related monitors
         so that the layout represents logical relationships existing in the monitored
         infrastructure.

         Groups are first added to the top-level SITESCOPE node and optionally within other
         groups to form a hierarchy. Working with Groups involves the following tasks:

         •    Create a group.

         •    Provide a name (Main Settings), and optionally, a description, a dependency and a
              dependency condition (Advanced Settings).

         •    Configure the CONTENTS tab for the group.

         •    Add monitors to the group and configure alerts.




Building Groups                                                                               6-3
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Creating a Group




                                 Figure 6-2 New Group

      To create a group, right-click the SITESCOPE node, and then select NEW GROUP.

      When you select NEW GROUP, a NEW SITESCOPE GROUP window appears. To specify
      details for a new group, do the following:

      1.   In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the GROUP NAME field, type a name for the
           group.

      2.   In the ADVANCED SETTINGS section:

           a)   In the GROUP DESCRIPTION field, provide a description for the group.

           b)   Create a dependency for the group.

      3.   Click OK.



6-4                                                                          Creating a Group
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Configuring Group Contents




                                      Figure 6-3 Group Configurations

         Figure 6-3 shows the CONTENTS tab of the group that you just created. The buttons in
         the right panel are used to add monitors and make modifications to the group.
            Alternatively, you can right-click the group in the tree to make changes to the group.


         To add a new monitor to the group, click NEW MONITOR.

         To add a subgroup, click NEW GROUP.

         To create an alert to be triggered if there is an error, click NEW ALERT.
            You will learn about creating alerts in Chapter 7: Configuring Alerts.


         To set an automated management report or quick report to be e-mailed according to the
         mail settings, click NEW REPORT.
            You will learn about creating reports in Chapter 9: Generating Reports.




Configuring Group Contents                                                                                        6-5
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Creating a Monitor




                                Figure 6-4 New Monitor

      To add a new monitor to a SiteScope group, perform the following steps:

      1.   Select from the following options:

           –   In the monitor tree, right-click the SiteScope group into which you want to add
               a monitor. From the menu, select NEW MONITOR. The NEW SITESCOPE
               MONITOR window appears.

           –   Highlight the SiteScope group into which you want to add a monitor. On the
               CONTENTS tab, click NEW MONITOR. The NEW SITESCOPE MONITOR window
               appears.

      2.   From the alphabetical list, select the desired monitor. You can also choose to view
           only the monitors of a certain category type by selecting the desired monitor
           category from the Category list.

      3.   Select the type of monitor you want to add. The applicable ADD MONITOR window
           appears.



6-6                                                                          Creating a Monitor
Managing Groups and Monitors



         4.   Type the configuration settings for the monitor. The MAIN, ADVANCED, and
              THRESHOLD SETTINGS vary from one monitor type to another.

         5.   Enable or disable the monitor as required.

         6.   Enable or disable the alerts associated with this monitor as required.

         7.   Select from the following options in HP BAC LOGGING:

              –      DO NOT REPORT TO HP BUSINESS AVAILABILITY CENTER

              –      REPORT EVERYTHING (ALL MONITORS AND ALL MEASUREMENTS): This
                     option sends all monitor data to HP Business Availability Center each time that
                     the monitor runs.

              –      REPORT MONITOR LEVEL DATA (NO MEASUREMENTS). This option sends
                     only monitor category, status string, and other basic data each time that the
                     monitor runs.

              –      REPORT MONITOR LEVEL DATA AND MEASUREMENTS WITH THRESHOLDS.
                     This option sends monitor category, status string, as well as performance
                     counter data for any counters that have been set with thresholds (for example,
                     Error If, Warning If). The data is sent each time the monitor runs.

              –      REPORT STATUS CHANGES (NO MEASUREMENTS). This option sends only
                     monitor category, status string, and other basic data only when the monitor
                     reports a change in status.

         8.   In the CATEGORY SETTINGS section, assign a category to the monitor. This is
              optional and is done only if there are any categories defined.

         9.   Click ADD. The monitor is added to the monitor tree.

         The monitors are ready to monitor other monitors in the network.




Creating a Monitor                                                                                   6-7
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Monitor Types




                                        Figure 6-5 Monitor Types

      When you click NEW MONITOR or select NEW MONITOR from the right-click menu, an
      alphabetized list of monitor types appears in the right panel, as shown in Figure 6-5.
          You can also view monitors listed by category. To do this, use the drop down menu on the Category list box to filter
      the list by a specific category.


      SiteScope has over 100 built-in types of monitors that are used to collect metric data
      about different aspects of an IT infrastructure. These include monitors for server
      hardware, network services, operating systems, applications, and application
      components, to name a few. You can create instances of these monitor types and
      configure them to "point" to a specific physical element in the IT infrastructure. For
      instance, to monitor the CPU utilization on a server, select the CPU type monitor and set
      its "Server" attribute to address of the server. Some monitors are unlocked by the
      optional license.




6-8                                                                                                          Monitor Types
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Modifying Monitor Settings
         To modify the settings for a monitor, select the monitor in the left tree and click the
         PROPERTIES tab in the right panel. The available sections in the PROPERTIES tab are:

         •    MAIN SETTINGS

         •    ADVANCED SETTINGS

         •    ENABLE/DISABLE MONITOR

         •    ENABLE/DISABLE ALERTS

         •    THRESHOLD SETTINGS

         •    CUSTOM PROPERTIES

         •    HP BAC LOGGING

         •    CATEGORY SETTINGS




Modifying Monitor Settings                                                                     6-9
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Modifying Main Settings




                                Figure 6-6 Main Settings

       To modify a monitor’s configuration, click EDIT in the PROPERTIES tab for the monitor.

       Figure 6-6 shows the MAIN SETTINGS section of an example monitor of the PING
       monitor type. In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the EDIT SERVICE panel, you can edit the
       following settings: Name, Frequency of monitoring, Specific server to monitor, and, in
       the case of a "Service"-type monitor, the name of the service to be monitored.




6-10                                                                    Modifying Main Settings
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Modifying Advanced Settings
         The ADVANCED SETTINGS section enables you to provide detailed specifications for the
         monitor. The following are key fields in this section:

         •    SHOW RUN RESULTS ON UPDATE check box: Use this check box to run the monitor
              automatically whenever changes are made.

         •    VERIFY ERROR check box: Use this check box to make the monitor rerun
              immediately if it returns an error status. This feature provides an accurate
              assessment for incidental errors by minimizing false positives. However, enabling
              this property adds a significant load to the SiteScope server. Enable this property
              only for troubleshooting or for the most critical monitors.

         •    ERROR FREQUENCY field: Use this field to enable a monitor to run more frequently
              or less frequently if the monitor detects an error. The monitor reverts to its standard
              run interval when it returns to the OK state.

         •    MONITOR SCHEDULE field: Use this field to select a schedule if you want the
              monitor to run only on certain days or on a fixed schedule.

         •    DEPENDS ON field: Use this field to make the running of this monitor dependent on
              the status of another monitor.




Modifying Advanced Settings                                                                     6-11
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Editing Monitor Dependencies




                           Figure 6-7 Monitor Dependencies

       The ADVANCED SETTINGS section enables you to set monitor dependencies. It is used to
       specify the following dependency settings:

       •   DEPENDS ON tree: Enables you to make the running of the monitor being
           configured dependent on the status of another monitor or group. For instance, you
           can instruct SiteScope that the TNS Listener (key Oracle service) monitor is
           dependent on the port monitor checking the status of port "1521" (standard Oracle
           database port).

       •   DEPENDS CONDITION list: Enables you to select the status category or condition of
           the DEPENDS ON monitor that ensures that the monitor, which is being configured,
           run normally. The monitor being configured runs normally as long as the monitor
           selected in the DEPENDS ON field reports the condition selected in this field. For
           instance, you can instruct SiteScope to run the TNS Listener monitor only if the
           port monitor checking port 1521 returns an OK status.




6-12                                                              Editing Monitor Dependencies
Managing Groups and Monitors



         •    MONITOR DESCRIPTION field: Enables you to provide a monitor description. You
              can add HTML tags to the description for format and style. These descriptions help
              customized the look and feel of the application and act as in-line documentation
              describing the purpose and effect of the monitors being configured.

         •    REPORT DESCRIPTION field: Enables you to clarify the role of a monitor by
              specifying descriptions such as Network Traffic or Main Server Response Time.
              This description is displayed on each bar chart and graph in management reports.




Editing Monitor Dependencies                                                               6-13
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Enabling or Disabling a Monitor




                               Figure 6-8 Enable or Disable a Monitor

       The ENABLE/DISABLE MONITOR section shown in Figure 6-8 is used to enable or disable
       a monitor temporarily or indefinitely. You can choose to disable the monitor
       immediately or for a time interval in the future. Although the monitor schedule remains
       in place, the monitor does not run for the duration that it is disabled. You can choose to
       temporarily disable a monitor if the monitor it depends on is in error. For instance, there
       would be no point in checking the availability of port 80 on the web server if the web
       server itself is down.
          Disabling a monitor indefinitely seriously impacts the effectiveness of system availability monitoring in complex
       environments. The disabled monitors are forgotten if buried in an infrequently viewed subgroup. It is recommended that
       you disable monitors for only a limited time.




6-14                                                                                  Enabling or Disabling a Monitor
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Enabling or Disabling Alerts




                               Figure 6-9 Alert Enable or Disable

          The ENABLE/DISABLE ALERTS section shown in Figure 6-9, is used to enable and
          disable alert actions triggered by individual monitors or by groups. If one or more alerts
          are defined for a monitor, an expandable tree fragment is displayed. This tree lists all
          alerts of the monitor, which are relative to the hierarchy element to which the alert is
          assigned. For example, if a single alert is assigned to a monitor, the tree displays only
          the monitor and the alert. If a global alert and an alert for the monitor group are defined,
          the tree displays the SITESCOPE node and the group node along with the alert nodes for
          those elements.




Enabling or Disabling Alerts                                                                     6-15
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Understanding Threshold Settings




                             Figure 6-10 Threshold Settings

       You use the THRESHOLD SETTINGS section to set logical conditions that determine the
       reported status of each monitor instance. The status is determined after comparing the
       monitor result to the threshold settings. For instance, if the CPU monitor status is
       configured as "Good" when the CPU utilization reads at 80% or lower, and the CPU
       monitor returns 30% utilization, then the monitor will report a “Good” status.

       The THRESHOLD SETTINGS section is used to customize the requirements for the GOOD,
       WARNING, and ERROR status definitions. Shown in Figure 6-10, we have the default
       status for the Ping Windows 2003 Server Monitor set to "Good." The status will turn to
       "Error" if the service does not respond to ping (no packets are returned from a ping
       request) and back to "Good" when the service is running (all packets are returned).




6-16                                                           Understanding Threshold Settings
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Using Baselines to Set Thresholds




                                    Figure 6-11 Baselining

         Instead of setting logic conditions manually in the THRESHOLD SETTINGS for each
         monitor instance, you can have SiteScope calculate thresholds for one or more monitor
         instances using a baseline. Baseline data is gathered from monitor performance metrics
         over a period of time and is used to provide a comparison for establishing acceptable or
         expected threshold ranges. Baselines enable you to understand how your applications
         typically perform and determine whether a performance problem is an isolated incident
         or a sign of a significant downward performance trend.

         To enable SiteScope to begin calculating baselines, right-click the SiteScope node
         container, a group, or a monitor, and select BASELINING > CALCULATE.

         You can select the schedule ranges used for collecting baseline threshold data. This
         enables you to restrict to certain days or hours of the week the periods during which
         SiteScope collects data for the baseline calculation. For example, you may want the
         monitor status to be based on results gathered during peak business hours only.

         The baseline engine calculates the baseline for each schedule using measurements
         collected from the monitors during the data collection period.



Using Baselines to Set Thresholds                                                             6-17
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Baseline Settings




                                Figure 6-12 Baseline Settings

       You can view and define the values of global SiteScope baseline settings in
       INFRASTRUCTURE SETTINGS PREFERENCES. This includes calculation and activation
       priority settings, the number of days of historical data to include in baseline calculations,
       the minimum number of days and samples required to calculate the baseline, and the
       offset for calculating the error boundary.

       Note: Before the baseline is calculated, the monitor should be enabled and allowed to
       run for a period long enough for SiteScope to accumulate sufficient data to calculate the
       baseline. This period depends on the BASELINE SETTINGS.




6-18                                                                               Baseline Settings
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Reviewing the Baseline Data




                        Figure 6-13 Review and Activate the Baselines

         Once the baseline calculations have been completed, you can review the summary of
         calculated monitors and baseline data by right-clicking the SiteScope node, a group, or a
         monitor and select BASELINING > REVIEW & ACTIVATE.

         The REVIEW & ACTIVATE dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-13, includes the SiteScope
         monitor name and the date on which the baseline was calculated. The ERROR STATUS
         REDUCTION and WARNING STATUS REDUCTION columns display the reduction in the
         number of error or warning statuses for a monitor if the baseline threshold were applied.
         For example, suppose you manually configure the threshold status for CPU Utilization
         to Error if >= 65% and there are 5 error statuses for the CPU monitor (of which 3 errors



Reviewing the Baseline Data                                                                  6-19
Managing Groups and Monitors



       are for data samples between 65%-70%, and 2 errors for above 70%). If you have
       SiteScope calculate the threshold using a baseline and the threshold is set to Error if >=
       70%, the ERROR STATUS REDUCTION would be 3.

       The VIEW GRAPHS link displays a graphical representation of baseline data for all the
       measurements of the monitor, as shown in Figure 6-14




                               Figure 6-14 Threshold Graph

       The graph shows:

       •   The current warning and error thresholds.

       •   The baseline warning and error thresholds.

       •   Historic data of all baseline-related monitor measurements over a 24-hour time
           period (from 00:00-23:59).

       Activate the Baseline Settings
       To activate the baseline settings, select the monitors for which you want to set
       thresholds using the calculated baseline and click ACTIVATE.

       Note: If you want to revert to the current monitor configuration, select the option to save
       the current monitor configuration before activating the baseline configuration.




6-20                                                                  Reviewing the Baseline Data
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Baseline Status




                                  Figure 6-15 Baseline Status

         To create a report showing information about each monitor in the selected context,
         including each monitor's baseline status and baseline status description, right-click the
         SiteScope node, a group, or a monitor and select BASELINING > STATUS REPORT.

         You can also track the baseline status for a monitor in the monitor's Main Settings. See
         Figure 6-16.




Baseline Status                                                                               6-21
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Modifying Baseline Thresholds




                      Figure 6-16 Modifying Baseline Thresholds

       In the THRESHOLD SETTINGS, you can view the baseline thresholds and manually fine-
       tune the thresholds by changing the percentile value from which the threshold value is
       derived.

       As shown in Figure 6-16, the ERROR IF PERCENT USED (%) threshold value is 73.22
       (non-editable) and the percentile value is 98. To change the threshold value, you must
       change the percentile value from which the threshold value is derived. To help you
       understand what the new threshold value will be after you change the percentile value,
       click the Percentiles Table icon to open the percentile table that shows the threshold
       value mapped to each percentile range.

            Percentiles Table icon




6-22                                                              Modifying Baseline Thresholds
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Acknowledging an Error in Monitoring




                             Figure 6-17 Error Acknowledgement

         If a monitor displays an error status, the administrator can acknowledge the error to clear
         the red status from the DASHBOARD and indicate that an action has been taken to
         investigate and resolve the problem.

         The DASHBOARD view for a monitor contains a small downward arrow (drop down
         menu) next to the monitor name. To acknowledge the error, select ADD
         ACKNOWLEDGEMENT from the drop down menu. An ACKNOWLEDGE dialog box
         appears, as shown in Figure 6-18.

         The ACKNOWLEDGE dialog box is used to:

         •    Add a comment for the acknowledgement.

         •    Disable alerts for a specified time period.




Acknowledging an Error in Monitoring                                                           6-23
Managing Groups and Monitors



       •   Disable alerts based on a one-time schedule.

       •   Undo a one-time schedule.

       •   Add a description for a disabled alert and view the acknowledgement log.




                          Figure 6-18 Acknowledge Window




6-24                                                      Acknowledging an Error in Monitoring
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Modifying an Acknowledgement




                       Figure 6-19 Acknowledgement Modification

        When you click ACKNOWLEDGE, the ACKNOWLEDGE WINDOW closes and the
        DASHBOARD view appears, as shown in Figure 6-19. Move the mouse pointer over the
        check mark in the Acknowledged column to check the acknowledgement status for a
        monitor. A tool tip is displayed that indicates the acknowledgement status. Click the
        drop down menu adjacent to the monitor name to edit or delete the acknowledgement.

        SiteScope keeps a record of when the problem was acknowledged, what actions have
        been taken, and by which user. In the figure, the check box shows that the monitor was
        acknowledged by the Administrator.




Modifying an Acknowledgement                                                              6-25
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Filter Icon




                                 Figure 6-20 Filter Icon

       DASHBOARD filters enable you to customize the content of the information displayed in
       the DASHBOARD. Filters are very useful in complex group and monitor implementations
       when searching for particular monitor types or statuses. For example, you may want to
       view only the monitors that are in a Warning state or only those that are in Error.

       Figure 6-20 shows the FILTER icon on the far right of the DASHBOARD view.




6-26                                                                               Filter Icon
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Filtering Views in SiteScope




                                    Figure 6-21 Filter Selection

          Filters are used to specify the criteria to display monitors in the DASHBOARD view to
          generate a list of monitors meeting certain search condition. To display the DASHBOARD
          FILTER view, as shown in Figure 6-21, click the FILTER icon in the DASHBOARD view.
          This interface lets you define filtering settings.

          The most common filters types are the following:

          •    MONITOR TYPE lets you filter monitors using monitor type.

          •    STATUS lets you select the status for the filter.

          •    ACKNOWLEDGED lets you filter based on whether the alerts have been
               acknowledged.




Filtering Views in SiteScope                                                               6-27
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Moving Objects




                                 Figure 6-22 Object Copy

       When working with SiteScope you can move objects such as groups, monitors, alerts,
       and reports in the explorer tree.

       To move an object in the explorer tree, you need to:

       •   Copy the object.

       •   Paste the object.

       •   Delete the original object.

       To copy an object, right-click the object and select COPY.

       To paste an object, right-click the target group and select PASTE.

       To delete an object, right-click the original object and select DELETE. A confirmation
       window appears. Click OK to delete the object.




6-28                                                                              Moving Objects
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Summary
          In this chapter, you learned:

          •   The acknowledgement feature in the SiteScope DASHBOARD view enables you to
              acknowledge monitor errors.

          •   The CONTENTS tab enables you to create new groups, monitors, alerts, and reports.

          •   The PROPERTIES tab enables you to modify monitor, alert, and report
              configurations.

          •   Threshold settings can set logical conditions for a monitor and baselining can be
              used to set dynamic thresholds.




Summary                                                                                      6-29
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Review Questions
            Answer the review questions in your book.
 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the
 end of the day.

 The answers to the questions below will be printed in the instructor book; the student book will show blank lines after each
 question.


            1.    Where can you change the frequency of a monitor?

                  The frequency of a monitor can be changed in the MAIN SETTINGS section in the
                  PROPERTIES tab of the monitor. ______________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

            2.    Which tab enables you to add a new monitor to a group?

                  A new monitor can be added to a group in the CONTENTS tab. ______________

            3.    How can you temporarily disable a monitor?

                  A monitor can be temporarily disabled in the ENABLE/DISABLE MONITOR section in
                  the PROPERTIES tab. _______________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

            4.    How can you move a monitor in the left tree of the SiteScope interface?

                  To move a monitor, use the right-click menu to copy the monitor, paste it to a new
                  location, and delete the original monitor._______________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

            5.    What is the FILTER icon used for?

                  The FILTER icon enables customization of the display information. For example,
                  you may use the FILTER icon to see only those monitors that are in warning state.

                   _______________________________________________________________




6-30                                                                                                          Review Questions
Managing Groups and Monitors



 Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Familiarize yourself with the steps to create and test a new simple monitor.

 Specific Objectives
 At the end of this exercise, students should be able to do the following to create and test a new simple monitor:
 - Create a new group.
 - Create a new SERVICE monitor.
 - Test the monitor.

 Considerations
 In this exercise, students are requested to stop the Messenger service. Ensure that classroom computers have the Messenger
 service. If not, investigate the services on the student training computers to find one or two services common to all classroom
 machines that do not disable the computer if stopped. Windows Time, Themes, Task Scheduler are possible candidates.


            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to create and test a new monitor.

            •     Part 1: Create a new group.

            •     Part 2: Create a new SERVICE monitor.

            •     Part 3: Test the SERVICE monitor.




Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor                                                                                 6-31
Managing Groups and Monitors



       Part 1: Create a New Group
       1.   Right-click the SITESCOPE node container.

       2.   Select NEW GROUP.

       3.   In the GROUP NAME field, type a name for the group and click OK.




6-32                                               Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor
Managing Groups and Monitors



         Part 2: Create a New Service Monitor
         Note: Go to the CONTROL PANEL ->ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS directory on your test
         system. Locate the services that are running on the system (whose status is STARTED).
         Choose a service to monitor, such as MESSENGER, DHCP, or HTTP. For the purpose of
         this lab, the MESSENGER service is used.

         1.   Right-click the new group that you created and select NEW MONITOR.

         2.   In the NEW SITESCOPE MONITOR section, click SERVICE.

         3.   In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the NAME field, type a name for the monitor.

         4.   In the FREQUENCY field, set the frequency to 30 seconds.

         5.   From the SYSTEM SERVICES list, select MESSENGER.

         6.   Click OK. The RUN dialog box appears.

         7.   Click CLOSE to close the dialog box.




Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor                                              6-33
Managing Groups and Monitors



       Part 3: Test the Service Monitor
       1.   Right-click the new monitor and click RUN. The RUN dialog box appears, showing
            the STATUS as GOOD.

       2.   From ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS > SERVICES in CONTROL PANEL, stop the service
            temporarily.

       3.   Repeat step 1. The RUN dialog box appears, showing the STATUS as ERROR.

       4.   Restart the service from ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS > SERVICES.

       5.   Repeat step 1. The RUN dialog box appears, showing the STATUS as GOOD.




6-34                                              Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor
Configuring Alerts




                                                              Configuring Alerts
                                                                                                                       7
setoN rotcurtsnI

Purpose
This chapter describes how to configure alerts in SiteScope. It discusses identification of alerting strategies, how to use the LOG
FILES tab, and recovery scripts.


           Objectives
           After completing this chapter, you will be able to:

           •     Define and configure alerts.

           •     Identify the purpose of alert filters.

           •     View alert logs.




                                                                                                                                7-1
Configuring Alerts



 Defining an Alert
      SiteScope alerts are notification actions triggered when there is a change in the monitor
      status. SiteScope alerts are configured for individual monitors or group of monitors.

      The SiteScope DASHBOARD indicates the existence of configured alerts with a small red
      triangle icon to the right of each group or monitor. The icon signifies that one or more
      alerts have been configured for that particular group or monitor.

      A SiteScope monitor status may change from GOOD to ERROR if the monitored
      component experiences a failure or returns a data reading which is classified as ERROR
      according to the thresholds being setup. For instance, the CPU monitor's status may
      change to ERROR if the CPU utilization climbs to 80% or higher.

      In addition to email and pager alerts there are also advanced alerts. A special case of
      alert is the Script Alert. The SCRIPT alert can respond to problems and automatically
      initiate recovery scripts. You can configure the SCRIPT alert to execute a command to
      restart a server or a service which appears to be "hung".
         SCRIPT alert is covered later in the chapter.




7-2                                                                             Defining an Alert
Configuring Alerts



 Types of Alerts
          •       Database alerts can forward system fault data and other status information to any
                  SQL-compliant database.

          •       Disable or Enable Monitors alerts can turn on or turn off the triggering of alerts
                  for monitors. This is useful for times when server maintenance or other activities
                  are being performed that would logically result in errors for some monitors and
                  cause unnecessary alerts to be generated.

          •       Email alerts forward event notifications from SiteScope to a designated e-mail
                  address.

          •       Log Event alerts can be used to extend the types of events that are logged to a
                  Windows Application Event Log. This provides a way to forward event data to log
                  query systems that may not normally be logged by the Windows operating system.

          •       Pager alerts forward event notifications from SiteScope to designated electronic
                  pagers.

          •       Post alerts use the Common Gateway Interface protocol to forward POST data to a
                  CGI enabled program. This can be used to forward event data to CGI script on
                  another server that is a front-end for a trouble ticket system or reporting database.
                  This alert type also provides a way of sending alert information through a firewall
                  using HTTP or HTTPS without having to make other security changes.

          •       Script alerts can automatically initiate recovery scripts. You can configure a Script
                  alert to execute a command to restart a server or a service.

          •       SMS alerts are designed to transmit the name of the SiteScope monitor that has
                  reported an event condition and the status of that monitor only in the content of the
                  message.

          •       SNMP Trap alerts forward event data from any type of SiteScope monitor to an
                  SNMP enabled host or management system. This means that SiteScope can be used
                  to monitor and report events for applications and systems that do not have their own
                  SNMP agent. For example, this can be used to send measurement data from a
                  SiteScope Windows Performance Counter based monitor type or a URL monitor in
                  the form of an SNMP trap.

          •       Sound alerts play a specific audio file when an alert is generated.




Types of Alerts                                                                                       7-3
Configuring Alerts



 Preventing Alert Floods




                                 Figure 7-1 Alert Floods

      Heartbeat elements are services that indicate the availability of a particular business
      system or resource. They are used to set dependencies in the IT infrastructure. A good
      monitoring and alerting strategy minimizes monitor error floods and alert floods.

      For example, consider the model in Figure 7-1. In this model, a Heartbeat monitor pings
      the Oracle server. Also, a group of Oracle stats are dependent on the Oracle server ping
      monitor, which is the Heartbeat monitor. You can set up a dependency relationship such
      that the Oracle stats group runs only if the ping monitor returns an OK status. Therefore,
      if there are 50 alerts associated with various Oracle stats, and one alert associated with
      the Oracle Heartbeat, in the event of an error, you receive only one alert, which is for the
      Heartbeat monitor.




7-4                                                                        Preventing Alert Floods
Configuring Alerts



 Configuring Alerts
          Alerts can be configured for an individual monitor or a group of monitors.

          By default, whenever a new monitor is created, no alerts are configured. To configure
          alerts, you need to go through the process of creating alerts using the Alert Actions
          Wizard. After alerts are created, the alerts can be edited and refined further through the
          addition of filters.

          To view the alerts configured for a particular group or monitor, access the alert icon.




Configuring Alerts                                                                                  7-5
Configuring Alerts



 The Alert Icon




                                Figure 7-2 The Alert Icon

      To view the alerts that are configured for a monitor, highlight the monitor. The absence
      of an alert icon indicates that there are no alerts for that monitor.

      Figure 7-2 shows that an alert exists under the monitor entry on the left. The right-click
      options let you edit, copy, delete, and test the alert.




7-6                                                                                The Alert Icon
Configuring Alerts



 Adding New Alerts




         To create a new alert, do the following:

         1.   In the explorer tree, select the SiteScope group or monitor with which you want to
              associate the alert definition. Right-click to select the NEW ALERT menu option or,
              alternatively, display the CONTENTS tab from the right panel view menu.

              or

              If you are inside the CONTENTS tab, at the top of the CONTENTS view or at the
              bottom of the ALERTS section of the CONTENTS area, click the NEW ALERT button.
              Alternately, you can right-click the container in the left menu to display the
              container action menu and select NEW ALERT. The ADD ALERT selection page is
              displayed in the content panel.

         2.   The New Alert window displays. From the New Alert window, enter a name for the
              alert that you want to create.

         3.   Click ADD ACTION to open the Alert Action Wizard to create actions for the alert.




Adding New Alerts                                                                              7-7
Configuring Alerts



 Alert Action Wizard: Step 1




                         Figure 7-3 Alert Action Wizard: Step 1

      Select the type of alert action that you want to create from the list of possible alert types.

      For a description of alert types, see “Types of Alerts” on page 7-3.




7-8                                                                      Alert Action Wizard: Step 1
Configuring Alerts



 Alert Action Wizard: Step 2




                              Figure 7-4 Alert Action Wizard: Step 2

          Step 2 of the Alert Action Wizard requires you to define the actions that should be taken
          when an alert is generated.

          For example, in Figure 7-4, the email alert action type requires you to enter the names
          and email adresses associated with the people who should receive the email alert when a
          monitor or group’s status changes.

          Select the Mark this action to close alert option to close the alert. When the status
          changes and the alert trigger condition is no longer true, this action closes the alert and
          sends a close notification by adding the word Close to the message sent.




Alert Action Wizard: Step 2                                                                        7-9
Configuring Alerts



 Alert Action Wizard: Step 3




                         Figure 7-5 Alert Action Wizard: Step 3

       TRIGGER - This category is used to select the monitor status category that should be used
       to trigger the alert action. Alerts are triggered when the monitor status changes from one
       state to another. The options are:

       •   Error. Alerts are triggered if the monitor was previously reporting a status of Good.

       •   Good. Alerts are triggered if the monitor was previously reporting a status of Error.

       •   Unavailable. Alerts are triggered if the monitored machine was previously
           available and is no longer.

       •   Warning. Alerts are triggered if the monitor was previously reporting a status of
           Good.




7-10                                                                   Alert Action Wizard: Step 3
Configuring Alerts



 Alert Action Wizard: Step 4




                              Figure 7-6 Alert Action Wizard: Step 4

          TRIGGER SETTINGS – This option is used to select the number of times the applicable
          monitor status condition should be met before action is dispatched. The default is to
          trigger the alert ONCE, AFTER CONDITION OCCURS EXACTLY 1 TIMES. The TRIGGER
          SETTINGS options are as follows, depending on the ALERT CATEGORY selected:

               –    ESCALATE, AFTER ACTION OCCURRED EXACTLY N TIMES

               –    ALWAYS, AFTER THE CONDITION HAS OCCURRED AT LEAST N TIMES

               –    ONCE, AFTER THE CONDITION OCCURS EXACTLY N TIMES

               –    INITIALLY AFTER X TIMES, AND REPEAT EVERY Y TIMES AFTERWARDS

               –    ONCE, AFTER X GROUP ERRORS

               –    ONCE, AFTER ALL MONITORS IN THIS GROUP ARE IN ERROR




Alert Action Wizard: Step 4                                                                  7-11
Configuring Alerts



 Adding Multiple Actions to an Alert




                             Figure 7-7 Multiple Alert Actions

       You can create multiple alert actions for an alert scheme. For example, you can create an
       alert action to send a sound alert and another alert action to send an e-mail alert. Both are
       sent when the alert is triggered. You can also set different schedules for the different
       actions within the same alert definition. For example, you can schedule an e-mail alert
       action to be sent during regular working hours and an SMS alert action for evening and
       night hours. Both are triggered by the same change in condition but are sent at different
       times, depending on when the alert is triggered.

       You can also make one alert action dependent on another alert action. This enables you
       to instruct SiteScope to send one type of alert when the trigger condition is first met and
       send another type of alert only when the first type of alert has been sent a number of
       times.

       Creating alert actions for an alert enables you to copy those alert actions into other
       monitors or groups for use by other alerts. To use alert actions for other alerts, you must
       copy the alert and paste it into another monitor or group. All the alert actions for the alert
       are copied into the new alert. You can then edit the alert to be triggered for the new
       target monitor or group.




7-12                                                               Adding Multiple Actions to an Alert
Configuring Alerts



 Setting Filters




                                      Figure 7-8 Filter Settings

           Alert filters define the scope of the alert target.

           The FILTER SETTINGS section provides the following filtering options:

           •      NAME MATCH - Only alert for monitors with a name matching the specified value.

           •      STATUS MATCH - Only alert for monitors with a status matching the specified
                  value.

           •      MONITOR TYPE MATCH - Only alert for monitors of the specified type.

           Note that the NAME MATCH and STATUS MATCH fields accept REGULAR EXPRESSIONS.

           Figure 7-8 shows the FILTERING SETTINGS options, where you select a monitor type
           alert filter to limit the alert action.

           In the CATEGORY SETTINGS section, you can use the CATEGORY attribute to assign an
           alert to an already defined category.

           The ADVANCED SETTINGS section enables you to provide a thorough description of the
           alert. This description is available only while you edit an alert or view alert properties.



Setting Filters                                                                                   7-13
Configuring Alerts



 Viewing Alert Logs




                                   Figure 7-9 Alert Logs

       SiteScope maintains log files that are useful for:

       •   Understanding performance issues

       •   Troubleshooting monitor and alert problems

       •   Reviewing SiteScope management actions

       You can access the SiteScope log files in the LOG FILES tab. The LOG FILES tab is
       available only on the SITESCOPE root node and the HEALTH node in the monitor tree.
       Click the log type to view the log.

       Alert logs record alert information whenever SiteScope generates an alert. This can be
       used to troubleshoot alert actions and to confirm that alerts were sent.




7-14                                                                         Viewing Alert Logs
Configuring Alerts



 Summary
          In this chapter, you learned:

          •   SiteScope supports the following types of alerts:

              –    E-MAIL, PAGER, DATABASE, DISABLE OR ENABLE MONITORS, LOG EVENT,
                   POST, SMS, SNMP TRAP, SCRIPT, and SOUND

          •   SiteScope alerts are notification actions triggered when there is a change in the
              status of a monitor.

          •   You can set detailed alert parameters, such as the number of times it should be
              triggered and when it should be stopped.

          •   Alert logs record alert information whenever SiteScope generates an alert. This can
              be used to troubleshoot alert actions and to confirm that alerts were sent.




Summary                                                                                         7-15
Configuring Alerts



 Review Questions
           Answer the review questions in your book.
 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the
 end of the day.




           1.     What are SiteScope alerts?

                  SiteScope alerts are notification actions triggered when monitored conditions match
                  the alert definition. Alerts send notification of events or changes in status of an
                  element or a system in the infrastructure._______________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

           2.     List the types of alerts provided by SiteScope.

                  SiteScope provides the following types of alerts: DATABASE, DISABLE OR ENABLE
                  MONITORS, E-MAIL, LOG EVENT, PAGER, POST, SMS, SNMP TRAP, SCRIPT, and
                  SOUND. _________________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

           3.     What does a red triangle to the right of each entry on the screen imply?

                  The red triangle indicates that one or more alerts have been configured for that
                  entry.___________________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

           4.     What is the purpose of the FILTER SETTINGS option?

                  The FILTER SETTINGS option is used to define an alert and apply filters to it so that
                  only certain monitors within the selected list trigger the alert. ______________

                   _______________________________________________________________

           5.     What are the steps to view ALERT LOG in SiteScope?




7-16                                                                                                        Review Questions
Configuring Alerts



             Click the LOG FILES tab to access the log files. The LOG FILES tab is available only
             on the SITESCOPE root node and the HEALTH node in the monitor tree. Click ALERT
             LOG to view the alert logs. __________________________________________

              _______________________________________________________________

              _______________________________________________________________




Review Questions                                                                            7-17
Configuring Alerts



 Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Become familiar with the steps to create and test a sound alert in SiteScope.

 Specific Objectives
 At the end of this exercise, students should be able to do the following to create and test a sound alert in SiteScope:
 - Use the SERVICE monitor for the MESSENGER service that was created in the previous chapter exercise.
 - Add a SOUND alert for the monitor.
 - Test the SOUND alert.


            This exercise familiarizes you with steps to create a sound alert in SiteScope.

            •     Part 1: Use the SERVICE monitor for the MESSENGER service (or another service)
                  that was created in the exercise from the previous chapter.

            •     Part 2: Add a SOUND alert for the monitor.

            •     Part 3: Test the SOUND alert.




7-18                                                                         Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert
Configuring Alerts



         Part 1: Use a Service Monitor for a Started Service
         Use the Service Monitor that you you created in the exercise from the previous chapter.

         Note: View ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS -> SERVICES in CONTROL PANEL to ensure that the
         MESSENGER service (or other service that you choose to monitor) is running on your
         system. Be sure to choose a service that can be stopped without causing problems on the
         system.




Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert                                                7-19
Configuring Alerts



       Part 2: Add a Sound Alert for the Monitor
       1.   Right-click the monitor that you created and select NEW ALERT. The NEW ALERT
            screen appears.

       2.   In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the NAME field, type a name for the alert.

       3.   Click ADD ACTION. The Action Alert Wizard opens.

       4.   From the ACTION TYPE screen , in the ACTION NAME field, type a name for the
            action, select SOUND, and then click NEXT.

       5.   From the ACTION TYPE SETTINGS screen, select the type of sound file to be played,
            and then click NEXT.

       6.   From the TRIGGER screen, select ERROR, and then click NEXT.

       7.   From the TRIGGER SETTINGS screen, select the desired frequency of the sound alert
            when an error occurs.

       8.   Click FINISH.

       9.   In the NEW ALERT screen, verify the information in the ALERT ACTIONS and then
            click OK.




7-20                                                 Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert
Configuring Alerts



         Part 3: Test the Sound Alert
         1.   Stop the MESSENGER service (or other service that is being monitored).

         2.   View the status of the alert. It shows an error. You should hear the sound alert that
              you had set above.

         3.   Restart the service and view the status again. The service displays OK status and
              plays the sound alert.




Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert                                                   7-21
Configuring Alerts



 Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Become familiar with the steps to restart a service that is down in SiteScope.

 Specific Objectives
 At the end of this exercise, students should be able to do the following to restart a service that is down in SiteScope:
 - Create a group.
 - Create a script to start the PRINT   SPOOLER service.
 - Create a SERVICE monitor for the PRINT     SPOOLER service.
 - Add a SCRIPT alert to the SERVICE monitor.
 - Test the SCRIPT alert.


            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to restart a service that is down in
            SiteScope.

            •     Part 1: Create a new group named SPOOLER.

            •     Part 2: Create a script to start the PRINT SPOOLER service.

            •     Part 3: Create a SERVICE monitor for the PRINT SPOOLER service.

            •     Part 4: Add a SCRIPT alert to the SERVICE monitor.

            •     Part 5: Test the SCRIPT alert.




7-22                                                                            Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down
Configuring Alerts



          Part 1: Create a New Group Named Spooler
          1.   Create a new group named SPOOLER.

          Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the
          SITESCOPE HELP.




Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down                                                    7-23
Configuring Alerts



       Part 2: Create a Script to Start the Print Spooler Service
       1.   Open the command prompt window and navigate to the C:SITESCOPESCRIPTS
            directory.

       2.   Type COPY CON STARTSPOOLER.BAT and press ENTER.

       3.   Type NET START SPOOLER and press ENTER.

       4.   Hold down CTRL and press Z.

       5.   Press ENTER.

       6.   Close the command prompt window.




7-24                                               Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down
Configuring Alerts



          Part 3: Create a Service Monitor for the Print Spooler Service
          Note: View ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS -> SERVICES in CONTROL PANEL to ensure that the
          PRINT SPOOLER service is running.

          1.   Create a service monitor for the PRINT SPOOLER service with a frequncy of 20
               seconds.

          Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the
          SITESCOPE HELP.




Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down                                                    7-25
Configuring Alerts



       Part 4: Add a Script Alert to the Service Monitor
       1.   Add a SCRIPT alert to the PRINT SPOOLER SERVICE monitor you created.

       2.   In the NEW ALERT section, click SCRIPT.

       3.   In the SCRIPT list, select STARTSPOOLER.BAT.

       Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the
       SITESCOPE HELP.




7-26                                                    Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down
Configuring Alerts



          Part 5: Test the Script Alert
          Note:

          1.   Stop the PRINT SPOOLER service.

          2.   The PRINT SPOOLER service restarts in 20 seconds.
                  When you stop the PRINT SPOOLER service, the SERVICE monitor for the PRINT SPOOLER service
               generates an error in its next run. This error causes the SCRIPT alert to run. The script restarts the PRINT
               SPOOLER service.




Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down                                                                          7-27
Configuring Alerts



 Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Become familiar with the steps to prevent an alert flood in SiteScope.

 Specific Objectives
 At the end of this exercise, students should be able to do the following to prevent an alert flood in SiteScope:
 - Create new groups named HEARTBEAT and SERVER                  STATS.
 - Create a SERVICE monitor in HEARTBEAT for the SERVER service.
 - Create CPU, DISK SPACE, and MEMORY monitors in SERVER STATS.
 - Make the SERVER STATS group dependent on the SERVICE monitor.


            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to prevent an alert flood.

            •     Part 1: Create new groups named HEARTBEAT and SERVER STATS.

            •     Part 2: Create a SERVICE monitor in HEARTBEAT for the SERVER service.

            •     Part 3: Create CPU, DISK SPACE, and MEMORY monitors in SERVER STATS.

            •     Part 4: Make the SERVER STATS group dependent on the SERVICE monitor.




7-28                                                                                      Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood
Configuring Alerts



          Part 1: Create New Groups Named Heartbeat and Server Stats
          1.   Create 2 new groups.

               –   HEARTBEAT

               –   SERVER STATS

          Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the
          SITESCOPE HELP.




Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood                                                            7-29
Configuring Alerts



       Part 2: Create a Service Monitor in Heartbeat for the Server
       Service
       1.   In the HEARTBEAT group, create a service monitor for the SERVER service with a
            frequncy of 20 seconds.

       Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the
       SITESCOPE HELP.




7-30                                                            Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood
Configuring Alerts



          Part 3: Create CPU, Disk Space, and Memory Monitors in
          Server Stats
          1.   Create the following monitors in the SERVER STATS group:

               –    CPU, frequency = 20 seconds

               –    DISK SPACE, frequency = 20 seconds

               –    MEMORY, frequency = 20 seconds

          Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the
          SITESCOPE HELP.

          2.   Stop the SERVER service on your computer.

          3.   Click the SERVER STATS group in the explorer tree and view the status of the
               monitors in the DASHBOARD tab. All the monitors are in error.
                 This shows an alert flood. All the monitors show error status because the SERVER service was stopped.


          4.   Restart the SERVER service on your computer.




Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood                                                                                7-31
Configuring Alerts



       Part 4: Make the Server Stats Group Dependent on the Service
       Monitor
       1.   In the explorer tree, click the SERVER STATS group.

       2.   Click the PROPERTIES tab and click EDIT.

       3.   Expand the ADVANCED SETTINGS section.

       4.   In the DEPENDS ON tree, expand HEARTBEAT and check the SERVICE monitor
            check box.

       5.   Click OK to make the SERVER STATS group dependent on the SERVICE monitor.

       6.   Stop the SERVER service on your computer.

       7.   In the explorer tree, click the SITESCOPE node container and view the STATUS of
            the groups in the DASHBOARD tab. The SERVER STATS group has no data and only
            the HEARTBEAT group is in error.




7-32                                                         Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood
Using Templates




                                                                   Using Templates
                                                                                                                     8
setoN rotcurtsnI

Purpose
This chapter explains the concepts of reusability and repeatability of monitor, group, and alert creation through the use of
templates. This chapter discusses the following types of templates: user-defined, monitor set, solution, and dynamic update.



           Objectives
           After completing this chapter, you will be able to:

           •     Identify the role of templates.

           •     Create user-defined templates.

           •     Modify templates by applying user-defined and system variables.

           •     Deploy user-defined and solution templates.

           •     Use the Publish Template Changes wizard.




                                                                                                                               8-1
Using Templates



 Using Templates to Deploy Monitoring




                              Figure 8-1 Using Templates

      Templates are objects you use to reproduce servers, monitors, and alerts according to a
      predefined pattern and configuration. Templates include group, server, monitor, and
      alert template objects as placeholders representing the type and configuration of
      corresponding items that you want to deploy in your monitoring environment.

      SiteScope provides 2 types of templates to speed the deployment of monitors across the
      enterprise through standardization of group structures, monitor types and configuration
      settings: User-Defined and Solution Templates.

      SiteScope also provides template examples for monitoring in Windows and UNIX
      environments. You can use the template examples to help you become familiar with
      using SiteScope templates.




8-2                                                       Using Templates to Deploy Monitoring
Using Templates



 Template Attributes
         Templates in SiteScope are used to standardize a set of monitor types and configurations
         into a single structure. This structure can then be repeatedly deployed as a group of
         monitors targeting multiple elements of the monitored infrastructure.

         A template defines the hierarchy and a structure of groups, monitors, alerts, and
         dependencies. After a template is created, it becomes readily available and is easily
         deployed in a preconfigured state. This encourages consistency and enforces
         conventions.

         Template building blocks include:

         •    Hierarchy of monitors

              –       Each template defines a grouping structure and monitors inside the groups.

         •    Monitor-level alerts

              –       Each template may also define alerts for individual monitors.

         •    Group-level alerts

              –       Each template may define alerts applicable to specific or all groups inside the
                      template.

         •    Template variables

              –       Template variables provide a way to tailor specific template properties to the
                      targets being monitored.

         •    User variables

              –       Much like variables but created and named by the user creating the template,
                      not provided by SiteScope.

         •    System variables

              –       Out of the box variables holding system information.

         •    Dependencies

              –       A dependency refers to the ability to control the execution of a monitor or a
                      group of monitors based on the state of another monitor or a group of monitors.




Template Attributes                                                                                8-3
Using Templates



 User-Defined Templates




                                 Figure 8-2 User-defined Templates

      User-Defined Templates provide the following benefits and key features:

      •     Templates are portable. They can be imported and exported for use across other
            SiteScope installations.

      •     Templates are stored in binary format in SiteScope with no associated text file thus
            eliminating the need for manual file editing.

      •     Templates can make use of powerful system and user-defined variables which
            facilitates their creation and eliminates the requirement for knowledge of monitor
            classes, internal parameters, or syntax.

      •     Working with templates can be accomplished with by simple "point and click"
            mouse operations enabling fast creation of structure, hierarchy, and dependencies.
          Due to GUI limitations user-defined templates are not visible in the classic SiteScope. They can however co-exist
      with legacy msets created and imported from prior versions.




8-4                                                                                            User-Defined Templates
Using Templates



 User-Defined Templates Concepts




                             Figure 8-3 User-Defined Templates

         Template: A template is an aggregation of objects used for speedy and repeatable
         deployment of identical assets to multiple SiteScope instances or within branches of the
         monitoring hierarchy inside the same SiteScope instance.

         An individual template consists of variable definitions, SiteScope object such as groups,
         monitors, alerts, and specific configurations and relationships between the objects such
         as a hierarchy, dependencies, and so on.

         A template can only be added to a template container node.

         Template Container: A template container is used for storing and managing one or
         more templates.

         Template containers group and organize multiple templates in ways that describe their
         purpose or classification. They are added only to the SiteScope node.

         Template Variable: A template variable is used to prompt for user input during
         template deployment. Template variables are added as children of the template container
         in which they are referenced.




User-Defined Templates Concepts                                                               8-5
Using Templates



 Templates Planning
      When you plan to deploy templates, consider the following questions:

      •   Which monitor types do you want to replicate using templates?

      •   Which monitor configuration properties will need to vary from one template
          deployment to another?

      •   What common properties will be the same from one template deployment to
          another?

      •   What group structure will be used to organize the monitors?

      •   Will alerts be deployed as part of the template?

      •   What action will be associated with the alerts?




8-6                                                                       Templates Planning
Using Templates



 User-Defined Template Containers




                                Figure 8-4 Creating Templates

         To create a user-defined template, perform the following steps:

         1.   In the tree, right-click the SITESCOPE node. The SiteScope action menu appears.

         2.   Select NEW TEMPLATE CONTAINER. The NEW TEMPLATE CONTAINER window
              appears in the content area.

         3.   In the NAME text box, type a name for the template container. The maximum length
              of the name is 250 characters.

         4.   Optionally, if there are any categories defined in this enterprise, you can assign a
              category to the template container under the CATEGORY SETTINGS section. You can
              assign a description to the template container under the ADVANCED SETTINGS
              section.

         5.   Click OK to create the template container.




User-Defined Template Containers                                                              8-7
Using Templates



 Adding Templates to Containers




                              Figure 8-5 New Template Menu Selection

      After you create a template container object, perform the following steps to add a
      template object to the container:
           The template is the object into which you add or create monitor and group configuration objects.


      1.     From the template container, select NEW TEMPLATE.

      2.     Add groups, subgroups, monitors, dependencies, and alerts as desired.

             –     These can be copied from other groups in SiteScope.

      3.     Parameterize numeric and other property values through the use of built-in (system)
             and user-defined variables.

             –     User Variable Syntax: %%error_classifier%%

             –     System Variables: $$SERVER_LIST$$, $$SERVER_NAME$$,
                   $$SERVER_NAME_BARE$$, $$DATE$$, $$TIME$$




8-8                                                                                   Adding Templates to Containers
Using Templates



 Shortcut to Creating Templates
         The easiest way to get started creating templates is to use an existing group, monitor, or
         alert as a basis for the template.

         To create a template using an existing group, monitor, or alert, do the following:

         1.   Select the group, monitor, or alert to copy. Right-click, and then select COPY.

         2.   Select the template to modify. Right-click, and then select PASTE. The contents of
              the group, monitor, or alert are now copied into the template.

         3.   Review the contents of the template and decide which components of the template
              will change when the template is deployed to another group, monitor, or alert. For
              example, is there an IP address, URL address, email address, server name, and so
              on that will vary depending on the deployment.

         4.   Create variables for each of the components of the monitors that will change when
              the template is deployed.

              a)   Right-click on the template, and select NEW VARIABLE.

              b)   Enter a variable name and description for each variable created.

         5.   After variables are created, replace existing text in the template with the appropriate
              variable names.

              a)   Use %% around user-defined variables in the template; for example,
                   %%DNS_SERVER%%

              b)   Use $$ for system-defined variables; for example, $$SERVER_LIST$$




Shortcut to Creating Templates                                                                   8-9
Using Templates



 Deploying Templates
       After the template is created, it can be deployed for use by copying and pasting it into a
       group.

       When the template is deployed, SiteScope prompts you to input values for the all system
       and user-defined variables created.

       The values are mapped to the variables and used to replace these variables everywhere
       they appear in the template.

       If you subsequently want to make changes to the source template, you can automatically
       publish the changes to SiteScope objects deployed by the template using the Publish
       Template Changes Wizard.




8-10                                                                         Deploying Templates
Using Templates



 Publish Template Changes Wizard




                   Figure 8-6 Run the Publish Template Changes Wizard

         To open the Publish Template Changes Wizard, perfom the following:

         1.   In the monitor tree, right-click a template and click PUBLISH CHANGES.

         Note: The wizard opens only if there are deployments associated with the selected
         template.

         The PUBLISH TEMPLATE CHANGES WIZARD contains:

         •    Select Deployed Groups Page

         •    Review Compliancy Page

         •    Content Changes Dialog Box

         •    Modify Variables Page

         •    Publish Results Summary Page

         •    Publish Template Changes Summary Report



Publish Template Changes Wizard                                                              8-11
Using Templates



 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 1




                           Figure 8-7 Select Deployed Groups

       Select the related template groups that you want to update.

       You can also select the ENABLE DELETE ON UPDATE option to delete SiteScope objects
       from the deployed groups that are not in the source template.




8-12                                                    Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 1
Using Templates



 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 2




                               Figure 8-8 Review Compliancy

         To view content differences in the template objects, click the VIEW DIFFERENCES link
         to open the CONTENT CHANGES dialog box. This link only appears if there is a content
         difference.




Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 2                                                  8-13
Using Templates



 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 3




                          Figure 8-9 Viewing Content Changes

       Review the details of the content changes to be performed on the object’s properties.




8-14                                                    Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 3
Using Templates



 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 4




                                Figure 8-10 Modify Variables

         Add values for any new variables in the template.

         Variable values that are mandatory are indicated by a red asterisk (*).

         You can also edit values of existing variables.




Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 4                                                      8-15
Using Templates



 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 5




                          Figure 8-11 Publish Results Summary

       Review the results of the publish template changes and, if necessary, retry publishing the
       changes to the deployed groups that failed to update.

       Optionally, you can export the publish changes results to a summary report (.pdf file).




8-16                                                     Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 5
Using Templates



 Publish Template Changes Summary Report




                      Figure 8-12 Publish Results Summary Report

        The Publish Template Changes Summary Report displays information about the
        template changes published to the deployed groups. It also displays information for
        group objects that failed to update.




Publish Template Changes Summary Report                                                   8-17
Using Templates



 Overview of Solution Templates




                             Figure 8-13 Solution Templates

       Solution Templates enable rapid deployment, because they contain a built-in enterprise
       application set of monitors.

       Solution templates are licensed SiteScope extensions. They provide support for AIX,
       Linux, Solaris, and Windows Hosts, Active Directory, Exchange, Microsoft IIS,
       Microsoft SQL, Oracle, SAP, Siebel, WebSphere, WebLogic, and many other enterprise
       applications.

       Solution templates are system templates and therefore not editable.



8-18                                                             Overview of Solution Templates
Using Templates



 Summary
          In this lesson, you learned:

          •   Templates are used to speed up the deployment of multiple monitors across your IT
              environment.

          •   The types of templates are:

              –    User-defined templates

              –    Solution templates

          •   Use existing group, monitor, or alert definitions as a basis for creating templates by
              using COPY and PASTE.

          •   Use user-defined and system variables to create templates that can be repeatedly
              deployed.

          •   Use the Publish Template Changes wizard to publish the changes to SiteScope
              objects deployed by templates.




Summary                                                                                        8-19
Using Templates



 Review Questions
           Answer the review questions in your book.
 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the
 end of the day.



           1.     What is the purpose of templates?

                  Templates in SiteScope are used to standardize a set of monitor types and
                  configurations into a structure that is deployed as a group of monitors repeatedly
                  across multiple elements in the infrastructure. __________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

           2.     What is the use of a template container?

                  A template container is used to store and manage one or more templates. _____

           3.     What is the purpose of solution templates?

                  Solution templates enable rapid deployment of a standard enterprise application set
                  of monitors. _____________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________




8-20                                                                                                        Review Questions
Using Templates



 Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Become familiar with the steps to create a user-defined template in SiteScope.

 Specific Objectives
 At the end of this exercise, students must be able to do the following to create a user-defined template in SiteScope:
 - Create a container for the template.
 - Create a new template.
 - Create template variables.
 - Add monitors to the template.
 - Edit the monitors to replace hard-coded values with variables.
 - Deploy the template in a designated group.


            In this exercise you will create a user-defined template which contains four monitors:

            •     Part 1: Create a container for your user-defined template.

            •     Part 2: Create a new user-defined template.

            •     Part 3: Create template variables.

            •     Part 4: Add monitors to the template.

            •     Part 5: Edit monitors to replace hard-coded values with variables.

            •     Part 6: Deploy the template in a designated group.




Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template                                                                                8-21
Using Templates



       Part 1: Create a Container For Your User-defined Template
       1.   Right-click the SITESCOPE node container.

       2.   Click NEW TEMPLATE CONTAINER.

       3.   In the NAME field, type a name for the template container.

       4.   Click OK.




8-22                                                    Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template
Using Templates



         Part 2: Create a New User-defined Template
         1.   Right-click the template container you created.

         2.   Click NEW TEMPLATE.

         3.   In the NAME field, type a name for the new template.

         4.   Click OK.




Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template                                     8-23
Using Templates



       Part 3: Create Template Variables
       Create template variables.

       1.   Right-click your template.

       2.   Click NEW VARIABLE.

       3.   In the NAME field, type a name for the new template.
            This is the name that must be used when referring to the variable in other template
            objects.

       4.   Enter DISPLAY NAME, DESCRIPTION, and DEFAULT VALUE as needed.

       5.   Click OK.

       Create the following variables in your template.

       •    Server
            Instead of defining a user variable for SERVER, you can use the system variable
            SERVER_NAME_BARE to define the target server being monitored.

       •    Frequency

       •    Host

       •    URL
            For the URL variable, provide a default value that may be changed when deploying
            the template.

       Some hints:

       •    The FREQUENCY variable is the monitor’s frequency.

       •    Refer to the TEMPLATE EXAMPLES.




8-24                                                   Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template
Using Templates



         Part 4: Add Monitors to the Template
         Create a template group.

         1.   Right-click your template in the monitor tree.

         2.   Click NEW GROUP.

         3.   In the GROUP NAME field, type a name for the template group.

         4.   Click OK.

         Create monitors in your template group for the following:

         •    CPU

         •    Disk

         •    Memory

         •    URL

         Some hints:

         •    You can take a shortcut to developing the template by copy and paste already
              created monitors into the template you are creating, and then edit the templates.

         •    Each monitor name should reference the target server, such as ‘Memory on
              %%server%%’ or ‘Memory on $$SERVER_NAME_BARE$$’ if you chose to use
              the system variable for the target server.

         •    Remember to refer to the variables using the appropriate syntax: %%server%% and
              %%url%% when using them in the monitor definitions.

         •    For the URL monitor, use the %%host%% variable as a part of the target URL to
              monitor.

         •    Refer to the TEMPLATE EXAMPLES.




Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template                                                   8-25
Using Templates



       Part 5: Edit Monitors to Replace Hard-coded Values With
       Variables
       For any monitors that you copied into your template, replaced the hard-coded values
       with the appropriate template variables.




8-26                                                 Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template
Using Templates



         Part 6: Deploy the Template in a Designated Group
         When done, create a new group, and deploy the template inside that group.




Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template                                               8-27
Using Templates



Exercise: Change Template and Publish
Changes

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Become familiar with the steps to update a user-defined template in SiteScope and publish the changes to all objects deployed by
 the template.

 Specific Objectives
 At the end of this exercise, students must be able to do the following to update a user-defined template in SiteScope and publish
 the changes using the Publish Template Changes Wizard:
 - Select the template created in the previous exercise.
 - Add a ‘Ping’ monitor and make the CPU, Memory and Disk monitors depend on the Ping monitor.
 - Change the ‘Warning’ threshold to 80% for the CPU monitor.
 - Publish the template changes.
 - Create a PDF of the Publish Template Changes Summary Report.


            In this exercise, you will modify the user-defined template from the previous exercise,
            and publish the changes using the Publish Template Changes Wizard.

            •     Part 1: Add a ‘Ping’ monitor to your user-defined template.

            •     Part 2: Add the ‘Ping’ monitor as a dependency for the CPU, Memory and Disk
                  monitors.

            Note: If you need details on how to complete these steps, refer to previous exercises or
            the SITESCOPE HELP.

            •     Part 3: Change the ‘Warning’ threshold for the CPU monitor to 80%.

            •     Part 4: Launch the Publish Template Changes Wizard.

            •     Part 5: Verify the Content Changes

            •     Part 6: Create a PDF of the Summary Report.

            Note: If you need details on how to complete these steps, refer to the SITESCOPE HELP.




8-28                                                                 Exercise: Change Template and Publish Changes
Using Diagnostic Tools




                                          Using Diagnostic Tools
                                                                                                  9
setoN rotcurtsnI

Purpose
This chapter provides an overview of diagnostics tools in SiteScope and their usage.



          Objectives
          After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

          •      Become familiar with the available diagnostic tools in SiteScope.

          •      Build monitors using the appropriate diagnostic tools.

          •      Use the diagnostic tools to solve problems and troubleshoot monitoring issues.




                                                                                                         9-1
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Diagnostic Tools
      SiteScope provides a variety of diagnostic tools and utilities. Diagnostic tools can be
      used to troubleshoot a faulty monitor, fine tune a monitor configuration, or examine
      more closely the data returned by a monitor in an attempt to troubleshoot problems
      reported by a particular monitor.

      Diagnostic tools are configurable utilities that make a one-time data request and send
      queries to a specific system. They also capture the returned data and make it available
      for viewing inside the SiteScope interface.

      For example, you can use the PING diagnostics tool to test network connectivity after
      having provided the IP address of the server to be pinged. Or, to verify database
      connectivity and logon authentication, you can trigger the DATABASE tool after
      providing specific database connectivity parameters.

      Diagnostics tools should be leveraged when creating and testing complex monitor
      functionality. For instance, you can use the REGULAR EXPRESSIONS tool to test the
      validity of a particular regular expression before the associated monitor is actually
      created.




9-2                                                                             Diagnostic Tools
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Types of Diagnostic Tools




         The diagnostic tools in SiteScope are grouped into the following categories:

         •    Application tools

              Examples of application diagnostic tools include DNS LOOKUP, DATABASE
              CONNECTION, and FTP SERVER.

         •    Server tools

              Examples of server diagnostic tools include NETWORK, PROCESSES, and SERVICES.

         •    Advanced tools

              Examples of advanced diagnostic tools include EVENT LOG, LDAP
              AUTHENTICATION, and NEWS SERVER.




Types of Diagnostic Tools                                                                    9-3
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Examples of Diagnostic Tools
      SiteScope diagnostic tools help troubleshoot different aspects of a monitored system or
      simply confirm the availability and responsiveness of specific system components and
      services. In this chapter, you will learn more about the following diagnostic tools:

      •   DNS LOOKUP

      •   EVENT LOG

      •   FTP SERVER

      •   LDAP AUTHENTICATION

      •   NETWORK




9-4                                                               Examples of Diagnostic Tools
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Using the DNS Lookup Tool




                                 Figure 9-1 DNS Lookup Tool

         The DNS LOOKUP tool looks up names from a Domain Name Server (DNS). The tool
         displays the IP address for a domain name and information about the server names for
         the domain.

         If there is a problem in the network, the DNS server does not provide the correct IP
         address for the servers. You can use the DNS LOOKUP tool to verify that the DNS server
         returns the correct address for your servers. This tool is also used to verify that the DNS
         server can look up the addresses for external domains.

         To run the DNS LOOKUP tool:

         1.   Expand the TOOLS node in the explorer tree and click DNS LOOKUP.

         2.   On the DNS LOOKUP TOOL page, in the DNS ADDRESS field, type the IP address of
              a DNS Server.

         3.   In the HOST NAME field, type a domain name.

         4.   Click DNS LOOKUP.



Using the DNS Lookup Tool                                                                       9-5
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Using the Event Log Tool




                                        Figure 9-2 Event Log Tool

      The EVENT LOG tool displays event log entries on a server. To run the EVENT LOG tool:

      1.   On the EVENT LOG TOOL page, in the SERVER NAME field, type the name of the
           server for which you want to view the log.
             By default, this tool displays the log for the SiteScope server.


      2.   From the EVENT LOG list, select the type of event log you want displayed.
             By default, SYSTEM is selected.


      3.   In the ENTRIES TO SHOW field, type the number of entries to list for the event log.
             The default value is 10.


      4.   Click SHOW EVENT LOG ENTRIES.




9-6                                                                             Using the Event Log Tool
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Using the FTP Server Tool




                                  Figure 9-3 FTP Server Tool

         The FTP SERVER tool tests the connection to an FTP server. For example, if you receive
         an alert from SiteScope indicating that an FTP server is not working properly, you can
         use the FTP SERVER tool to investigate the error.

         To run the FTP SERVER tool:

         1.   On the FTP SERVER TOOL page, in the FTP SERVER field, type the name of the FTP
              server.

         2.   In the FILE NAME field, type the name of the file to retrieve.

         3.   In the USER NAME and PASSWORD fields, type the correct user name and password
              information, respectively.

         4.   If you are accessing the FTP server through a firewall, check the USE PASSIVE
              check box to enable passive FTP access.

         5.   Click CHECK FTP SERVER.



Using the FTP Server Tool                                                                        9-7
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Using the LDAP Authentication Tool




                         Figure 9-4 LDAP Authentication Tool

      The LDAP AUTHENTICATION tool tests an LDAP server by requesting a user
      authentication. To run the LDAP AUTHENTICATION tool:

      1.   On the LDAP AUTHENTICATION TOOL page, in the SECURITY PRINCIPAL field, type
           the name of the principal for authenticating the caller to the service.

      2.   In the SECURITY CREDENTIAL field, specify the appropriate credential based on the
           authentication scheme.

      3.   In the URL PROVIDER ADDRESS field, type the constant that holds the configuration
           information for the service provider to use.

      4.   In the LDAP QUERY field, specify an object query to search for an LDAP object.

      5.   In the SEARCH FILTER field, specify a search filter to perform a search using a filter.

      6.   Click AUTHENTICATE USER.




9-8                                                            Using the LDAP Authentication Tool
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Using the Network Tool




                                 Figure 9-5 Network Tool

         Figure 9-5 shows the NETWORK tool. This tool uses the netstat command to determine
         the network interface statistics and the number of active connections. The NETWORK
         tool enables you to determine whether your network interface is saturated or in an
         erroneous state. The tool also shows the number of connections. To run the NETWORK
         tool, on the NETWORK TOOL page, click RUN NETWORK.




Using the Network Tool                                                                   9-9
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Monitor-Specific Tool Selection




                        Figure 9-6 Monitor-Specific Tool Selection

       The monitor-specific tools are accessed from the Dashboard. When accessed in this
       way, SiteScope selects the tool, pre-populates the fields, and runs the test. This is useful
       in diagnosing monitor errors.

       In this example, SiteScope chose to run the NT Performance Test, as shown in
       Figure 9-7.




9-10                                                                 Monitor-Specific Tool Selection
Using Diagnostic Tools




                            Figure 9-7 NT Performance Counter Test




Monitor-Specific Tool Selection                                                      9-11
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Summary
       In this chapter, you learned:

       •   SiteScope provides a variety of diagnostic tools useful when troubleshooting
           monitoring problems and developing and testing monitors.

       •   Diagnostic tools can be categorized into application, server, and advanced
           diagnostics tools.

       •   The DNS LOOKUP tool looks up names from a DNS server.

       •   The EVENT LOG tool displays event log entries on a server.

       •   The FTP SERVER tool tests an FTP Server.

       •   The LDAP AUTHENTICATION tool tests an LDAP server by requesting a user
           authentication.

       •   The NETWORK tool checks whether the network interface is saturated or in error.




9-12                                                                                    Summary
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Review Questions
            Answer the review questions in your book.
 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Conduct these review questions immediately after the module, or save the questions from several modules to be conducted at the
 end of the day.

 The answers to the questions below will be printed in the instructor book; the student book will show blank lines after each
 question.


            1.    Name the three categories of diagnostic tools.

                  The three types of SiteScope diagnostic tools are APPLICATION, SERVER, and
                  ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC tools._______________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

            2.    How does DNS LOOKUP tool work?

                  The DNS LOOKUP tool looks up names from a Domain Name Server. The tool
                  displays the IP address for a domain name and information about the name servers
                  for the domain. ___________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________

            3.    What does the EVENT LOG tool display?

                  The EVENT LOG tool displays event log entries on a server. ________________

            4.    Which command does the NETWORK tool use to determine the network interface
                  statistics and the number of active connections?

                  The NETWORK tool uses the netstat command to determine the network interface
                  statistics and the number of active connections. _________________________

                   _______________________________________________________________




Review Questions                                                                                                                9-13
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Exercise: Running the Event Log Tool

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Familiarize yourself with the steps to run the EVENT       LOG tool in SiteScope.
 Specific Objective
 At the end of this exercise, students should be able to:
 - Run the EVENT     LOG tool in SiteScope.

            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to run the EVENT LOG tool in SiteScope.

            Part 1: Run the EVENT LOG tool in SiteScope.




9-14                                                                                 Exercise: Running the Event Log Tool
Using Diagnostic Tools



         Part 1: Run the Event Log Tool in SiteScope
         1.   Open the SiteScope interface.

         2.   In the explorer tree, expand the TOOLS node.

         3.   Click EVENT LOG.

         4.   In the SERVER NAME field, type the name of the Training Server.

         5.   From the EVENT LOG list, select APPLICATION.

         6.   Click SHOW EVENT LOG ENTRIES to view the results.




Exercise: Running the Event Log Tool                                                      9-15
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Exercise: Running the Ping Tool

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Familiarize yourself with the steps to run the PING tool in SiteScope.

 Specific Objective
 At the end of this exercise, students should be able to:
 - Run the PING tool in SiteScope.


            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to run the PING tool in SiteScope.

            Part 1: Run the PING tool in SiteScope.




9-16                                                                      Exercise: Running the Ping Tool
Using Diagnostic Tools



         Part 1: Run the Ping Tool in SiteScope
         1.   Expand the TOOLS container.

         1.   Click PING.

         2.   In the DOMAIN NAME OR IP ADDRESS field, type the computer name or IP address
              of the Training Server.

         3.   Click PING to view the results.




Exercise: Running the Ping Tool                                                        9-17
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Exercise: Running the Services Tool

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Familiarize yourself with the steps to run the SERVICES tool in SiteScope.

 Specific Objective
 At the end of this exercise, students should be able to:
 - Run the SERVICES tool in SiteScope.


            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to run the SERVICES tool in SiteScope.

            Part 1: Run the SERVICES tool in SiteScope.




9-18                                                                          Exercise: Running the Services Tool
Using Diagnostic Tools



         Part 1: Run the Services Tool in SiteScope
         1.   Expand the TOOLS container.

         2.   Click SERVICES.

         3.   Click SHOW SERVICES to view a list of the services running on your computer.




Exercise: Running the Services Tool                                                      9-19
Using Diagnostic Tools



 Exercise: Running the Trace Route Tool

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Familiarize yourself with the steps to run the TRACE       ROUTE tool in SiteScope.
 Specific Objective
 At the end of this exercise, students should be able to:
 - Run the TRACE     ROUTE tool in SiteScope.

            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to run the TRACE ROUTE tool in SiteScope.

            Part 1: Run the TRACE ROUTE tool in SiteScope.




9-20                                                                              Exercise: Running the Trace Route Tool
Using Diagnostic Tools



         Part 1: Run the Trace Route Tool in SiteScope
         1.   Click TRACE ROUTE.

         2.   In the DOMAIN NAME OR IP ADDRESS field, type the computer name or IP address
              of the Training Server.

         3.   Click TRACE ROUTE to view the results.




Exercise: Running the Trace Route Tool                                                 9-21
Using Diagnostic Tools




9-22   Exercise: Running the Trace Route Tool
Generating Reports




                                                         Generating Reports
                                                                                                          10
setoN rotcurtsnI

Purpose
This chapter lists the types of reports in SiteScope and explains the method to generate these reports.



           Objectives
           After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

           •     Understand the business purposes of reports.

           •     Identify the different types of reports in SiteScope.

           •     Generate reports based on business requirements.




                                                                                                                       10-1
Generating Reports



 Reports Specific to User




                           Figure 10-1 User-Specific Reporting

       SiteScope reports hold information about how the servers and applications you are
       monitoring have performed over time. SiteScope reports are important tools in
       monitoring and troubleshooting operational performance and availability and reviewing
       the monitored environment.

       You can generate a report for a single monitor, several monitors, or even several monitor
       groups. Report definitions include several report content options including tables of
       specific monitor measurements, summaries of results, and graphs.

       SiteScope reports can be valuable to many people in your organization, including
       management personnel in Sales, Marketing, Customer Support, and Operations.
       SiteScope User accounts can be created to allow these users restricted access to the
       SiteScope service to view reports, as shown in Figure 10-1.




10-2                                                                     Reports Specific to User
Generating Reports



 Types of Reports




                                 Figure 10-2 Types of Reports

         You can generate the following types of reports in SiteScope:

         •    Alert Reports

              ALERT reports are ad hoc or custom reports used to display SiteScope alerts sent
              over specific time periods. Alert reports do not support exporting data. The settings
              for an Alert report are not saved to the SiteScope configuration data for later use.

         •    Management Reports

              MANAGEMENT reports provide a summary of infrastructure availability and
              performance data for a given time period. You can use these reports to detect
              emerging trends and correct potential problems before they escalate into a crisis.

              MANAGEMENT reports are generated automatically based on their preset schedule
              from data collected by SiteScope monitors. According to the preset schedule,
              SiteScope reads the applicable log files and generates the report based on the




Types of Reports                                                                              10-3
Generating Reports



           monitor metrics for the time interval specified. You can save the report data in a file
           suitable for exporting to third-party applications, such as Microsoft Excel.

           You can also specify an e-mail address to which a summary of the report is sent
           whenever the report is generated. The email address is specified in the SEND
           REPORT BY E-MAIL field in the MAIN SETTINGS section for the report.

       •   Monitor Reports

           MONITOR reports enable you to review configuration properties and settings for
           existing monitors. You can export a MONITOR report in one of three text formats:
           comma-delimited (CSV), tab-delimited (TXT), and HTML.

           Unlike a MANAGEMENT report, which is generated based on a schedule that you
           specify, you generate a MONITOR report on an ad hoc basis. In addition, the settings
           for a MONITOR report are not saved to the SiteScope configuration data for later use.

       •   Quick Reports

           QUICK reports enable you to view monitor data for specific monitors or groups of
           monitors for specific time periods. Currently, you cannot export QUICK reports data
           to a third-party application.

           Unlike a MANAGEMENT report that is generated based on a schedule that you
           specify, you generate a QUICK report on an ad hoc basis. In addition, the settings for
           a QUICK report are not saved to the SiteScope configuration data for later use.

           You can also specify an e-mail address to which a summary of the report is sent
           whenever the report is generated. The email address is specified in the SEND
           REPORT TO E-MAIL ADDRESS field in the MAIN SETTINGS section for the report.




10-4                                                                             Types of Reports
Generating Reports



 Working with Management Reports




                           Figure 10-3 New Management Report

        MANAGEMENT reports are generated based on the schedule specified in their definition
        in the explorer tree. You can:

        •    View MANAGEMENT reports

        •    Edit MANAGEMENT reports

        •    Delete MANAGEMENT reports

        •    Generate current reports

        •    View current reports

        •    View previous reports




Working with Management Reports                                                         10-5
Generating Reports



 Viewing Management Reports




                         Figure 10-4 Management Report View

       To view a MANAGEMENT report, select the management report in the explorer tree.
       Select the VIEW REPORT tab.

       Although you can create as many MANAGEMENT report definitions as you want, it is
       recommended that you plan and consolidate reports to minimize redundancy. For
       example, while generating reports on system resources for 20 different remote servers,
       you can generate a consolidated report for CPU and disk space and another report on the
       availability of all services and processes.




10-6                                                              Viewing Management Reports
Generating Reports



 Editing Management Reports




                                   Figure 10-5 Edit a Management Report

         To edit an existing MANAGEMENT report definition:

         1.     Click the node with which the report is associated.

         2.     Click the CONTENTS tab.

         3.     Expand the REPORTS section.

         4.     Click the pencil icon for the report you want to edit.
              You can also right-click the report definition in the explorer tree and select EDIT to modify report configurations.


         Figure 10-5 shows the CONTENTS tab, where you can edit a MANAGEMENT report
         definition.




Editing Management Reports                                                                                                    10-7
Generating Reports



 Generating Reports




                           Figure 10-6 Generate Current Report

       To generate a MANAGEMENT report:

       1.   Click the report in the explorer tree.

       2.   Click the VIEW REPORT tab.

       3.   Click GENERATE.




10-8                                                             Generating Reports
Generating Reports



 Viewing Reports




                                 Figure 10-7 View Reports

         When you click GENERATE, the report appears, as shown in Figure 10-7.




Viewing Reports                                                                         10-9
Generating Reports



Viewing Previous Reports




                              Figure 10-8 Previous Report

        To view a previous report, click MOST RECENT REPORT, as shown in Figure 10-8.




10-10                                                              Viewing Previous Reports
Generating Reports



 Working with Alert, Monitor and Quick Reports
         SiteScope does not save ALERT, MONITOR and QUICK reports for later use.

         When working with ALERT, MONITOR and QUICK reports, you will be able to:

         •    Generate reports.

         •    View reports.




Working with Alert, Monitor and Quick Reports                                         10-11
Generating Reports



Viewing Alert Reports




                                Figure 10-9 New Alert Reports

        Alert reports are generated only on demand. Alert Reports are ad hoc reports and their
        definitions are not stored for future use. No report element is added to the monitoring
        tree for this report type.

        When you choose to generate an Alert Report, SiteScope reads the applicable log files
        and generates the report based on the applicable alert triggering information and the time
        interval you specify.

        To generate a report:

        1.   Right-click the container or monitor element to display the container action menu
             and select NEW REPORT.

        2.   Select the Alert link. The New SiteScope Report page is displayed.

        3.   Complete the items in the Main Settings.

        4.   When the required settings are defined, click APPLY to create the report. The report
             output is displayed in a new browser window.




10-12                                                                        Viewing Alert Reports
Generating Reports



 Viewing Quick Reports




                                 Figure 10-10 Quick Reports

         To generate a QUICK report:

         1.   Right-click the node from where you want to generate the report.

         2.   Select NEW REPORT.

         3.   In the NEW SITESCOPE REPORT interface, click QUICK.

         4.   In the MAIN SETTINGS and ADVANCED SETTINGS sections, specify the definition
              parameters that you want to include in the report.

         5.   Click APPLY to generate the report.

         To generate a MONITOR report rapidly, in the NEW SITESCOPE REPORT interface, click
         MONITOR.




Viewing Quick Reports                                                                       10-13
Generating Reports



Viewing Monitor Summary Reports




                             Figure 10-11 New Monitor Reports

        Use the Monitor Summary Report to view setup information on monitors as well as the
        organization and makeup of groups of monitors. For example, you can use the report to
        check for monitor dependencies that can impact alerting.

        Monitor Summary Reports are ad hoc reports and their definitions are not stored for
        future use. No report element is added to the monitoring tree for this report type.

        To generate a MONITOR SUMMARY report:

        1.   Right-click the node from where you want to generate the report.

        2.   Select NEW REPORT.

        3.   In the NEW SITESCOPE REPORT interface, click MONITOR.

        4.   In the MAIN SETTINGS and ADVANCED SETTINGS sections, specify the definition
             parameters that you want to include in the report.

             You can use the file export option in the Advanced Settings to export the monitor
             configuration data to a third-party application, such as a spreadsheet or text editor.

        5.   Click APPLY to generate the report.



10-14                                                             Viewing Monitor Summary Reports
Generating Reports



 Summary
          In this chapter, you learned:

          •   The following types of reports are available in SiteScope: ALERT, MANAGEMENT,
              MONITOR, and QUICK reports.

          •   MANAGEMENT reports provide a summary of infrastructure availability and
              performance data for a specified period.

          •   MANAGEMENT reports are generated automatically according to their preset
              schedule.

          •   MONITOR reports enable you to review configuration properties and settings for
              existing monitors.

          •   ALERT reports enable you to view alert data for a specified time period.

          •   QUICK reports enable you to look at specific periods and monitors.

          •   ALERT, MONITOR, and QUICK reports are generated manually.

          •   To generate a report, right-click the SITESCOPE node or any group in the explorer
              tree, and then select NEW REPORT.




Summary                                                                                   10-15
Generating Reports



Review Questions
           Answer the review questions in your book.
setoN rotcurtsnI

Conduct these review questions immediately after the module, or save questions from several modules to be conducted at the
end of the day.

The answers to the questions below will be printed in the instructor book; the student book will show blank lines after each
question.


           1.    Name the three types of reports in SiteScope.

                 The three types of reports in SiteScope are MANAGEMENT, MONITOR, and QUICK.

           2.    Where can you access monitor data log files?

                 You can access monitor data log files in the LOG FILES tab for the SITESCOPE node.

                  _______________________________________________________________

           3.    Where can you edit the retention period for the monitor data log files?

                 You can edit the retention period for the monitor data log files in the LOG
                 PREFERENCES link under the PREFERENCES node. ________________________

                  _______________________________________________________________




10-16                                                                                                        Review Questions
Generating Reports



 Exercise: Running SiteScope Reports

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Familiarize yourself with the reports in SiteScope.

 Specific Objective
 At the end of this exercise, students must be able to do the following to run reports in SiteScope:
 - Generate and view SiteScope reports.


            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to run reports in SiteScope.

            Part 1: Generate and view reports in SiteScope.




Exercise: Running SiteScope Reports                                                                               10-17
Generating Reports



        Part 1: Generate and View Reports in SiteScope
        1.   In the explorer tree, right-click a group and select NEW REPORT.

        2.   In the NEW SITESCOPE REPORT interface, click MONITOR.

        3.   In the MAIN SETTINGS section, specify the parameters for the report.

        4.   Click APPLY to generate the report.

        5.   View the generated report.

        6.   Repeat steps 1 to 5 for a QUICK report.

        7.   Repeat steps 1 to 3 for a MANAGEMENT report.

        8.   Click OK to save the report definition.

        9.   Click the report saved in the explorer tree and click the VIEW REPORT tab.

        10. Click GENERATE to generate the report.

        11. View the generated MANAGEMENT report.




10-18                                                        Exercise: Running SiteScope Reports
Generating Reports



 Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date
 Management Report for a Single Monitor

 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Purpose of this exercise
 Familiarize yourself with the steps to generate a month-to-date MANAGEMENT report for a single monitor.

 Specific Objectives
 At the end of this exercise, students must be able to do the following to generate a month-to-date MANAGEMENT report for a
 single monitor:
 - Save a MANAGEMENT report definition.
 - Generate the report.


            This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to generate a month-to-date MANAGEMENT
            report for a single monitor.

            Part 1: Save a MANAGEMENT report definition.

            Part 2: Generate the report.




Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor                                         10-19
Generating Reports



        Part 1: Save a Management Report Definition
        1.   Right-click the SITESCOPE node in the explorer tree and select NEW REPORT.

        2.   In the NEW SITESCOPE REPORT interface, click MANAGEMENT.

        3.   In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the NAME field, specify a name for the report.

        4.   In the MONITOR AND GROUPS TO REPORT ON tree, uncheck the SITESCOPE check
             box. Check the check box for the monitor for which you would like to generate the
             report.
                The nodes in the MONITOR AND GROUPS TO REPORT ON tree represent SiteScope groups as
             present in the explorer tree. Expand the node(s) to reach the monitor for which you want to generate the report.


        5.   From the TIME PERIOD FOR REPORT list, select MONTH-TO-DATE.

        6.   You can retain other parameters, such as UPTIME AND READINGS, which are
             selected by default or you can specify your own parameters, such as THRESHOLDS.

        7.   Click OK to save the report definition.




10-20                      Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor
Generating Reports



         Part 2: Generate the Report
         1.   In the explorer tree, click the newly created report definition.

         2.   Click the VIEW REPORT tab.

         3.   Click GENERATE to show the month-to-date MANAGEMENT report for the monitor
              that you specified.

         4.   Scroll to view the complete report.




Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor                 10-21
Generating Reports




10-22   Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor
Maintaining SiteScope




                                             Maintaining SiteScope
                                                                                                     11
setoN rotcurtsnI

Purpose
This chapter explains the common administrative and maintenance tasks associated with the maintenance of the SiteScope
implementation. The chapter can be used as a high-level guideline to the responsibilities of the SiteScope administrator.



          Objectives
          After successfully completing this chapter, you will be able to:

          •     Identify the SiteScope directories and files that require regular backup.

          •     Become familiar with the SiteScope upgrade path.

          •     Identify the patch download location.

          •     Use self-monitoring features and log files.

          •     Understand the SiteScope failover model.

          •     Become familiar with SiteScope security considerations.

          •     Understand the SiteScope licensing model.




                                                                                                                            11-1
Maintaining SiteScope



 Important Files and Directories
       As with any production application, SiteScope should be backed up on a nightly basis.
       But what to backup? This is a frequently asked question, especially in the absence of a
       failover environment. The files here represent a comprehensive list of directories and
       files that require backup.

       •     Configuration

             –     SiteScope/groups

             –     SiteScope/persistency

       •     Custom Scripts and Modified Objects

             –     SiteScope/scripts

             –     SiteScope/script.remotes

             –     SiteScope/templates.

       •     Data

             –     SiteScope/logs

             –     SiteScope/htdocs

       •     Custom Drivers and APIs

       •     Security Setup

       SiteScopegroups contains the master.config file, which stores all the global
       configuration information for SiteScope. It gets updated when users define alerts, create
       reports, add remotes, create additional users, and create schedules. Additionally, it
       updates the global changes made in the PREFERENCES section of the Web console.

       The rest of the files in the SiteScope/templates.os, SiteScope/templates.mail,
       SiteScope/templates.mib, SiteScope/scripts, and SiteScope/scripts.remote get updated
       by manual changes from the user interface or by a User who manually edits the files.

       Daily logs in the Sitescope/logs directory are written during each run of the monitor
       until the end of the day, when SiteScope rolls over to a new log file for the next day.
           Students can be referred to the following KB # 38633 – How to backup SiteScope.




11-2                                                                                 Important Files and Directories
Maintaining SiteScope



 Patches and Service Packs




                                   Figure 11-1 Patches

         The latest service packs and patches are available at
         HTTP://SUPPORT.OPENVIEW.HP.COM/SELFSOLVE/PATCHES.




Patches and Service Packs                                                       11-3
Maintaining SiteScope



 Health Page




                                 Figure 11-2 Health Page

       SiteScope HEALTH monitors are a built-in group of monitors that display information
       about SiteScope's own health. HEALTH monitors retrieve data about SiteScope's resource
       usage, key processes, monitor load server parameters, and the integrity of key
       configuration files use. SiteScope HEALTH monitoring data is recorded by default in the
       daily monitor logs. Administrators can use the HEALTH monitors to create reports on
       SiteScope's performance and operational health.

       Similar to regular monitors, HEALTH monitors can be edited in order to reconfigure their
       frequency and thresholds. Administrators can enhance the HEALTH group by adding new
       monitors targeting additional servers and environments.




11-4                                                                                Health Page
Maintaining SiteScope



 Health Page Metrics




                                Figure 11-3 SiteScope Health

         SiteScope captures information relevant to its performance and level of operability. The
         collected metrics are grouped in the following areas:

         •    Monitor Load - Information about configure monitors useful in determining
              whether the volume of running monitors impacts the overall server performance.

         •    The MONITOR LOAD CHECKER displays the following:

              –   CURRENT MONITORS RUN PER MINUTE, CURRENT MONITORS RUNNING,
                  CURRENT MONITORS WAITING

              –   MAXIMUM MONITORS RUN PER MINUTE, MAXIMUM MONITORS RUNNING,
                  MAXIMUM MONITORS WAITING

         •    Health of SiteScope Server - General information about SiteScope resource usage,
              useful in determining whether the server is sized correctly.




Health Page Metrics                                                                         11-5
Maintaining SiteScope



       •   SiteScope HEALTH checks the disk space usage, available memory, disk blocks
           statistics, physical memory free, process memory, thread count, handle count, load,
           free swap space, average CPU, page statistics, swaps, context switches per second,
           and packets statistics.

       •   LOG MONITOR: Information about exceptional events indicating poor performance
           or internal error.

       •   LOG EVENT CHECKER: Logs important events from the error log related to skips,
           restarts, and BAC integration.




11-6                                                                       Health Page Metrics
Maintaining SiteScope



 Alert and Error Log Files




                               Figure 11-4 Alert and Error Log File

          The ALERT LOG file records alert creation and dispatching information whenever
          SiteScope generates an alert.

          The ERROR LOG file contains a variety of messages related to the internal workings of
          SiteScope such as:

          •    Errors related to monitor actions

          •    Communication errors

          •    SiteScope Stop and Start messages

          •    Monitor Skips




Alert and Error Log Files                                                                   11-7
Maintaining SiteScope



 Run Monitor, BAC, and Operator Logs




                       Figure 11-5 Run Monitor, BAC, Operator

       The following log files contain key information about monitor execution, integrations,
       and management activities.

       •   Run Monitor Log - Records information on specific monitor runs and certain
           actions related to monitor management.

       •   HP Business Availability Center (BAC) Log - Contains information about
           connectivity and monitor data transfer when SiteScope is configured to report to
           BAC.

       •   Operator Log - Records SiteScope operator actions. This log is created when an
           acknowledgement is added to one or more monitors.




11-8                                                       Run Monitor, BAC, and Operator Logs
Maintaining SiteScope



 Failover Overview
         When configured SiteScope Failover enables the following functions:

         •    Automatic synchronization

         •    Data redundancy

         •    High availability

         SiteScope Failover is a special edition of SiteScope designed to mirror a primary
         SiteScope configuration to a failover machine. The SiteScope Failover configuration
         requires two separate installations of SiteScope:

         •    Primary

         •    Secondary, running a special Failover build with a Failover license




Failover Overview                                                                          11-9
Maintaining SiteScope



SiteScope Failover Internals




                          Figure 11-6 SiteScope Failover Features

        This diagram represents a SiteScope failover implementation. The primary and failover
        SiteScope get installed on separate boxes. They run the same version of the SiteScope
        software; the standard build and the failover build. Ideally, SiteScope is installed on the
        same drive in the same directory on both primary and failover servers.

        The SiteScope failover instance periodically copies all configuration files from the
        primary instance to stay current with any changes to the primary monitoring
        configurations. The failover instance periodically requests the PROGRESS REPORT page
        from the primary instance as an indicator that primary is still functioning.

        If SiteScope failover is unable to get to the PROGRESS REPORT page, it becomes the
        primary SiteScope server and starts running all replicated monitors. SiteScope failover




11-10                                                                   SiteScope Failover Internals
Maintaining SiteScope



          continues running as primary until it can obtain the PROGRESS REPORT page from
          primary SiteScope, indicating that the primary is available again.

          Note: There a SiteScope Failover Guide with detailed information on the topic.

          Failover Implementation Considerations
          Additional considerations when planning the Failover implementation include:

          •    How to manage unsupported monitors.

          •    What to do about preserving data and log integrity while monitoring from the
               failover system.

          •    What is the impact of configuration changes to the failover system.

          •    How to handle the continuity of reporting to BAC (or another EMS).

          •    What impact do monitor frequency changes have on the failover group.

          While using SiteScope failover, switching to the backup system will impact log
          integrity. To ensure continuity of report data across the failover period, you have to
          merge the data from the failover system to your primary after recovery.

          Do not make configuration or monitor changes on the failover SiteScope server. While
          the failover system is in control, configuration and monitor changes are not supported.
          Any such actions could cause unpredictable results. In the event of such changes, data is
          lost when the primary SiteScope server regains control.




SiteScope Failover Internals                                                                  11-11
Maintaining SiteScope



Security Overview
        Security in SiteScope is implemented through the following methods:

        •   Access control

            –   User accounts and permissions

        •   Enabling SiteScope to run securely

            –   Restricting the access from ports and IP addresses

            –   Enabling SiteScope to run over Secure Sockets

        •   Retrieving monitor data through secure channels

            –   Using SSH connections




11-12                                                                         Security Overview
Maintaining SiteScope



 User Accounts
         The SiteScope administrator can create custom user profiles with a very granular set of
         permissions. The configured permissions define the allowed activities a user can carry
         out on groups, monitors, reports, and alerts. The user profiles should be designed during
         the planning phase and should map to real-life roles. Another option for automatically
         creating user accounts is to integrate with LDAP. LDAP is a supported integration well
         documented in the SiteScope documentation library.

         Please be aware that by default (out of the box) anybody can access SiteScope using the
         no-password Administrator account.




User Accounts                                                                               11-13
Maintaining SiteScope



SSL Basics
        Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is implemented in Sun's JSSE (Java Secure Socket
        Extension) package and included with all major J2EE application servers. Any SSL
        implementation requires importing a digital certificate to a key store file. As a result the
        SSL-enabled web site only responds to HTTPS requests funneled through port 443
        (default secure port alternative to port 80).

        This secure behavior can be configured in SiteScope as well. The configuration
        procedure however needs to be applied to both the SiteScope classic web server and the
        JBoss web server.

        Please note that starting with version 8.0, there are two web servers in SiteScope - one
        supporting the new SiteScope JBoss interface and the other one supporting the classic
        user interface. To limit all access to SiteScope, the SiteScope Administrator must apply
        the applicable settings to both web servers.




11-14                                                                                    SSL Basics
Maintaining SiteScope



 Keytool.exe




                                   Figure 11-7 Keytool.exe

         The keytool.exe is a key and certificate management utility that lets you perform the
         following:

         •    Administer your own public-private key pairs and associated certificates for
              authentication using digital signatures.

         •    Cache the public keys of other persons and organizations with whom they
              communicate.

         The keytool is included in SiteScope, and is installed in SiteScope/java/bin directory.




Keytool.exe                                                                                  11-15
Maintaining SiteScope



Configuring SiteScope for SSL
        The steps to configure SiteScope with SSL are as follows:

        •     Obtain a security certificate.

              –     Request from a certificate authority.

              –     Use a self-signed certificate.

        •     Configure the new SiteScope server for SSL use.

              –     SSL is natively supported in Tomcat.

              –     Requires small changes to the server startup parameters.

        •     Configure the classic SiteScope server for SSL use.

              –     Controlled via property settings in master.config: _httpPort,
                    _httpSecurePort,_httpSecureKeyPassword,_httpSecureKeystorePassword.

        •     Restart the service and use the new URL.

        Please note that once SSL is enabled, the default SiteScope HTTPS URLs are:

        https://yoursitescopeserver:8443/sitescope for the new SiteScope GUI

        https://server_IP_address:8899 for the classic SiteScope GUI
           There is an exercise in the lab to walk the students through the exact steps. For more information, refer students to
        KB # 15924 - How to restrict access to SiteScope using SSL and HTTPS.




11-16                                                                                     Configuring SiteScope for SSL
Maintaining SiteScope



 SSH Basics




                                      Figure 11-8 SSH

        Secure Shell (SSH) is a UNIX-based command interface and protocol used for secure
        access to a remote computer. Both ends of the client/server connection are authenticated
        using a digital certificate, and passwords are protected by encryption.

        The SiteScope machine needs to be configured with an SSH client or a full SSH server
        installation. This is a prerequisite so that SiteScope can be configured to use SSH for
        monitoring of remote machine. The remote machines being monitored need to also run
        the SSH daemon or the full-blown server.

        SiteScope now includes an SSH client written in Java and native to the SiteScope
        application code. This client facilitates the setup of SSH connections and uses fewer
        system resources than external SSH clients.

        SiteScope for Windows also ships with a copy of the PuTTY SSH client and utilities.
        The PuTTY SSH client, plink.exe, was used to enable SSH connectivity for SiteScope
        for Windows prior to the 7.8.1.1 release.

        SiteScope for Solaris and Redhat Linux use the SSH utilities that are normally bundled
        with those operating systems, or are available for download.



SSH Basics                                                                                11-17
Maintaining SiteScope



SSH Usage
        Consider the following recommendations and reminders when planning to monitor via
        SSH:

        •   Use of Native Java Libraries vs. Plink is recommended.

        •   Be aware that the two protocol versions, SSH1 and SSH2, are not compatible.

        •   SSH Client Connection Options:

            –   Integrated Java SSH client

            –   External SSH client

        •   SSH Server Configuration Options:

            –   Cygwin OpenSSH

            –   OpenSSH for Windows

            –   SSH host daemon (SSHD)




11-18                                                                            SSH Usage
Maintaining SiteScope



 Managing the SiteScope License
         The following are some key characteristics of license management in SiteScope:

         •   License Types

             –    General

                  •   Evaluation, Permanent, Failover

             –    Option - based

                  •   EMS integrations, Solution Template addition

         •   License consumption factors:

             –    Total number of monitor points available

             –    Types of SiteScope monitors in use

         •   Monitor points requirements vary with monitor type:

             –    System monitors consume 1 point per instance

             –    Application monitors consume 1 point per instance per metric

             –    URL/Sequence monitors consume 1 point per step.




Managing the SiteScope License                                                            11-19
Maintaining SiteScope



Summary
        In this chapter, you learned:

        •   Routine administrative duties include:

            –    Maintaining data integrity.

            –    Keeping current product and service pack versions.

            –    Monitoring SitesScope Health.

            –    Implementing secure communications.

            –    Understanding and managing licenses.




11-20                                                                            Summary
Maintaining SiteScope



 Review Questions
            Answer the review questions in your book.
 setoN rotcurtsnI

 Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the
 end of the day, or beginning of the next day.

 The answers to the questions below will only be printed in the instructor book; the student book will only show blank lines after
 each question.


            1.    List the configuration and data directories that require backup.

                  SiteScope/groups, SiteScope/persistency, SiteScope/htdocs, and SiteScope/logs.

            2.    What is the purpose of the SiteScope failover option?

                  SiteScope failover option enables automatic backups, data redundancy, and high
                  availability mechanisms. It is a special SiteScope designed to mirror a primary
                  SiteScope configuration to a failover machine. __________________________

                    _______________________________________________________________

                    _______________________________________________________________

            3.    What is the purpose of the file Keytool.exe?

                  The keytool.exe is a key and certificate management utility. It enables users to
                  administer their own public-private key pairs and associated certificates for
                  authentication using digital signatures and cache the public keys of other persons
                  and organizations with whom they communicate. ________________________

                    _______________________________________________________________

                    _______________________________________________________________

                    _______________________________________________________________

            4.    What are the types of licenses?

                  There are three types of licenses; evaluation, permanent, and failover. There is also
                  an option-based license. ____________________________________________

                    _______________________________________________________________




Review Questions                                                                                                              11-21
Maintaining SiteScope




11-22       Review Questions
Class Evaluation Form
         (http://www.merc-training.com/survey/publictraining)

         Class: _____________________________Class Start Date: _________________

         Location: ___________________________Instructor: ______________________

1. How did you register for this class? (check one)

                 On-line
                 Through a Resource Coordinator
                 Someone else registered me
                                 Table 11-1.

2. How much do you agree with the following statements regarding the registration process
and facility? (Please circle only one rating for each category):

                                           Strongly                                Strongly
                                                      Agree   Neutral   Disagree               N/A
                                            Agree                                  Disagree
My registration was handled efficiently.      5         4        3         2          1          -
The classroom/facilities were clean and       5         4        3         2          1       on-site
well maintained.
The classroom equipment worked properly       5         4        3         2          1       on-site
and effectively supported the class.


3. How could the registration process or facilities be improved?




4. If there was CBT, WBT or online pre-work that was to be completed before class, did you
complete it?

                 There was no pre-work for this class
                 Yes - I completed it before class
                 No - I didn't understand that it was required
                 No - I didn't get the assignment in time
                                 Table 11-2.



Class Evaluation Form                                                                             E-1
No - I didn't have time to do it
                  No - Skipped it, already familiar with the content
                  No - Couldn't figure out the WBT site
                  No - I started, but the content didn't seem useful
                                   Table 11-2.

5. If you completed pre-work for this class, how helpful was it in preparing you for this class?

   Very helpful      Somewhat helpful        I’m not sure   Not very helpful   Not helpful at all
        5                    4                    3                2                   1


6. How would you rate your technical ability going into the class?

                  5 - Highly technical
                  4 - Above average
                  3 - Average
                  2 - Below average
                  1 - Not at all technical
                                   Table 11-3.

7. How would you rate your familiarity with the product going into the class?

                  5 - I consider myself a product expert
                  4 - I have above average knowledge of the
                  product
                  3 - I'm comfortable with common product
                  functions
                  2 - I've used the product a little
                  1 - I've never used the product
                                   Table 11-4.

8. How much do you agree with the following statements regarding the course content and




E-2                                                                             Class Evaluation Form
materials?

                                                          Strongly                                     Strongly
                                                                      Agree         Neutral Disagree
                                                           Agree                                       Disagree
The objectives laid out in the course description were          5          4             3     2          1
met.
The course materials were clearly written and easy to           5          4             3     2          1
follow.
There was an appropriate amount of content - not too            5          4             3     2          1
packed or too lean.
The lab exercises were well constructed and relevant.           5          4             3     2          1
The graphics in the course materials were clear and             5          4             3     2          1
effective.
I would recommend this course to others.                        5          4             3     2          1


9. How could the course materials be improved?

10. How much do you agree with the following statements regarding the class instructor?

                                                         Strongly                                      Strongly
                                                                     Agree         Neutral Disagree
                                                          Agree                                        Disagree
The instructor had a thorough knowledge of the              5          4             3        2           1
course content.
The instructor encouraged participation from stu-           5          4             3        2           1
dents.
The instructor was an effective communicator.               5          4             3        2           1
The instructor conducted the class at an appropriate        5          4             3        2           1
pace.
The instructor made the course relevant by using real-      5          4             3        2           1
world examples.
I would recommend this instructor to others.                5          4             3        2           1


11. What suggestions do you have for the instructor?




12. How would you rate your overall experience with this class?

    Excellent               Good                    OK              Needs Improvement              Poor
        5                     4                      3                         2                      1




Class Evaluation Form                                                                                         E-3
13. What is your level of confidence after completing the class?

                    I understood the
 I understood the
                    course concepts,     I understood the
 course concepts,                                             I understood some
                     can apply some      course concepts,                          I had a very hard
and can apply most                                            of the course con-
                   without assistance,   but will need help                      time with this course
  of them without                                                    cepts
                    but will need help     applying them
     assistance
                       with others
          5                  4                   3                    2                    1


14. What recommendations do you have to improve the overall effectiveness of this course?




15. What other courses would you like to see offered by HP Software Global Training?




16. If you have any other comments, please enter them below. If you would like to be contacted
    regarding your comments, please include your name and contact information.




E-4                                                                             Class Evaluation Form
SS95USING-01




Class Evaluation Form   E-5
E-6   Class Evaluation Form

More Related Content

PDF
2020.02.06 우리는 왜 glue를 버렸나?
PDF
제안, 제안활동, 제안제도
PDF
마이크로서비스 기반 클라우드 아키텍처 구성 모범 사례 - 윤석찬 (AWS 테크에반젤리스트)
PDF
AWS 6월 웨비나 | Amazon VPC Deep Dive (김상필 솔루션즈아키텍트)
PDF
Appdynamics Training Session
PDF
レガシー Web からの脱却 ~ 開発者が次に目指すべき Web アプリの姿とは?
PDF
T-Mobile.pl: Powering Telco AIOps with Elastic Machine Learning
PPTX
AWS Cloud9
2020.02.06 우리는 왜 glue를 버렸나?
제안, 제안활동, 제안제도
마이크로서비스 기반 클라우드 아키텍처 구성 모범 사례 - 윤석찬 (AWS 테크에반젤리스트)
AWS 6월 웨비나 | Amazon VPC Deep Dive (김상필 솔루션즈아키텍트)
Appdynamics Training Session
レガシー Web からの脱却 ~ 開発者が次に目指すべき Web アプリの姿とは?
T-Mobile.pl: Powering Telco AIOps with Elastic Machine Learning
AWS Cloud9

What's hot (20)

PDF
AWS運用管理のベストプラクティス hinemosクラウド管理オプションのご紹介
PPTX
Joel Schuweiler_AWS IAM Identity Center (Single Sign On).pptx
PPTX
Istioサービスメッシュ入門
PDF
AWS Black Belt Techシリーズ AWS Lambda
PPTX
アプリケーション開発者のためのAzure Databricks入門
PDF
자율 주행 플랫폼 개발을 통한 IT Transformation
PDF
[236] 카카오의데이터파이프라인 윤도영
PDF
Re: ゼロから始める監視設計
PDF
MSA 전략 2: 마이크로서비스, 어떻게 구현할 것인가?
PDF
Planet-scale Data Ingestion Pipeline: Bigdam
PDF
누가 내 엔터프라이즈 고객을 클라우드로 옮겼을까?-양승호, Head of Cloud Modernization,AWS::AWS 마이그레이션 ...
PDF
"はじめてのKong Konnect" APIゲートウェイと Service Meshについて学ぼう!
PDF
개발자가 알아야 할 Amazon DynamoDB 활용법 :: 김일호 :: AWS Summit Seoul 2016
PDF
elasticsearch-hadoopをつかってごにょごにょしてみる
PDF
Serverless computing with AWS Lambda
PDF
AWS Black Belt Online Seminar 2017 Auto Scaling
PDF
Writing REST APIs with OpenAPI and Swagger Ada
PDF
[AWS Dev Day] 실습워크샵 | Amazon EKS 핸즈온 워크샵
PDF
Scalable webservice
PPTX
AWS Elastic BeanstalkとAWS Lambdaのご紹介
AWS運用管理のベストプラクティス hinemosクラウド管理オプションのご紹介
Joel Schuweiler_AWS IAM Identity Center (Single Sign On).pptx
Istioサービスメッシュ入門
AWS Black Belt Techシリーズ AWS Lambda
アプリケーション開発者のためのAzure Databricks入門
자율 주행 플랫폼 개발을 통한 IT Transformation
[236] 카카오의데이터파이프라인 윤도영
Re: ゼロから始める監視設計
MSA 전략 2: 마이크로서비스, 어떻게 구현할 것인가?
Planet-scale Data Ingestion Pipeline: Bigdam
누가 내 엔터프라이즈 고객을 클라우드로 옮겼을까?-양승호, Head of Cloud Modernization,AWS::AWS 마이그레이션 ...
"はじめてのKong Konnect" APIゲートウェイと Service Meshについて学ぼう!
개발자가 알아야 할 Amazon DynamoDB 활용법 :: 김일호 :: AWS Summit Seoul 2016
elasticsearch-hadoopをつかってごにょごにょしてみる
Serverless computing with AWS Lambda
AWS Black Belt Online Seminar 2017 Auto Scaling
Writing REST APIs with OpenAPI and Swagger Ada
[AWS Dev Day] 실습워크샵 | Amazon EKS 핸즈온 워크샵
Scalable webservice
AWS Elastic BeanstalkとAWS Lambdaのご紹介
Ad

Viewers also liked (17)

PPTX
Selenium conference
PDF
Radview WebLOAD
PPTX
Perfmon And Profiler 101
PPTX
Cloud Monitoring
PDF
30+ MS Excel Hacks & Tips That Even Your Grandma Would Love
PPTX
Building and Monitoring Services at Lithium
PPTX
The Benefits of Having Nerds On Site Monitoring Your Technology
PDF
LabVIEW Based Monitoring the Building in wireless communication
PPT
Khulisa Management Services- ECD Site Monitoring Instrument
PDF
Site Operation Manual for a Typical Air Monitoring Site
PPTX
Nagios Conference 2013 - Thomas Dunbar - Building Technology for Storage Syst...
PPTX
River monitoring site 7
PDF
Presentation Mrs.Smolka Ursula, Ramboll: costs and benefits when monitoring s...
PDF
How to build a budget transparency site: 5 easy steps
PDF
The Drupal Ecosystem for Drupal Services
PDF
Big Data and Social Monitoring: Building Meaningful Relationships
PDF
How to Efficiently and Effectively Balance Central Monitoring with On-Site Mo...
Selenium conference
Radview WebLOAD
Perfmon And Profiler 101
Cloud Monitoring
30+ MS Excel Hacks & Tips That Even Your Grandma Would Love
Building and Monitoring Services at Lithium
The Benefits of Having Nerds On Site Monitoring Your Technology
LabVIEW Based Monitoring the Building in wireless communication
Khulisa Management Services- ECD Site Monitoring Instrument
Site Operation Manual for a Typical Air Monitoring Site
Nagios Conference 2013 - Thomas Dunbar - Building Technology for Storage Syst...
River monitoring site 7
Presentation Mrs.Smolka Ursula, Ramboll: costs and benefits when monitoring s...
How to build a budget transparency site: 5 easy steps
The Drupal Ecosystem for Drupal Services
Big Data and Social Monitoring: Building Meaningful Relationships
How to Efficiently and Effectively Balance Central Monitoring with On-Site Mo...
Ad

Similar to Hp monitoring tool site scope (20)

PDF
En2manual
DOCX
Introduction to Statistical Analysis Using IBM SPSS
DOCX
Introduction to Statistical Analysis Using IBM SPSS .docx
DOCX
Introduction to Statistical Analysis Using IBM SPSS .docx
DOCX
Introduction to Statistical Analysis Using IBM SPSS .docx
PDF
LPAR Design Tool V8 -T01 for IBM z Systems
KEY
Paper prototyping
PDF
모바일 웹 디버깅
PDF
P6 analytics install_and_config_guide
DOCX
Itr5iwsRN -91aQ+-4, ( ) (., tr.docx
PDF
Chi ontwerp
PDF
Machine Data 101
PDF
EPANET 2 Users Manual
PDF
Practical solutions guide to arc flash hazards
PDF
Arc flash practical solution guide to arc flash hazards-1
PPTX
Getting Started with Splunk Enterprise
PDF
The FLP Microsatellite Platform Flight Operations Manual 1st Edition Jens Eic...
PDF
NetApp VM .tr-3749
PDF
Continuous monitoring strategy_guide_072712
En2manual
Introduction to Statistical Analysis Using IBM SPSS
Introduction to Statistical Analysis Using IBM SPSS .docx
Introduction to Statistical Analysis Using IBM SPSS .docx
Introduction to Statistical Analysis Using IBM SPSS .docx
LPAR Design Tool V8 -T01 for IBM z Systems
Paper prototyping
모바일 웹 디버깅
P6 analytics install_and_config_guide
Itr5iwsRN -91aQ+-4, ( ) (., tr.docx
Chi ontwerp
Machine Data 101
EPANET 2 Users Manual
Practical solutions guide to arc flash hazards
Arc flash practical solution guide to arc flash hazards-1
Getting Started with Splunk Enterprise
The FLP Microsatellite Platform Flight Operations Manual 1st Edition Jens Eic...
NetApp VM .tr-3749
Continuous monitoring strategy_guide_072712

Recently uploaded (20)

PDF
3rd Neelam Sanjeevareddy Memorial Lecture.pdf
PPTX
Orientation - ARALprogram of Deped to the Parents.pptx
PDF
Chinmaya Tiranga quiz Grand Finale.pdf
PDF
Weekly quiz Compilation Jan -July 25.pdf
PPTX
IMMUNITY IMMUNITY refers to protection against infection, and the immune syst...
PDF
Trump Administration's workforce development strategy
PDF
GENETICS IN BIOLOGY IN SECONDARY LEVEL FORM 3
PDF
grade 11-chemistry_fetena_net_5883.pdf teacher guide for all student
PPTX
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
PPTX
PPT- ENG7_QUARTER1_LESSON1_WEEK1. IMAGERY -DESCRIPTIONS pptx.pptx
PDF
OBE - B.A.(HON'S) IN INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE -Ar.MOHIUDDIN.pdf
PDF
The Lost Whites of Pakistan by Jahanzaib Mughal.pdf
PDF
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
PDF
Yogi Goddess Pres Conference Studio Updates
PPTX
GDM (1) (1).pptx small presentation for students
PDF
RMMM.pdf make it easy to upload and study
PDF
01-Introduction-to-Information-Management.pdf
DOC
Soft-furnishing-By-Architect-A.F.M.Mohiuddin-Akhand.doc
PDF
O5-L3 Freight Transport Ops (International) V1.pdf
PPTX
Lesson notes of climatology university.
3rd Neelam Sanjeevareddy Memorial Lecture.pdf
Orientation - ARALprogram of Deped to the Parents.pptx
Chinmaya Tiranga quiz Grand Finale.pdf
Weekly quiz Compilation Jan -July 25.pdf
IMMUNITY IMMUNITY refers to protection against infection, and the immune syst...
Trump Administration's workforce development strategy
GENETICS IN BIOLOGY IN SECONDARY LEVEL FORM 3
grade 11-chemistry_fetena_net_5883.pdf teacher guide for all student
Cell Types and Its function , kingdom of life
PPT- ENG7_QUARTER1_LESSON1_WEEK1. IMAGERY -DESCRIPTIONS pptx.pptx
OBE - B.A.(HON'S) IN INTERIOR ARCHITECTURE -Ar.MOHIUDDIN.pdf
The Lost Whites of Pakistan by Jahanzaib Mughal.pdf
Abdominal Access Techniques with Prof. Dr. R K Mishra
Yogi Goddess Pres Conference Studio Updates
GDM (1) (1).pptx small presentation for students
RMMM.pdf make it easy to upload and study
01-Introduction-to-Information-Management.pdf
Soft-furnishing-By-Architect-A.F.M.Mohiuddin-Akhand.doc
O5-L3 Freight Transport Ops (International) V1.pdf
Lesson notes of climatology university.

Hp monitoring tool site scope

  • 1. Using SiteScope July 2008 © Copyright 2008 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an addi- tional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. This is an HP copyrighted work that may not be reproduced without the written permission of HP. You may not use these materials to deliver training to any person outside of your organization without the written permission of HP. Printed in United States of America Using SiteScope Instructor guide July 2008 SS95USING-I-01
  • 2. .detibihorp si PH morf noissimrep nettirw roirp tuohtiw gniniart reviled ot lairetam siht fo esU July 2008 Version 9.50 Using SiteScope
  • 3. kcabdeef/moc.gniniart-crem.www//:ptth aiv meht dnes esaelp ,tnemucod siht gnidrager snoitseggus ro stnemmoc yna evah uoy fI 8002 yluJ ediuG rotcurtsnI 05.9 epocSetiS gnisU ASU ni detnirP .PH fo noissimrep nettirw eht tuohtiw noitazinagro ruoy fo edistuo nosrep yna ot gniniart reviled ot saliretam eseht esu ton yam uoY .PH fo noissimrep nettirw eht tuohtiw decudorper eb ton yam taht krow dethgirypoc PH na si sihT .niereh deniatnoc snoissimo ro srorre lairotide ro lacinhcet rof elbail eb ton llahs PH .ytnarraw lanoitidda na gnitutitsnoc sa deurtsnoc eb dluohs niereh gnihtoN .secivres dna stcudorp hcus gniynapmocca stnemetats ytnarraw sserpxe eht ni htrof tes era secivres dna stcudorp PH rof seitnarraw ylno ehT .eciton tuohtiw egnahc ot tcejbus si niereh deniatnoc noitamrofni ehT .P.L ,ynapmoC tnempoleveD drakcaP-ttelweH yb 8002 thgirypoC ©
  • 4. Course Overview Course Objectives .................................................................................................................. 1-2 Topic Outline - First Day....................................................................................................... 1-3 Topic Outline - Second Day .................................................................................................. 1-4 Introducing SiteScope Key Features of SiteScope ..................................................................................................... 2-2 An Enterprise Management Application ............................................................................... 2-4 Agentless Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 2-5 SiteScope Architecture .......................................................................................................... 2-6 SiteScope Architectural Components .................................................................................... 2-7 Protocols for Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 2-8 Communication Ports for Monitors ....................................................................................... 2-9 SiteScope Monitoring Model............................................................................................... 2-10 Monitors............................................................................................................................... 2-11 Alerts.................................................................................................................................... 2-12 Reports ................................................................................................................................. 2-13 Conceptual Levels of Monitoring ........................................................................................ 2-14 Server versus Server System................................................................................................ 2-15 Server Resources Level Monitoring .................................................................................... 2-16 Network Services Level Monitoring.................................................................................... 2-17 Application and Business Services Level Monitoring......................................................... 2-18 SiteScope Monitors and Categories ..................................................................................... 2-19 Using Help in SiteScope ...................................................................................................... 2-20 Help Options ........................................................................................................................ 2-21 Help Tooltips ....................................................................................................................... 2-22 Support Options ................................................................................................................... 2-23 Summary .............................................................................................................................. 2-24 Installing SiteScope System Requirements ............................................................................................................ 3-2 Installation Prerequisites........................................................................................................ 3-3 HP Downloads Web Site ....................................................................................................... 3-4 Downloading SiteScope......................................................................................................... 3-5 Installing SiteScope ............................................................................................................... 3-6 Deployment Considerations................................................................................................... 3-8 Opening SiteScope................................................................................................................. 3-9 Launching the SiteScope Interface ...................................................................................... 3-10 Copying Monitor Configurations......................................................................................... 3-11 Using the SiteScope Setup Page to Copy Data.................................................................... 3-12 1-1
  • 5. Copy Monitor Configuration Utility.................................................................................... 3-14 Confirming Copy ................................................................................................................. 3-16 Configuration Tool .............................................................................................................. 3-17 Post-Installation Configuration............................................................................................ 3-19 Performing Post-Installation Tasks...................................................................................... 3-20 Summary .............................................................................................................................. 3-21 Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 3-22 Exercise: Downloading and Installing SiteScope ................................................................ 3-23 Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Introduction to the SiteScope Interface ................................................................................. 4-2 Exploring the Dashboard Tab ................................................................................................ 4-3 Viewing Group Status............................................................................................................ 4-4 Viewing Metric Level Status ................................................................................................. 4-5 Dashboard Navigation ........................................................................................................... 4-6 Creating Favorite Views ........................................................................................................ 4-7 Availability Status.................................................................................................................. 4-8 Exploring the Contents and Properties Tabs.......................................................................... 4-9 Viewing the Contents Tab ................................................................................................... 4-10 Viewing the Properties Tab ................................................................................................. 4-11 Viewing Monitor Settings.................................................................................................... 4-12 Global Replace..................................................................................................................... 4-13 Performing Replace Operation ............................................................................................ 4-14 Exploring the Preferences Interface..................................................................................... 4-15 General Preferences ............................................................................................................. 4-16 Configuring Historical Data Tracking ................................................................................. 4-17 Infrastructure Settings Preferences ...................................................................................... 4-18 Windows and UNIX Remote Preferences ........................................................................... 4-19 Connection to a Remote Windows Server ........................................................................... 4-20 Log Preferences ................................................................................................................... 4-21 Mail Preferences .................................................................................................................. 4-22 Users Preferences................................................................................................................. 4-23 Credential Preferences ......................................................................................................... 4-24 Summary of Preferences Settings ........................................................................................ 4-25 Match Preferences with Descriptions .................................................................................. 4-26 Understanding Health Monitors........................................................................................... 4-27 Health Monitors Overview .................................................................................................. 4-28 Diagnostic Tools .................................................................................................................. 4-30 Summary .............................................................................................................................. 4-31 Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 4-32 Exercise: Setting Windows Remote Preferences in SiteScope............................................ 4-34 Exercise: Setting Mail Preferences in SiteScope ................................................................. 4-37 1-2
  • 6. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Monitoring Methodology....................................................................................................... 5-2 Introduction to the Grouping Model ...................................................................................... 5-4 Heartbeats and Dependencies ................................................................................................ 5-5 Top-Level Grouping Model Example.................................................................................... 5-6 Top-Level Grouping Model Advantages ............................................................................... 5-7 Grouping Guidelines.............................................................................................................. 5-8 Planning the Monitoring Strategy.......................................................................................... 5-9 SiteScope Server Sizing....................................................................................................... 5-11 Monitored Infrastructure Assessment .................................................................................. 5-12 Summary .............................................................................................................................. 5-13 Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 5-14 Managing Groups and Monitors Dashboard Views and Nodes ................................................................................................. 6-2 Building Groups..................................................................................................................... 6-3 Creating a Group.................................................................................................................... 6-4 Configuring Group Contents ................................................................................................. 6-5 Creating a Monitor................................................................................................................. 6-6 Monitor Types........................................................................................................................ 6-8 Modifying Monitor Settings .................................................................................................. 6-9 Modifying Main Settings ..................................................................................................... 6-10 Modifying Advanced Settings ............................................................................................. 6-11 Editing Monitor Dependencies ............................................................................................ 6-12 Enabling or Disabling a Monitor ......................................................................................... 6-14 Enabling or Disabling Alerts ............................................................................................... 6-15 Understanding Threshold Settings....................................................................................... 6-16 Using Baselines to Set Thresholds....................................................................................... 6-17 Baseline Settings.................................................................................................................. 6-18 Reviewing the Baseline Data ............................................................................................... 6-19 Baseline Status ..................................................................................................................... 6-21 Modifying Baseline Thresholds........................................................................................... 6-22 Acknowledging an Error in Monitoring .............................................................................. 6-23 Modifying an Acknowledgement ........................................................................................ 6-25 Filter Icon............................................................................................................................. 6-26 Filtering Views in SiteScope ............................................................................................... 6-27 Moving Objects.................................................................................................................... 6-28 Summary .............................................................................................................................. 6-29 Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 6-30 Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor................................................................... 6-31 1-3
  • 7. Configuring Alerts Defining an Alert ................................................................................................................... 7-2 Types of Alerts....................................................................................................................... 7-3 Preventing Alert Floods ......................................................................................................... 7-4 Configuring Alerts ................................................................................................................. 7-5 The Alert Icon ........................................................................................................................ 7-6 Adding New Alerts ................................................................................................................ 7-7 Alert Action Wizard: Step 1 .................................................................................................. 7-8 Alert Action Wizard: Step 2 .................................................................................................. 7-9 Alert Action Wizard: Step 3 ................................................................................................ 7-10 Alert Action Wizard: Step 4 ................................................................................................ 7-11 Adding Multiple Actions to an Alert ................................................................................... 7-12 Setting Filters ....................................................................................................................... 7-13 Viewing Alert Logs ............................................................................................................. 7-14 Summary .............................................................................................................................. 7-15 Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 7-16 Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert..................................................................... 7-17 Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down ........................................................................ 7-21 Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood .................................................................................... 7-27 Using Templates Using Templates to Deploy Monitoring ................................................................................ 8-2 Template Attributes ............................................................................................................... 8-3 User-Defined Templates ........................................................................................................ 8-4 User-Defined Templates Concepts ........................................................................................ 8-5 Templates Planning................................................................................................................ 8-6 User-Defined Template Containers ....................................................................................... 8-7 Adding Templates to Containers ........................................................................................... 8-8 Shortcut to Creating Templates ............................................................................................. 8-9 Deploying Templates ........................................................................................................... 8-10 Publish Template Changes Wizard...................................................................................... 8-11 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 1.......................................................................... 8-12 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 2.......................................................................... 8-13 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 3.......................................................................... 8-14 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 4.......................................................................... 8-15 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 5.......................................................................... 8-16 Publish Template Changes Summary Report ...................................................................... 8-17 Overview of Solution Templates ......................................................................................... 8-18 Summary .............................................................................................................................. 8-19 Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 8-20 Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template ...................................................................... 8-21 1-4
  • 8. Exercise: Change Template and Publish Changes............................................................... 8-28 Using Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Tools .................................................................................................................... 9-2 Types of Diagnostic Tools ..................................................................................................... 9-3 Examples of Diagnostic Tools ............................................................................................... 9-4 Using the DNS Lookup Tool ................................................................................................. 9-5 Using the Event Log Tool...................................................................................................... 9-6 Using the FTP Server Tool .................................................................................................... 9-7 Using the LDAP Authentication Tool ................................................................................... 9-8 Using the Network Tool ........................................................................................................ 9-9 Monitor-Specific Tool Selection ......................................................................................... 9-10 Summary .............................................................................................................................. 9-12 Review Questions ................................................................................................................ 9-13 Exercise: Running the Event Log Tool................................................................................ 9-14 Exercise: Running the Ping Tool ......................................................................................... 9-16 Exercise: Running the Services Tool................................................................................... 9-18 Exercise: Running the Trace Route Tool............................................................................. 9-20 Generating Reports Reports Specific to User ...................................................................................................... 10-2 Types of Reports .................................................................................................................. 10-3 Working with Management Reports.................................................................................... 10-5 Viewing Management Reports ............................................................................................ 10-6 Editing Management Reports .............................................................................................. 10-7 Generating Reports .............................................................................................................. 10-8 Viewing Reports .................................................................................................................. 10-9 Viewing Previous Reports ................................................................................................. 10-10 Working with Alert, Monitor and Quick Reports.............................................................. 10-11 Viewing Alert Reports ....................................................................................................... 10-12 Viewing Quick Reports ..................................................................................................... 10-13 Viewing Monitor Summary Reports.................................................................................. 10-14 Summary ............................................................................................................................ 10-15 Review Questions .............................................................................................................. 10-16 Exercise: Running SiteScope Reports ............................................................................... 10-17 Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor........... 10-19 Maintaining SiteScope Important Files and Directories ........................................................................................... 11-2 Patches and Service Packs ................................................................................................... 11-3 1-5
  • 9. Health Page .......................................................................................................................... 11-4 Health Page Metrics............................................................................................................. 11-5 Alert and Error Log Files..................................................................................................... 11-7 Run Monitor, BAC, and Operator Logs .............................................................................. 11-8 Failover Overview ............................................................................................................... 11-9 SiteScope Failover Internals .............................................................................................. 11-10 Security Overview ............................................................................................................. 11-12 User Accounts.................................................................................................................... 11-13 SSL Basics ......................................................................................................................... 11-14 Keytool.exe ........................................................................................................................ 11-15 Configuring SiteScope for SSL ......................................................................................... 11-16 SSH Basics......................................................................................................................... 11-17 SSH Usage ......................................................................................................................... 11-18 Managing the SiteScope License ....................................................................................... 11-19 Summary ............................................................................................................................ 11-20 Review Questions .............................................................................................................. 11-21 Class Evaluation Form ........................................................................................................E-1 1-6
  • 10. Course Overview Course Overview 1 Purpose This course is designed to provide you with the knowledge and skills required to work with SiteScope. After completing this course, you will be able to identify critical business systems and components of your infrastructure and design a proactive application monitoring solution implementing a scalable set of monitoring agents. You will also learn how to configure SiteScope to proactively notify and send alerts about critical conditions and breach of SLAs. This course also demonstrates how to optimize and fine-tune the monitoring system, perform analysis and trend reporting on incidents, and apply best practices for the use and management of SiteScope. 1-1
  • 11. Course Overview Course Objectives After completing this course, you will be able to: • Install SiteScope. • Design a scalable and easy to manage monitoring strategy. • Implement a monitoring system leveraging best practices for grouping and alerting. • Efficiently configure individual monitoring entities. • Use templates to speed up the deployment of monitors. • Design an efficient alerting mechanism. • Respond to generated alerts to resolve errors in the IT environment. • Design enterprise-level reports. • Perform maintenance and troubleshooting of the monitoring solution. 1-2 Course Objectives
  • 12. Course Overview Topic Outline - First Day • Introducing SiteScope This chapter introduces the basic features of SiteScope. • Installing SiteScope This chapter explains the installation process for SiteScope. • Getting Familiar with SiteScope Interface This chapter describes the SiteScope interface. • SiteScope Monitoring Strategy This chapter explains the top-level grouping model in SiteScope, the best practices for developing a grouping model, and considerations for deploying SiteScope. • Managing Groups and Monitors This chapter explains how to create and configure groups and monitors in SiteScope. Topic Outline - First Day 1-3
  • 13. Course Overview Topic Outline - Second Day • Configuring Alerts This chapter describes how to configure alerts in SiteScope. • Using Templates This chapter explains the concepts of reusability and repeatability of monitor, group, and alert creation through the use of templates. • Introducing Diagnostic Tools This chapter explains the diagnostic tools available in SiteScope. • Generating Reports This chapter explains the SiteScope reports and how to generate them. • Maintaining SiteScope This chapter explains the common administrative and maintenance tasks associated with maintaining SiteScope. 1-4 Topic Outline - Second Day
  • 14. Introducing SiteScope Introducing SiteScope 2 setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose This chapter introduces the basics of SiteScope. It explains the key product features, architecture and flow of monitoring, monitoring objects, and monitoring levels in SiteScope. Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: • Identify the key product features. • Describe the architecture and flow of monitoring. • Identify SiteScope monitoring objects. • Identify the monitoring levels. • Use the SiteScope help. 2-1
  • 15. Introducing SiteScope Key Features of SiteScope SiteScope is a web-based infrastructure monitoring solution designed to ensure the availability and performance of distributed IT infrastructure components, such as servers, operating systems, network devices, network services, applications, and so on. It is lightweight, highly customizable, and does not require data collection agents to be installed in the environments being monitored. SiteScope has the following features: • Agentless monitoring SiteScope monitors without the deployment of agent software on the servers to be monitored. This feature makes deployment and maintenance of SiteScope relatively simple compared to other performance monitoring solutions. • Enterprise-ready architecture SiteScope provides failover capabilities, simultaneous monitoring of large number of systems, and support for secure connections. • Simple installation and deployment SiteScope is installed on a single server running as a service or a process. This results in quick installation and easy monitoring configuration. • Infrastructure performance and availability monitoring SiteScope has over 100 types of monitors. SiteScope can monitor utilization, response time, usage, and resource availability of a variety of host types and application platforms. • Proactive alerting SiteScope can be configured to alert whenever it detects a problem in the IT infrastructure. There are several types of alert actions, such as sending e-mail messages, paging, sending Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) traps, or executing a script. • Self-monitoring SiteScope monitors key aspects of its own operability and identifies monitor configuration problems and critical server load. It also monitors its own integration and data events when configured to report to HP Business Availability Center. 2-2 Key Features of SiteScope
  • 16. Introducing SiteScope • Customization capabilities SiteScope allows for display of customizations of groups and monitors via custom data fields and HTML-sensitive description tags. In addition, SiteScope allows for the customization of alert text and report configurations via templates and user- defined variables. • Intuitive administration SiteScope reduces the time spent managing a monitoring environment by providing a user friendly browser-based interface for viewing and administering of the monitoring platform. Key Features of SiteScope 2-3
  • 17. Introducing SiteScope An Enterprise Management Application SiteScope uses a multi-tiered monitoring approach for effective enterprise system management. The monitoring process includes the following phases: • Verification: – SiteScope monitors ensure that infrastructure components are functioning with expected results and at the expected level of performance and availability. • Diagnosis: – SiteScope Viewing and Dashboard capabilities enable for a quick and accurate identification of the underlying cause as problems occur. • Recovery: – SiteScope notification system and advanced monitors provide automated corrective action and dispatch of timely alerts. • Prevention: – SiteScope communicates performance data through management and trend reports. The above process milestones help ensure the availability and uninterrupted operation of systems and services. 2-4 An Enterprise Management Application
  • 18. Introducing SiteScope Agentless Monitoring Figure 2-1 Agentless Solution SiteScope uses an agentless monitoring model that does not need the deployment of agent software on the servers being monitored. The model uses the following mechanisms: • Standard protocols: This category includes monitoring through Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS), File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), and User Datagram Protocol (UDP). • Platform-specific network services and commands: Windows environments are commonly monitored over NETBIOS while Unix/Linux machines are monitored using telnet, rlogin, ssh, and so on. Figure 2-1 shows an overview of agentless monitoring with SiteScope. The advantages of the agentless model are the following: • Ease of initial deployment and setup. • Reduction of ongoing support and maintenance time. Agentless Monitoring 2-5
  • 19. Introducing SiteScope SiteScope Architecture Figure 2-2 SiteScope Architecture SiteScope's web-enabled architecture allows for the creation and ongoing administration of a scalable monitoring environment. 2-6 SiteScope Architecture
  • 20. Introducing SiteScope SiteScope Architectural Components It consists of the following components: • Browser-based interface: Manages end-user status information requests, configuration change requests, and access control. • Monitors: Collect performance and availability information about the system being monitored. • Alerts: Notifications of exceptions, failures, and status change events in the system being monitored. • Reports: A historical representation of monitored data for trending and analysis purposes. • Log Files: SiteScope stores performance data in log files, which are aggregated and analyzed when generating reports. • Scheduler: Coordinates the running of monitors, alert creation, and report generation. SiteScope Architectural Components 2-7
  • 21. Introducing SiteScope Protocols for Monitoring Figure 2-3 Protocols for Monitoring SiteScope uses standard protocols and utilities to request and capture information about the performance of applications, servers, and all critical systems. For example, Web services are monitored with HTTP and HTTPS. Windows metric statistics are gathered via NETBIOS, and sometimes with the Windows Registry or WMI. 2-8 Protocols for Monitoring
  • 22. Introducing SiteScope Communication Ports for Monitors Monitor/Alert Port URL Monitor 80, 443 SNMP Monitor 161 (UDP) FTP Monitor 21 MAIL Monitor 25 (SMTP), 110 Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3), 143 Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) NEWS Monitor 119 E-MAIL Alert 25 POST Alert 80, 443 SNMP TRAP Alert 162 (UDP) Table 2-1. Ports Associated with Monitors and Alerts Successful monitor configuration requires that a certain number of ports be open and available. This table lists just some of the ports commonly used by SiteScope for monitoring and alerting in a typical monitoring environment. As a rule, SiteScope monitors use default ports and protocols. For example, the FTP monitor uses the default FTP port 21 and the URL monitor uses the standard HTTP port 80. Ports associated with UNIX monitors include 22 for Secure Shell (SSH), 23 for TELNET, and 513 for Remote Login (RLOGIN). Remote NT is monitored on port 139 which is where NetBIOS (TCP) as well as File and Printer sharing run on Windows. A complete list of common port numbers is available at http://www.iana.org/assignments/port-numbers Communication Ports for Monitors 2-9
  • 23. Introducing SiteScope SiteScope Monitoring Model A well-designed monitoring model enables effective and efficient management of an IT infrastructure. The following key components are included in the SiteScope monitoring model: • Groups: A group is a container for monitoring assets. Groups may contain subgroups and are used to organize monitors. Groups are created prior to monitors. • Monitors: A monitor checks the status of server components, key application processes, log files, or network devices, to name a few. It collects data based on selected metrics and displays a status of good, warning, or error with respect to the configured thresholds. • Alerts: An alert is an action triggered by a change in the status of a monitored asset. Alerts notify appropriate users when negative events or failures occur. An alert can be sent to a variety of media including e-mail, pager, Short Message Service (SMS) messages, or an SNMP trap. • Reports: A report is a historical representation of monitored data. SiteScope offers a variety of reports from quick monitor reports to detailed management reports. Reports enable you to track trends and operational performance and to troubleshoot problems. 2-10 SiteScope Monitoring Model
  • 24. Introducing SiteScope Monitors Figure 2-4 Monitors Monitors 2-11
  • 25. Introducing SiteScope Alerts Figure 2-5 Alerts 2-12 Alerts
  • 26. Introducing SiteScope Reports Figure 2-6 Sample Management Report Reports 2-13
  • 27. Introducing SiteScope Conceptual Levels of Monitoring We can categorize SiteScope monitoring into three conceptual levels of monitoring: • Server Resources. This conceptual level of monitoring measures attributes of the servers and operating systems. • Network Services. This conceptual level of monitoring tests availability and performance of network services. • Application and Business Services. This conceptual level of monitoring monitors applications and business services, such as Web servers, application servers, middleware, and ERP/CRM applications. 2-14 Conceptual Levels of Monitoring
  • 28. Introducing SiteScope Server versus Server System Figure 2-7 Server Process and Server System The word “server” represents a process, and does not necessarily mean “machine”. Servers may run on one or more machines, or server systems. Conversely, more than one server can also be run on one system. Server versus Server System 2-15
  • 29. Introducing SiteScope Server Resources Level Monitoring Figure 2-8 Server Resources Server resource level monitoring refers to monitors that retrieve basic system management statistics. These are further categorized into operating system-centric metrics that displays hardware and operating system statistics, and server-centric metrics that displays server and process-based statistics. Examples of operating system-centric monitors include CPU and MEMORY monitors, INTELLIGENT PLATFORM MANAGEMENT INTERFACE (IPMI) monitors that record values of hardware parameters, and FILE and DIRECTORY monitors that record basic metrics related to a file system or directory. Examples of server-centric monitors include database monitors that verify database queries, DYNAMIC HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL (DHCP) monitors that verify whether it is possible to obtain an Internet Protocol (IP) address, LIGHTWEIGHT DIRECTORY ACCESS PROTOCOL (LDAP) monitors that verify the server is authenticating as expected, and SERVICE monitors that verify whether a specific service is running. COMPOSITE and SCRIPT monitors are also considered as server level monitors. A COMPOSITE monitor enables several monitors to be grouped into a single monitor for the purpose of generating alerts. A SCRIPT monitor verifies the execution of a script against the monitored system. It is often used for recovery operations. 2-16 Server Resources Level Monitoring
  • 30. Introducing SiteScope Network Services Level Monitoring Figure 2-9 Network Services Network service monitors test commonly used network applications and services by simulating end user actions, such as e-mail, file downloads, and performing database queries. This subcategory also includes monitors for checking lower level network statistics and connectivity. For instance, SiteScope provides the NETWORK and NETWORK BANDWIDTH monitor types. Network Services Level Monitoring 2-17
  • 31. Introducing SiteScope Application and Business Services Level Monitoring Figure 2-10 Application Services Level Monitoring SiteScope application monitors measure application parameters and retrieve performance statistics from web servers, application servers, database servers, and ERP/CRM applications. In addition, the URL SEQUENCE and E-BUSINESS TRANSACTION monitors enable SiteScope to monitor and report on a chain of actions representing business process. 2-18 Application and Business Services Level Monitoring
  • 32. Introducing SiteScope SiteScope Monitors and Categories SiteScope has over 100 built-in types of monitors that are used to collect metric data about different aspects of an IT infrastructure. These include monitors for server hardware, network services, operating systems, applications, and application components, to name a few. You can create instances of these monitor types and configure them to "point" to a specific physical element in the IT infrastructure. For instance, to monitor the CPU utilization on a server, select the CPU type monitor and set its "Server" attribute to address of the server. Some monitors are unlocked by the optional license. There are several general purpose monitor categories in SiteScope, which are as follows: • Network Monitors: Monitors that test commonly used network applications and services by simulating end user actions. These include accessing Web content, e- mail, file downloads, and performing database queries. This subcategory also includes monitors for checking lower level network function and connectivity. For example, DNS, FTP, and Mail. • Server Monitors: Monitors that measure server availability, resource usage, and other operating system attributes. These can be used to monitor remote servers running Windows or UNIX-based operating systems. For example, Memory, Disk Space, and CPU. • Application Monitors: Monitors designed to check the availability and report on performance statistics of specific network applications and servers. Most monitors in this category allow you to set monitor status thresholds on more than one measurement per monitor instance. • Database Monitors: Monitors in this category monitor different types of database applications. There are monitors that access data from specific database applications and generic monitors that can be configured to monitor any database application. • Generic Monitors: Monitors in this category monitor various types of environments. These monitors can monitor networks, applications, and databases depending on how they are configured. • Stream Monitors: Monitors in this category monitor applications that play media files and stream data. • Web Transaction Monitors: Monitors in this category monitor web-based applications. SiteScope Monitors and Categories 2-19
  • 33. Introducing SiteScope Using Help in SiteScope The SiteScope Help library provides information on deploying, administering, customizing, and usage of SiteScope platform and applications. There are the following options: • Help link: This link leads to the user guide in Hyper Text Markup Language (HTML) form, which opens in a separate pop-up window. • Context help: To view information about the currently displayed page, from the HELP menu, select HELP ON THIS PAGE. Help is also viewed by clicking the Question Mark button next to the object for which you want information. • Printer-friendly help: To view printer-friendly help, on the SITESCOPE HELP pop-up window, click the PDFS tab. 2-20 Using Help in SiteScope
  • 34. Introducing SiteScope Help Options Figure 2-11 Help Portal In SiteScope, the help menu is located on the left-hand corner. Clicking the help menu displays the following options: HELP ON THIS PAGE: Selecting this option displays the page in SiteScope Help depending on the currently selected view and object. SITESCOPE HELP: Selecting this option displays the online SiteScope Help for the product. TROUBLESHOOTING & KNOWLEDGE BASE: Selecting this option displays the Troublshooting website of HP Software Support Online. HP SOFTWARE SUPPORT: Selecting this option displays the HP Software Support Online website. HP SOFTWARE WEB SITE: Selecting this option displays the HP Software home page. WHAT'S NEW: Selecting this option displays the SiteScope product release notes. ABOUT SITESCOPE: Selecting this option displays the version and release information for the installed SiteScope product. Help Options 2-21
  • 35. Introducing SiteScope Help Tooltips Figure 2-12 Help Tooltips From SiteScope Properties and Contents screens, click the help tooltip icon to display the tooltip information for the fields on the screen. Figure 2-12 shows a screen where the tooltip icon was selected. Tooltip Icon: 2-22 Help Tooltips
  • 36. Introducing SiteScope Support Options SiteScope support is available through the following channels: • Online support database (Knowledge Base) and Discussion Forum – Visit HTTP://WWW.HP.COM/GO/HPSOFTWARESUPPORT • Phone support – For customers with a valid SiteScope license. Support Options 2-23
  • 37. Introducing SiteScope Summary In this chapter, we have demostrated the following: • SiteScope is an easy-to-use, versatile IT infrastructure performance and availability monitoring solution. • SiteScope provides a comprehensive monitoring solution for the IT infrastructure. • SiteScope provides over 100 types of monitors that are used to monitor different aspects of an IT infrastructure. • SiteScope uses groups, monitors, alerts, and reports to keep the IT infrastructure functioning efficiently. • SiteScope monitoring can be categorized into 3 conceptual levels: server resources, network services, and applications and business services. • SiteScope provides a Help link that links to a user guide, a Context help that displays information about the current page, and a printer-friendly help that displays the printer friendly documents. 2-24 Summary
  • 38. Installing SiteScope Installing SiteScope 3 setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose This chapter provides the system requirements and the steps for installation. Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • Identify key input requirements when installing SiteScope. • Download and install an evaluation copy of SiteScope. • Use the configuration tool. • Perform post-installation tasks. 3-1
  • 39. Installing SiteScope System Requirements SiteScope is supported on the following operating systems: • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server/Advanced Server with SP4, Microsoft Windows 2003 Standard/Enterprise with SP1, SP2 and Microsoft Windows 2003 R2 with SP1. • Solaris 2.9, and 2.10 • RedHat Linux ES/AS 3.0 or 4.0. Note: The exact installation requirements for memory and free hard disk depend on the frequency of monitoring, types of monitors deployed, and the number of monitors. Note: Minimum requirements are listed in the installation guide for SiteScope. For typical implementations, 2gb memory and 10gb free hard disk space are recommended. Note: SiteScope can be installed as a 32-Bit application over 64-Bit environments for the supported operating systems listed above. 3-2 System Requirements
  • 40. Installing SiteScope Installation Prerequisites Before installing SiteScope, make sure you perform the prerequistes installation procedures. For Windows operating systems, perform the following prerequisite installation procedures before installing SiteScope: • Activate the Remote Registry Service for the remote computers you plan to monitor. • Install Service Pack 3 or later on all Windows 2000 servers you plan to monitor. There is a known issue with Windows 2000 Service Pack 2. The Remote Registry Service has a memory leak that often causes SiteScope monitors for a remote Windows 2000 server with Service Pack 2 to work intermittently. For UNIX and Linux operating systems, perform the following prerequisite installation procedures before installing SiteScope: • Set the shell of the login account on the remote UNIX server to Bourne or tsch. SiteScope can run successfully under most popular UNIX shells. However, SiteScope communicates best with a remote UNIX server with the Bourne shell or tsch shell. • Resolve command permissions settings to monitor remote UNIX servers, if necessary. Note: It is recommended not to run SiteScope from the root account and not to configure SiteScope to use the root account to access remote servers. Installation Prerequisites 3-3
  • 41. Installing SiteScope HP Downloads Web Site Download a trial version of SiteScope from the following URL: www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport From the HP Support web site, navigate to PRODUCTS -> HP SITESCOPE SOFTWARE. To log in, enter your HP Passport user ID and password or register with the HP Software Downloads Center. Note: Most of the support areas require that you register as an HP Passport user and sign in. Many also require an active support contract. To find more information about support access levels, go to the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport/new_access_levels To register for an HP Passport ID, go to the following URL: http://www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport/passport-registration 3-4 HP Downloads Web Site
  • 42. Installing SiteScope Downloading SiteScope From the Technical Resources section, select HP SITESCOPE 9.5 EVALUATION Figure 3-1 SiteScope Evaluation Software Download Page Downloading SiteScope 3-5
  • 43. Installing SiteScope Installing SiteScope SiteScope for Windows is available as a single, self-extracting executable file from the HP software download web site. It is installed on a single server, and runs as a Windows process or service. To install SiteScope for Windows: 1. Click the SiteScope setup.exe program to start installation. The InstallShield Wizard for SiteScope appears. Click NEXT to begin the installation. The license agreement screen appears. Read the SiteScope License Agreement. 2. Select I ACCEPT to accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click NEXT to continue. The installation directory screen appears. 3. Accept the default directory location or click BROWSE to select another directory. The installation path must end with a folder named SiteScope. Do not enter any spaces in the installation path. After entering the new directory name, click NEXT to continue. The setup type screen appears. 4. Select the type that is suitable for your site. Click NEXT to continue. The port and e- mail definition screen appears. 5. Type the port number you want or accept the default port 8080. You can change the port later when you run the Configuration Utility. Type a different port if you get an error message after entering the port. 6. Type the e-mail address to send e-mail alerts to the SiteScope administrator. Click NEXT to continue. A screen for license number appears. 7. Type the license number for SiteScope. If you have an optional license, type that number in the second text box. It is not necessary to enter license information during the free evaluation period. Click NEXT to continue. A screen of summary information appears. 8. Check that the information is correct. Click NEXT to continue or BACK to return to previous screens to change your selections. The SiteScope installation process starts and an installation progress screen appears. 9. Click FINISH when the installation process is complete and a message about the successful installation is displayed. You are now ready to use SiteScope. Note that SiteScope for Solaris and Linux is available as a single, compressed archive file on the HP Software download web site. 3-6 Installing SiteScope
  • 44. Installing SiteScope SiteScope is installed on Solaris or Linux operating systems using the multi-platform InstallShield wizard, a command line mode, or console mode. Use the option for installing using command line mode when you are installing SiteScope on a remote server or do not have Xwindows or similar interface available. A 10-day demo license is used for this course. For additional licensing information, refer the students to the support Web site to request a license or to sales. Installing SiteScope 3-7
  • 45. Installing SiteScope Deployment Considerations Follow these guidelines for performance and security reasons: • Install SiteScope within the same domain as the system elements to be monitored. This is because SiteScope needs to frequently log on to various servers in the infrastructure. • Install SiteScope in the same subnet as the applicable network authentication service, such as Active Directory or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). • Do not install SiteScope in a location where a significant amount of the monitoring activity requires communication across a Wide Area Network (WAN). • Do not use SiteScope to monitor servers through a firewall. SiteScope licensing is not server-based, and you will need separate SiteScope installations for both sides of a firewall. Two or more separate SiteScope installations can be accessed simultaneously from a single workstation by using HTTP or HTTPS. More information on location considerations is provided in the advanced course. 3-8 Deployment Considerations
  • 46. Installing SiteScope Opening SiteScope Figure 3-2 SiteScope Launch Page After completing the installation, select the OPEN HP SITESCOPE link from the Windows start menu to view the SiteScope Administrative interface. From the OPEN SITESCOPE Web page, you have access to the SiteScope interface, links to tools for moving monitor configurations from previous SiteScope installations, and links to additional SiteScope resources. Opening SiteScope 3-9
  • 47. Installing SiteScope Launching the SiteScope Interface Figure 3-3 SiteScope Interface You can launch SiteScope from the SiteScope launch page or directly from a URL. The SiteScope interface is available at http://localhost:8080/SiteScope, where localhost is the IP address of your computer or the address of the machine on which SiteScope is installed. 3-10 Launching the SiteScope Interface
  • 48. Installing SiteScope Copying Monitor Configurations Figure 3-4 Copy Monitor SiteScope monitors are custom configured instances of monitor templates that automatically connect to and collect measurements from different systems and application components. You can copy an existing monitor and paste the copy into any monitor group in the SiteScope tree. Copying a monitor duplicates the monitor instance and all its configuration settings. To copy a monitor, perform the following steps: 1. On the left menu, select the monitor you want to copy. 2. Right-click the container in the left menu to display the container action menu and select COPY. 3. Select the monitor group node where you want the copy of the monitor to be created. 4. Right-click the container in the left menu to display the container action menu and select PASTE. SiteScope adds a copy of the monitor to the selected monitor group. Copying Monitor Configurations 3-11
  • 49. Installing SiteScope Using the SiteScope Setup Page to Copy Data Figure 3-5 SiteScope Setup Page From the SiteScope launch page, you can update your license information, modify the administrative email address, and launch the Copy Monitor Configuration utility by clicking Copy at the bottom of the page. The Copy Monitor Configuration utility helps to transfer monitor configuration data in bulk from one SiteScope installation to another. It is used when upgrading or simply migrating and moving away from a currently running instance of SiteScope to a new instance often in a different physical environment. You can copy configuration files manually to the new installation from an existing SiteScope implementation. Before copying files, stop the SiteScope processes. To use the Copy Monitor Configuration utility, perform the following steps: 3-12 Using the SiteScope Setup Page to Copy Data
  • 50. Installing SiteScope 1. Open the SiteScope setup page at http://localhost:8080/SiteScope/cgi/go.exe/SiteScope?page=setup, where localhost is the IP address of your computer. 2. On the setup page as shown in Figure 3-5, click COPY at the bottom portion of the page to display the COPY MONITOR CONFIGURATIONS FROM ANOTHER SITESCOPE page. Using the SiteScope Setup Page to Copy Data 3-13
  • 51. Installing SiteScope Copy Monitor Configuration Utility Figure 3-6 SiteScope Settings 3-14 Copy Monitor Configuration Utility
  • 52. Installing SiteScope From the COPY MONITOR CONFIGURATIONS FROM ANOTHER SITESCOPE page, specify the SiteScope settings: 1. Enter the host name or address of the server where the source instance of SiteScope is running in the REMOTE SITESCOPE SERVER ADDRESS AND PORT field. Include the port number that the source SiteScope is listening on. 2. Enter the administrator user name and password for source instance of SiteScope in the SITESCOPE ADMINISTRATOR USER NAME and SITESCOPE ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD fields. These fields are the user name and password configured in USER PREFERENCES on the remote SiteScope and not the user name and password to login to the remote server through the file system. If there is no administrator user defined for the source SiteScope, leave these fields blank. 3. Check the USE HTTPS check box, if you want to use the HTTPS secure protocol for data transfer. 4. Type the applicable connection information in the PROXY SERVER, PROXY SERVER USER NAME, and PROXY SERVER PASSWORD fields, if you want to use a proxy server to communicate with the source SiteScope. 5. Check the INTERNATIONAL VERSION check box, if this check box is checked in the source SiteScope. See the GENERAL PREFERENCES page for the status of the INTERNATIONAL VERSION check box. 6. Click COPY to display the COPY CONFIGURATION DATA FROM ANOTHER SITESCOPE INSTALLATION page. Copy Monitor Configuration Utility 3-15
  • 53. Installing SiteScope Confirming Copy Figure 3-7 Copy Confirmation In the COPY CONFIGURATION DATA FROM ANOTHER SITESCOPE INSTALLATION page, click COPY to start the copy operation. A progress display screen appears. The new SiteScope installation restarts and processes the copied configurations after successful copying. The monitor configuration data is transferred from one SiteScope installation to another. 3-16 Confirming Copy
  • 54. Installing SiteScope Configuration Tool Figure 3-8 Configuration Tool Beginning with SiteScope 8.5 there is a standalone configuration utility. You can run it as part of the installation process or independently. The configuration tool has the following capabilities: • Basic Configuration: The default port number can be modified. You may want to modify the default port setting for security reasons or to avoid conflict with existing applications. • Sizing: Sizing is used to optimize the performance of SiteScope by making the following changes in Windows Registry keys: – Java Virtual Machine (JVM) heap size: The value is changed from 256mb to 768mb. – Desktop heap size: The value is changed from 512mb to 2048mb. – Popup warnings: These messages are turned off. Configuration Tool 3-17
  • 55. Installing SiteScope • Export-Import: This function helps you during an upgrade. It is used to import and export SiteScope data, such as templates, logs, and so on. To access the configuration tool: 1. On the SiteScope server, select START > PROGRAMS > HP SITESCOPE > CONFIGURATION TOOL. The InstallShield Wizard appears. 2. Click NEXT to start the wizard. The three options are displayed on the screen. 3. Select the required option and make changes. The final dialog box appears with the status. 4. Click FINISH to complete the operation. 3-18 Configuration Tool
  • 56. Installing SiteScope Post-Installation Configuration The following are some post-installation configuration steps: • Enter the license information. • Specify the administrator's e-mail address, e-Mail Server, backup e-Mail server and the notification preferences. • Specify backup and logging preferences. • Add a login name and a password to the Administrator account. • Create user accounts or import the accounts from LDAP. Post-Installation Configuration 3-19
  • 57. Installing SiteScope Performing Post-Installation Tasks Figure 3-9 Preferences After installing SiteScope, perform the following tasks to change the default information provided during installation: 1. In the GENERAL PREFERENCES section, type your SiteScope license information. 2. In the MAIL PREFERENCES section, type the e-mail address for the administrator and SMTP mail server for SiteScope to use when sending alerts. 3. In the USERS PREFERENCES section, create a name and a password for the SiteScope Administrator account. This Administrator account is active when the product is installed. This account has full privileges to manage SiteScope and is used by all SiteScope users unless it is password protected. You can also create and configure multiple user accounts and specify their permissions and access privileges. 3-20 Performing Post-Installation Tasks
  • 58. Installing SiteScope Summary In this chapter, you learned: • SiteScope is supported on Windows, Solaris, and Linux platforms. • Resource requirements depend on the monitoring activity of the SiteScope server. • SiteScope installation file is available from WWW.HP.COM/GO/HPSOFTWARESUPPORT. • SiteScope cumulative patches are available from the HP Software support site. • Copy Monitor option duplicates the configuration settings for the monitor. • Copy Monitor Configuration utility copies monitor configurations to a new SiteScope installation. • The configuration tool is used to change the default server port, optimize the performance by tuning the JVM, and export and import SiteScope data. • Post-installation tasks include specifying the license, administrator e-mail address, and a user name and password. Summary 3-21
  • 59. Installing SiteScope Review Questions Answer the review questions in your book. setoN rotcurtsnI Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the end of the day, or beginning of the next day. The answers to the questions below will only be printed in the instructor book; the student book will only show blank lines after each question. 1. How much free hard disk space is recommended for SiteScope? 10GB of free hard disk space is recommended for SiteScope. ______________ 2. What operating systems can run SiteScope? SiteScope runs on Windows 2000/2003 server, Solaris 2.9, 2.10 and Redhat ES/AS Linux 3 or 4. _____________________________________________________ 3. From where can you download SiteScope? To download SiteScope, go to www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport. Download and install the installation file. After installing the file, download the latest cumulative patches from the HP Software support site. _____________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 4. How long does the unregistered software last? The unregistered software lasts for 10 days. ____________________________ 5. What are the capabilities of the Configuration tool? The Configuration tool can be used to change the port number, optimize the performance of SiteScope, and export and import user data.________________ _______________________________________________________________ 3-22 Review Questions
  • 60. Installing SiteScope Exercise: Downloading and Installing SiteScope setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Familiarize yourself with steps to install SiteScope. Specific Objectives At the end of this exercise, students will be able to do the following to install SiteScope: - Download and install SiteScope. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to install SiteScope. • Download the HP SiteScope evaluation software from www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport. • Install the HP SiteScope evaluation software using the default values. Exercise: Downloading and Installing SiteScope 3-23
  • 61. Installing SiteScope Part 1: Download and Install the SiteScope Installation File 1. Go to step 5 if the SiteScope installation files are located on the desktop. 2. Open the URL: www.hp.com/go/hpsoftwaresupport 3. Download the SITESCOPE 9.5 free 10-day trial software. 4. Click SAVE to save the file on the desktop. 5. Double-click the SiteScope setup.exe program saved on the desktop. 6. Select the default values as the installer progresses. 3-24 Exercise: Downloading and Installing SiteScope
  • 62. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Getting Familiar with the 4 SiteScope Interface setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose This chapter describes the SiteScope interface. It discusses the tabs available on the SiteScope interface, the SiteScope health monitors, and the tools used for troubleshooting in SiteScope. Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: • Access SiteScope user interface. • Explore the various tabs on the interface. • Explore the PREFERENCES interface. • Identify the purpose of the SiteScope Health monitors. • Identify the purpose of the SiteScope diagnostics tools. 4-1
  • 63. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Introduction to the SiteScope Interface Figure 4-1 SiteScope Interface The SiteScope interface has a design similar to HP Business Availability Center (BAC). This interface similarity makes cross-product navigation easier. The SiteScope interface has an explorer-style tree on the left representing a hierarchical view of configured groups, subgroups, and monitors. Contents and properties of the selected node are explored by navigating the respective tabs. The interface on the left has the MONITORS, VIEWS, and CATEGORIES tabs. The interface on the right has the DASHBOARD, PROPERTIES, CONTENTS, and LOG FILES tabs. Note: When SiteScope is first installed, you are logged in as an administrator with no password defined. Use the USERS PREFERENCES node to configure additional security if required. 4-2 Introduction to the SiteScope Interface
  • 64. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Exploring the Dashboard Tab Figure 4-2 Dashboard Tab The DASHBOARD tab displays a higher-level view of deployed monitors and their status. Depending on the node selection in the explorer tree you can view the monitors deployed globally, focus on a particular group, or look in details at a specific monitor. The status of each monitor is displayed through indicator lights. You can also view historical information about the status of a monitor in addition to being able to view the current status. Exploring the Dashboard Tab 4-3
  • 65. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Viewing Group Status Figure 4-3 Current Groups and Monitors The DASHBOARD tab enables you to view the STATUS of monitors and groups of monitors. In the STATUS column, the color of the indicator lights indicate the current status of the monitor groups, as follows: • Red: Indicates error status. • Yellow: Indicates warning status. • Green: Indicates OK status. 4-4 Viewing Group Status
  • 66. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Viewing Metric Level Status Figure 4-4 Metric Level Status Metric-level status is the status of an individual monitor counter. For instance the metric-level status of the "% packets that have reached their destination" counter of the PING monitor shown in Figure 4-4 is green, meaning that no packets have been lost. In the DASHBOARD tab, access the monitor by clicking its name to view the latest data reading and status information. If a group or a monitor is in error, explore the sub-tree of individual monitors and counters to detect the counter whose status indicates a problem and is propagating to the parent group or monitor. Viewing Metric Level Status 4-5
  • 67. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Dashboard Navigation Figure 4-5 Dashboard Navigation Groups may contain subgroups and individual monitors. The DASHBOARD tab enables you to view group details and information about the status and data reading of each monitor in the group. It is possible to organize groups and monitors in a hierarchical manner since groups act as organizational units for monitors and other groups. The design of the hierarchy should be a logical representation of the actual hierarchy of the monitored IT environment. Right-click any entity in the left panel to add subgroups, monitors, alerts, and reports. The right-click menu consists of options for configuring, running, creating, and deleting items. 4-6 Dashboard Navigation
  • 68. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Creating Favorite Views Figure 4-6 Favorite Views Favorite views are created for quick navigation. For example, use the sort and filter features to view only those monitors for which you are responsible. Then save this view as a favorite for quick retrieval at any later time. Figure 4-6 shows the ADD FAVORITE and DELETE FAVORITE buttons. Use these buttons to create favorite views of the information presented in the interface. Figure 4-6 also shows the different buttons that enable you to see the detailed view, icon view, child groups and monitors, or all descendant monitors. Use these buttons to customize the appearance of groups, subgroups, and monitors in the right pane of the SiteScope interface. Creating Favorite Views 4-7
  • 69. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Availability Status Figure 4-7 Monitor Availability Figure 4-7 illustrates the active monitor availability icons. Monitor availability is represented by the up and down arrows next to the monitor status icons. The availability status exists so that more information can be provided about a monitor that has reported a "no data" or "Unknown" status. Availability is defined as the ability of the monitor to connect to the remote systems and retrieve information. The following is a list of possible availability statuses: • GOOD: Indicates that a remote system is responding. • ERROR: SiteScope was unable to connect to the remote system. • WARNING: SiteScope has detected a possible connectivity problem with the system. • UNKNOWN: SiteScope was unable to determine the state of the connection. 4-8 Availability Status
  • 70. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Exploring the Contents and Properties Tabs The CONTENTS tab is used to define the containers and monitoring objects in SiteScope. Use the CONTENTS tab to add and edit groups, monitors, alerts, and reports. The PROPERTIES tab is used to configure properties of containers and monitoring objects. Use the PROPERTIES tab to perform the following tasks: • View configuration information for specific objects. • Edit the configuration information for groups, monitors, alerts, and reports. Exploring the Contents and Properties Tabs 4-9
  • 71. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Viewing the Contents Tab Figure 4-8 The Contents Tab The CONTENTS tab includes groups, monitors, alerts, and report information. Use this tab to view and edit existing object information or add new objects and configure them. Figure 4-8 illustrates the WINDOWS SERVERS group contents. • The GROUPS section shows the existing monitors and sub-groups of this group. • The ALERTS section shows the list of alerts configured for this group. • The REPORTS section shows the list of reports configured for this group. • The MONITORS section shows the list of monitors configured for this group. 4-10 Viewing the Contents Tab
  • 72. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Viewing the Properties Tab Figure 4-9 Properties Tab Use the PROPERTIES tab for a selected group to view its properties, such as the group name and any dependencies set for it. To edit the sections in the PROPERTIES tab, click EDIT. Use the EDIT interface to modify existing dependencies or create a new one. Using the DEPENDS ON option, you can make the running of the monitor dependent on the status of another monitor or monitor group. This can be used to prevent redundant alerting from multiple monitors that are monitoring different aspects of a single system. The CATEGORY SETTINGS section at the bottom of the page on the PROPERTIES tab contains category assignments helpful when sorting and filtering. Assigning a monitor or a group to a category provides the ability to group and view monitoring assets by their category. For instance, you can group your applications into the following categories: Development, Staging, and Production. Viewing the Properties Tab 4-11
  • 73. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Viewing Monitor Settings Figure 4-10 Monitor Settings Use the PROPERTIES tab for a selected monitor to display monitor details and settings, including the status, alerts, and threshold settings associated with a monitor. • The ENABLE/DISABLE MONITOR option enables or disables a monitor immediately. Disabling monitors prevents alerts from being generated. The disable feature is useful when you know a monitor target will be in error, such as a scheduled outage. • The ENABLE/DISABLE ALERTS option is useful when server maintenance or other activities are being performed that would logically result in errors for some monitors and cause unnecessary alerts to be generated. • The THRESHOLD SETTINGS option sets the conditions that determine the reported status of each monitor instance. The status result is based on the results or measurements returned by the monitor action on the target system. Status threshold criteria for monitor instances are set to one of three status conditions: ERROR IF, WARNING IF, and GOOD IF. 4-12 Viewing Monitor Settings
  • 74. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Global Replace Figure 4-11 Global Replace Tab The GLOBAL REPLACE functionality enables you to change and update configurations and definitions across the entire set of deployed groups and monitors. Launch the Global Search and Replace Wizard to perform a global replace operation. Global Replace 4-13
  • 75. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Performing Replace Operation To perform a global replace operation: 1. Access the GLOBAL REPLACE wizard using one of the following options: – Right-click the group, preferences, or monitor in the monitor tree to which you want to perform a global replace, and select GLOBAL REPLACE from the menu. OR – In the CONTENTS tab, click the GLOBAL REPLACE button for the object to which you want to perform a global replace. The SELECT TYPE page appears. All of the steps of the wizard are visible in the left-hand pane. 2. Select one of the options listed in the SELECT TYPE page. The wizard displays only those types of objects available for the selected node. Select only one object type for each global replace operation. 3. Click NEXT. The wizard analyzes the selection and displays the next page, as follows: – If you selected ALERT, GROUP or REPORT, the REPLACE MODE page appears. – If you selected ALERT ACTION, MONITOR, or PREFERENCES as the object type, the SELECT SUB TYPE page appears. Select the object subtypes for the global replace operation. Click NEXT. The REPLACE MODE page appears. 4. Select the REPLACE option and click NEXT. The CHOOSE CHANGES page appears. The wizard displays only the settings and properties that may be changed for the object type selected. Select the needed settings in the drop-down lists. 5. Click NEXT. The wizard displays the AFFECTED OBJECT page. The AFFECTED OBJECTS tree includes all objects matching the selection criteria. 6. Review the tree of the selected object. Click NEXT. The REVIEW SUMMARY page appears. The REVIEW SUMMARY list describes the objects selected to undergo global replace. 7. Verify that all changes in the REVIEW SUMMARY list are correct. Click FINISH. The global replace operation is performed, and the CHANGE RESULTS page appears. 8. The SUMMARY page reports the changes that were implemented successfully and those in which errors occurred. Click OK to close the wizard. 4-14 Performing Replace Operation
  • 76. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Exploring the Preferences Interface Figure 4-12 The Preferences Container The PREFERENCES container enables you to configure specific properties and settings related to functional areas of SiteScope. This includes defining profiles for connecting to other servers in the network, settings for connecting to e-mail, pager, and SNMP systems, schedule profiles, and user profiles. Exploring the Preferences Interface 4-15
  • 77. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface General Preferences Figure 4-13 General Preferences The GENERAL PREFERENCES option is used to perform various post-configuration tasks. Some of the more common ones are: • Enter standard SiteScope license keys. • Enter keys for optional monitor features. • Control display features. • Set security options. International Version setting needs to be enabled from the beginning of the implementation. This setting is required for double-byte characters. 4-16 General Preferences
  • 78. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Configuring Historical Data Tracking Figure 4-14 Dashboard Monitor History View Option The DASHBOARD MONITOR HISTORY VIEW area displays historical information about monitors, monitor groups, and alerts over the previous 24 hours. This information is useful when you need to refer to previous data to isolate the source of a problem. By default there is no historical data tracking enabled. The DASHBOARD MONITOR HISTORY VIEW option is configurable in the GENERAL PREFERENCES container in order to change the default behavior. Configuring Historical Data Tracking 4-17
  • 79. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Infrastructure Settings Preferences Figure 4-15 Infrastructure Settings Preferences The INFRASTRUCTURE SETTINGS PREFERENCES option is used to define the values of global settings that determine how SiteScope runs. Included are: • General Settings • Server Settings • Monitor Settings • Alert Settings • Persistency Settings • Classic UI Settings • Report Settings • Baseline Settings New in 9.5 to improve the usability of editing infrastructure setting preferences (master.config file) 4-18 Infrastructure Settings Preferences
  • 80. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Windows and UNIX Remote Preferences Figure 4-16 Windows and UNIX Remote Preferences The WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES and UNIX REMOTE PREFERENCES options are used to setup the connection properties, such as credentials and protocols, so that SiteScope can monitor systems and services running in remote environments. To enable SiteScope to monitor systems and services running on remote Windows and UNIX server systems you need to create a remote server entry: • Define an individual remote server connection profile for each server. • Set appropriate access privileges to permit SiteScope to access remote servers. • Test the connection to validate credentials and connectivity. Emphasize to students that server monitoring requires the use of appropriate credentials for connectivity and for retrieving metrics. SiS 9.5 introduces centralized credential management. Windows and UNIX Remote Preferences 4-19
  • 81. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Connection to a Remote Windows Server To establish a connection to a remote Windows server system: 1. Expand the PREFERENCES node and select the WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES node. 2. Click NEW WINDOWS SERVER. A configuration interface appears. 3. In the HOST field, type the host computer name or the host IP. 4. Configure the access to the remote server by entering one of the following options: – In the LOGIN and PASSWORD fields, type a login name and a password, respectively. OR – Select a credential profile from the list of CREDENTIALS. Note: If you select or enter a credential profile, you do not need to enter a login and password. A credential profile takes priority over login and password entries. 5. In the ADVANCED SETTINGS section, type secure connection information. 6. Click OK. The new connection icon appears on the left. Note: Select the UNIX REMOTE PREFERENCES node to establish connection to a remote UNIX server. You can test the remote server configuration that you just created. To test a remote server configuration: 1. Right-click the new connection icon. 2. Select TEST. A pop-up message displays the message whether the test connection succeeded or not. 4-20 Connection to a Remote Windows Server
  • 82. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Log Preferences Figure 4-17 Log Preferences The LOG PREFERENCES option is used to perform the following tasks: • Specify a retention period for log files. The default duration is 40 days. • Configure connectivity settings to export monitor data to an external database. – Database connection URL – Database user name and password – Backup database connection URL Log Preferences 4-21
  • 83. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Mail Preferences Figure 4-18 Mail Preferences The MAIL PREFERENCES option is used to define e-mail server settings and profiles for SiteScope e-mail alerts and status reports. The MAIL PREFERENCES node lets you specify the following for an e-mail recipient: • The name and e-mail address. • An optional template with which to create e-mails. • An optional schedule to specify the e-mail receipt timings. • An optional description. 4-22 Mail Preferences
  • 84. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Users Preferences Figure 4-19 Users Preferences The USERS PREFERENCES option lets you define and manage one or more user login profiles that control how others access SiteScope. To create a new user, you need to specify the following: • The login name and password for the user. • The LDAP server to which SiteScope connects if LDAP is used for authentication and the LDAP security principle. • The optional title for the user, which acts as a description. • Optional groups to restrict user access. Note: You cannot disable or delete the SiteScope administrator account. However, you can modify the administrator account to include a password. Users Preferences 4-23
  • 85. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Credential Preferences Figure 4-20 Credential Preferences The CREDENTIAL PREFERENCES option lets you define and configure centralized credential management for SiteScope resources. To create a new credential, you need to specify the following: • A unique display name for the credential. • The login name and password to connect to remote/account. • Optional domain name. • A description for the credential can be entered under ADVANCED SETTINGS. New in 9.5 4-24 Credential Preferences
  • 86. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Summary of Preferences Settings The options available on the PREFERENCES node are: • GENERAL PREFERENCES - Used to enter standard SiteScope license keys, license keys for optional monitor features, control SiteScope display options and features, and set SiteScope security options. • INFRASTRUCTURE SETTINGS PREFERENCES - Used to define global SiteScope settings • INTEGRATION PREFERENCES - Used to define preferences for HP Business Availability Center integration. • MICROSOFT WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES - Used to define and configure connectivity profiles for connecting to and monitoring remote Windows servers. • UNIX REMOTE PREFERENCES - Used to define and configure connectivity profiles for connecting to and monitoring remote UNIX/Linux servers. • LOG PREFERENCES - Used to select the period to maintain monitor data locally or configure connectivity settings for exporting monitor data to an external database. • MAIL PREFERENCES - Used to define e-mail settings for use with SiteScope e-mail alerts. • PAGER PREFERENCES are used to define pager profiles for SiteScope pager alerts. • SNMP TRAP PREFERENCES -Used to configure the communication with an external SNMP host or management console. • ABSOLUTE SCHEDULE PREFERENCES are used to define custom schedules to run monitors at specific times of the week. • RANGE SCHEDULE PREFERENCES are used to define custom schedules to disable monitors and alerts during a specific time period. • USERS PREFERENCES - Used to define and manage user login profiles. • CREDENTIAL PREFERENCES - Used to define and configure centralized credential management for SiteScope resources. Summary of Preferences Settings 4-25
  • 87. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Match Preferences with Descriptions Figure 4-21 Which Preference Would You Use? Match each of the listed descriptions with the appropriate preference. Answers: 1. C, 2. F, 3. A, 4. I, 5. B, 6. G, 7. D, 8. E, 9. J, 10. H setoN rotcurtsnI The slide for this page is an animated slide for discussion purpose. Use this slide as an opportunity to elicit student understanding (including misunderstandings) and support peer-teaching. Each mouse click will reveal the suggested answer. Answer: 1. C, LOG PREFERENCES are used to modify the retention period for monitoring data. 2. F, SNMP PREFERENCES are used to define settings and profiles SiteScope can use to send SNMP Trap alerts. 3. A, GENERAL PREFERENCES are used to set security options. 4. I, RANGE SCHEDULE PREFERENCES are used to define custom schedules to disable monitors and alerts during a specific time period. 5. B, WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES or UNIX REMOTE PREFERENCES are used to establish connection for a remote server. 6. G, DYNAMIC UPDATE PREFERENCES are used to configure SiteScope to query an external data source and create monitors for multiple hosts. 7. D, MAIL PREFERENCES are used to define e-mail server settings and profiles for SiteScope e-mail alerts and status reports. 8. E, PAGER PREFERENCES are used to define pager profiles for SiteScope pager alerts. 9. J, USERS PREFERENCES are used to define multiple user logon profiles. 10. H, ABSOLUTE SCHEDULE PREFERENCES are used to define custom schedules to run monitors at specific times of the week. 4-26 Match Preferences with Descriptions
  • 88. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Understanding Health Monitors SiteScope HEALTH is a special group of monitors that display information about the performance and availability of SiteScope itself. This information includes: • Monitoring server resource usage • Key processes • Monitor load • Integrity of key configuration files By default, the daily monitor logs record the SiteScope HEALTH monitoring data and let you create reports on SiteScope HEALTH performance. Use the HEALTH page to monitor the operability of SiteScope in real time. Understanding Health Monitors 4-27
  • 89. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Health Monitors Overview Figure 4-22 Health Monitors The HEALTH monitor group is displayed as a special health icon within the top-level SITESCOPE node. Click the HEALTH node to view the contents of the HEALTH monitor group. Expand the HEALTH node to view the types of HEALTH monitors. For each HEALTH monitor, click the PROPERTIES tab to view the items to add or remove. The following HEALTH monitor types are available under the HEALTH node: • BAC INTEGRATION STATISTICS. This monitor checks the system health of Business Availability Center (BAC). • HEALTH OF SITESCOPE SERVER. This monitor checks internal SiteScope processes and resources. • LOG EVENT CHECKER. This monitor checks for errors and warnings in the SiteScope error log. 4-28 Health Monitors Overview
  • 90. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface • MONITOR LOAD CHECKER: This monitor checks the number of monitors being run and waiting to run. Health Monitors Overview 4-29
  • 91. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Diagnostic Tools Figure 4-23 Diagnostics Tools SiteScope provides a number of utilities for building and testing monitors and exploring reported problems in the monitored environment. You can use these tools to preview the system response when configuring a particular monitor. Examples of "testable" monitor activities include validating network connectivity or verifying login authentication when accessing an external database or service. The categories of tools in SiteScope are: • Application diagnostic tools, such as DNS lookup, Database Connection, and FTP server. • Server diagnostics tools, such as Server Diagnostic tool, Network, Processes, and Services. • Advanced diagnostics tools, such as New Server, Event Log, and Performance Counter Test. 4-30 Diagnostic Tools
  • 92. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Summary In this chapter, you learned: • Favorite views save a particular combination of content and presentation in the interface. • The CONTENTS tab enables adding and managing subgroups, monitors, alerts, and reports to a group. • The PROPERTIES tab enables you to highlight an existing group node and view its properties such as the group name and any dependencies set for it. • The GLOBAL REPLACE tab enables you to update configurations across the entire monitoring infrastructure. • The PREFERENCES container enables you to set preferences and options so that SiteScope integrates with your network environment. • SiteScope health monitors display information about the performance and availability of SiteScope. • SiteScope provides diagnostic tools to diagnose issues and facilitate monitor configuration. Summary 4-31
  • 93. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Review Questions Answer the review questions in your book. setoN rotcurtsnI Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the end of the day. The answers to the questions below will be printed in the instructor book; the student book will show blank lines after each question. 1. What URL would you type in the address bar of a browser to open the new SiteScope interface? HTTP://LOCALHOST:8080/SITESCOPE __________________________________ 2. Which tabs are available on the target interface on the right? The target interface on the right has the DASHBOARD, CONTENTS, PROPERTIES, and LOG FILES tabs.___________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 3. What are the different colors of the indicator lights on the Dashboard tab and what do they signify? The indicator lights can be red, yellow, or green. Red indicates an error status when any monitor within a group is in error. Yellow indicates a warning status. Green indicates an OK status. _____________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 4. How do you identify the active monitor availability icons? The monitor availability icons are represented by the up and down arrows next to the monitor status icons. ____________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 5. What does the GLOBAL REPLACE functionality enable you to do? The GLOBAL REPLACE functionality enables you to change thresholds, logins and passwords, monitor name, and many other values across your entire set of groups and monitors within a SiteScope installation. ___________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 4-32 Review Questions
  • 94. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface _______________________________________________________________ 6. What is the purpose of health monitors? SiteScope HEALTH is a specially designed group of monitors that is used to monitor several key aspects of its own environment to help uncover monitor configuration problems as well as SiteScope server load. _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 7. What is the purpose of diagnostic tools? The SiteScope diagnostic tools are used to test the monitoring environment. This may include simply testing network connectivity or verifying login authentication for accessing an external database or service. _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ Review Questions 4-33
  • 95. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Exercise: Setting Windows Remote Preferences in SiteScope setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Become familiar with the steps to set up remote preferences for Windows in SiteScope. Specific Objectives At the end of this exercise, students should be able to set up remote preferences for Windows in SiteScope. To achieve this, students must: - Add a Windows server. - Test the Windows server. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to set up remote preferences for Windows in SiteScope. • Part 1: Add a Windows server. • Part 2: Test the Windows server. At the beginning of this exercise, create a test user account on the Training Server and provide the computer name, IP address, test user name, and password to the students. 4-34 Exercise: Setting Windows Remote Preferences in SiteScope
  • 96. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Part 1: Add a Windows Server 1. Open the SiteScope interface. 2. Under the PREFERENCES container, click MICROSOFT WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES. 3. In the CONTENTS tab on the MICROSOFT WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES page, click NEW MICROSOFT WINDOWS SERVER. The NEW MICROSOFT WINDOWS SERVER page appears in the right panel. 4. In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the HOST field, type the computer name or IP address of the training server. If you do not know the details for the training server, please ask the instructor. 5. In the LOGIN field, type the login name for the user account identified by the instructor. 6. In the PASSWORD field, type the password for the user account identified by the instructor. 7. In the NAME field, type the name TRAININGSVR. 8. In the METHOD list, select the method used to connect to the training server. The default value is NETBIOS. The applicable services must be enabled on the remote server. 9. In the REMOTE MACHINE ENCODING field, type the appropriate encoding. The default value is CP1252. 10. Click OK. Exercise: Setting Windows Remote Preferences in SiteScope 4-35
  • 97. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Part 2: Test the Windows Server 1. Expand the MICROSOFT WINDOWS REMOTE PREFERENCES container. 2. Right-click the TRAININGSVR node and then select TEST. A TEST PREFERENCE dialog box should appear with the message CONNECTION SUCCESSFUL. 3. Click CLOSE. 4-36 Exercise: Setting Windows Remote Preferences in SiteScope
  • 98. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Exercise: Setting Mail Preferences in SiteScope setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Become familiar with the steps to set up mail preferences in SiteScope. Specific Objectives At the end of this exercise, students should be able to set up mail preferences in SiteScope. To achieve this, students must: - Add an additional e-mail setting. - Add template and schedule. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to set up mail preferences in SiteScope. • Part 1: Add an additional e-mail setting. • Part 2: Add template and schedule. Exercise: Setting Mail Preferences in SiteScope 4-37
  • 99. Getting Familiar with the SiteScope Interface Part 1: Add an Additional E-Mail Setting 1. Open the SiteScope interface. 2. Under the PREFERENCES container, click MAIL PREFERENCES. 3. In the CONTENTS tab on the MAIL PREFERENCES page, click NEW E-MAIL RECIPIENT. The NEW E-MAIL RECIPIENT page appears in the right panel. 4. In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the NAME field, type your name as the e-mail recipient. 5. In the E-MAIL TO field, type your e-mail address as the recipient for messages and alerts. Part 2: Add Template and Schedule 1. In the ADVANCED SETTINGS section, from the TEMPLATE list, select the template you want to use while sending the e-mail alerts. 2. From the SCHEDULE list, select the schedule to specify when you want these e-mail settings to be enabled. 3. Click OK. 4-38 Exercise: Setting Mail Preferences in SiteScope
  • 100. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy SiteScope Monitoring Strategy 5 setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose This chapter explains the best practices for developing a grouping model, planning the monitoring strategy, and SiteScope deployment. Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: • Describe the best practice methodology for SiteScope monitoring. • Configure heartbeats and dependencies. • Use a best practice approach for developing a grouping model. • Use a best practice approach for planning a SiteScope deployment and when planning to monitor an IT environment. 5-1
  • 101. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Monitoring Methodology Figure 5-1 Monitoring Methodology Effective SiteScope deployments rely on a process-oriented approach with well defined milestones. Figure 5-1 shows the recommended sequence of steps to set up a monitoring environment with SiteScope. Walk through the SiteScope methodology. Tell a story or use a real-world example. Emphasize the iterative nature of some of the configuration activities, such as the alerting strategy. Here are the steps of the process: • Review the business environment and identify the critical elements that will be monitored. • Identify and configure the remote servers to be monitored. • Decide on a grouping strategy and create a high-level grouping model. • Decide on the alerting strategy and set up SiteScope alerts. • Refine the number and types of monitors and counters and populate the groups. 5-2 Monitoring Methodology
  • 102. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy • Identify the reporting requirements. • Set up SiteScope reports. • Review the SiteScope effectiveness periodically and make changes to the environment as needed. Monitoring Methodology 5-3
  • 103. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Introduction to the Grouping Model Within SiteScope, you can create any number of groups and subgroups of monitors. A well-designed grouping model maximizes coverage with effective alerting and informative reporting while minimizing maintenance. A poorly designed or ad hoc grouping strategy results in a disorganized and unmanageable grouping structure. It can cause problem events to go unnoticed. It can also generate an extreme number of alerts making it difficult to identify problems. As the number of monitored systems increases, the lack of a planning and strategy may cause the need for excessive maintenance and even result in ineffective reporting. To avoid these pitfalls, consider the following methods: • Implement heartbeats and dependencies • Practice a top-level grouping model • Leverage guidelines for creating an effective grouping model 5-4 Introduction to the Grouping Model
  • 104. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Heartbeats and Dependencies Heartbeat elements are key monitors that verify the availability of a business system or a resource. A heartbeat is a lightweight monitor that acts as an indicator of availability. For example, a ping monitor can indicate whether a server is up. Common candidates for heartbeat monitors are PORT and PING monitors. A dependency refers to the ability to control the execution of a monitor or a group of monitors based on the state of another monitor or a group of monitors. The purpose of a dependency is to execute a group of monitors or a single monitor only when the business system or resource they target is available thereby limiting the amount of work SiteScope performs. In this way dependencies help prevent a flood of monitor errors and alerts. To further explain dependencies consider the following example. A user wants to monitor CPU, disk space, and memory for a server. If these monitors execute against the server when it is not available and each triggers an alert, three alerts would be generated. To avoid this behavior, place the CPU, DISK SPACE, and MEMORY monitors in a group dependent on a ping monitor and make sure that the group executes only if the ping monitor returns an OK status. Thus, if the server is unavailable, the ping monitor will run, return a error, and generate only a single alert. The dependent group containing CPU, Disk Space, and Memory will not run and additional redundant alerts will not be generated. Heartbeats and Dependencies 5-5
  • 105. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Top-Level Grouping Model Example Figure 5-2 Example of Top-Level Grouping Model Figure 5-2 shows an example of a grouping model with three top-level groups: Application Monitors, Server Monitors, and Heartbeat Monitors. The Server Monitors group contains four subgroups for different types of servers. These subgroups contain individual monitors for the server and a child group for shared services. The child group contains the applicable monitors. The three top-level groups represent a logical organization of monitors implemented in the given SiteScope installation. These groups are organized as follows: • Application Monitors: Contains monitors and groups targeting the high-level business applications and services of the organization. • Server Monitors: Groups specific types of server resource monitors organized by platform or vendor. • Heartbeat Monitors: Contains key processes and services that indicate the availability and health of a larger set of systems and services. 5-6 Top-Level Grouping Model Example
  • 106. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Top-Level Grouping Model Advantages The top-level grouping model accomplishes the following: • Alerts are sent to the right system and business owners. • The SiteScope Dashboard is well organized and easy to navigate • Few top-level groups • Pyramid-like structure • Problem areas and root causes are identified more easily. • Easier incremental addition of groups and monitors. Top-Level Grouping Model Advantages 5-7
  • 107. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Grouping Guidelines While creating a grouping model, adhere to the following principles: • The model is extensible in the sense that it easily accommodates the addition of new groups and monitors. • The model represents logical parent-child relationships between the monitored assets. • The model implements a well-defined naming convention for groups, subgroups, monitors, and any other monitoring objects. • The complexity of the grouping hierarchy decreases when moving from the top level to lower levels. 5-8 Grouping Guidelines
  • 108. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Planning the Monitoring Strategy When planning the monitoring strategy for your IT infrastructure, consider the following: • What to monitor? – Monitor individual server components such as the CPU, the Memory, or the Disks. – Monitor individual software elements, such as all the applications running on a particular platform. – Monitor key services and processes such as the TNS Listener of an Oracle Database or the availability of a Network Interface. – Monitor transactions and business processes such as the ability of users to login to the Corporate Web Site of a company. • Determine the acceptable thresholds and what threshold represents a change in status? – The threshold is based on the nature of the system or business process you are monitoring. For instance, if you are monitoring a CPU, acceptable thresholds are 60%-90% meaning that a utilization of under 60% results in a "Good" status, anything above 60% but lower than 90% results in a "Warning" status and whenever the CPU get to above or over 90%, set its status to "Error". • How often must the system be checked? – Ensure the availability of mission critical information systems by checking regularly. • Avoid too high a frequency that overloads the system. For instance, there is no need to frequently check the size of disks of a system with low I/O activity. Set the frequency of the Disk Monitor to once every couple of hours. • Avoid too low a frequency that delays detection of problems. For instance, frequently check the responsiveness of your e-commerce web site since it is most likely critical to the profitability of the business you are monitoring. • What actions to take when an event is detected? Planning the Monitoring Strategy 5-9
  • 109. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy – Use SiteScope e-mail or pager alerts to send notification when an event threshold is triggered. This is the easiest and most common way of leveraging SiteScope alerts. – Use script alerts to take corrective actions. For instance, you can have a "Service Restart" batch script execute whenever you detect that the service being monitored is unresponsive or down. – Use SNMP traps to provide integration with external systems. This method can be used in order to provide an integration with other HP Software products or 3rd party systems such as Tivoli. The supported minimum frequency is 45 seconds. The exact frequency is dependent on the type of monitor. However, most monitors can be configured with a frequency of 5 to 15 minutes. 5-10 Planning the Monitoring Strategy
  • 110. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy SiteScope Server Sizing An important element of successful SiteScope monitoring is the sizing of the server on which SiteScope is deployed. To size a SiteScope server deployment determine the following: • Number of monitor instances that will execute simultaneously. • Average run frequency for each monitor. • Types of protocols and applications to be monitored. • Amount of monitor data to retain on the server for reporting. More information on sizing considerations is provided in the advanced course. Refer students to support and articles in the knowledge base for more information on sizing. Sizing is considered here for completeness and to introduce the trade-off between the number of monitors on a box versus frequency. A four-way with 2 to 4gb of RAM can support approximately 4000 monitors that are a mix of lightweight and heavy monitors. This is an approximate and is dependent on the frequency with which monitors run. If necessary, free-up resources by lengthening the frequency between the monitor runs. This allows more points per box running less frequently. SiteScope Server Sizing 5-11
  • 111. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Monitored Infrastructure Assessment A business system infrastructure assessment is recommended to identify the scope, deliverables, and constraints around which the monitor model needs to be developed. Follow these guidelines for performing business system infrastructure assessment: • Gather technical and business requirements. – Identify the business applications to be monitored. – Identify the servers and network devices that support the business applications. – Identify the heartbeat elements to be monitored. • Identify stakeholders and key deliverables for the monitoring activity. – Identify the reports to be generated. – Identify the alert actions to be taken. – Identify the receivers of alerts. – Identify the SiteScope users. – Identify stakeholders and the SiteScope elements they can access. • Identify constraints for the monitoring system. – Restrictions on protocols. Protocol restrictions impact the types of monitors available to the model. Network traffic restrictions impact the number of monitors and the frequency of monitoring. – User authentication requirements. – Network traffic restrictions. 5-12 Monitored Infrastructure Assessment
  • 112. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Summary In this chapter, you learned: • SiteScope deployment should be implemented as a well-defined sequence of planned milestones. • Heartbeat elements are key monitors that indicate the availability of a particular business system or resource. • Dependencies help prevent a flood of errors and redundant alerts. • A well-designed grouping model helps create new groups, facilitates navigation, and represents logical parent-child relationships. • When planning a monitoring strategy, identify the monitoring elements, the frequency of monitoring, and the action to be taken when an event is detected. Summary 5-13
  • 113. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy Review Questions Answer the review questions in your book. setoN rotcurtsnI Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the end of the day. The answers to the questions below will be printed in the instructor book; the student book will show blank lines after each question. 1. Give an example of a heartbeat monitor. A PING monitor can be a heartbeat monitor. ____________________________ 2. What is the advantage of making other monitors dependent on a heartbeat monitor? Making other monitors dependent on a heartbeat monitor prevents monitor error floods and alert floods. _____________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 3. What is a dependency? A dependency refers to the ability to control the execution of a monitor or a group of monitors based on the state of another monitor or a group of monitors. ____ _______________________________________________________________ 4. Which are the three top-level groups in SiteScope’s grouping model? Application Monitors, Server Monitors, and Heartbeat Monitors ____________ _______________________________________________________________ 5. List the guidelines for developing a grouping model. While creating a grouping model, ensure that the model is extensible to accommodate groups and monitors in the future, represents logical parent-child relationships, follows a single naming convention for both groups and subgroups, and the complexity of the grouping hierarchy decreases when moving from the top level to lower levels._______________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 5-14 Review Questions
  • 114. SiteScope Monitoring Strategy 6. List the steps for planning a monitoring strategy. When a planning a monitoring strategy, identify the monitoring elements, the threshold that represents a change in status, the frequency of monitoring, and the action to be taken when an event is detected.____________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 7. What are the key considerations for deploying SiteScope? The key considerations for deploying SiteScope are assessing the business system infrastructure, sizing the SiteScope server deployment, determining the network location and environment, and fine-tuning the Windows environment. _______ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ Review Questions 5-15
  • 116. Managing Groups and Monitors Managing Groups and Monitors 6 setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose This chapter explains how to create and configure groups and monitors, configure SiteScope with Business Availability Center (BAC), and use filters and Solution Templates in SiteScope. Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: • Navigate the SiteScope interface using the DASHBOARD tab. • Create and configure groups and monitors. • Acknowledge Monitor errors. • Use threshold settings and baselining. • Use filters. 6-1
  • 117. Managing Groups and Monitors Dashboard Views and Nodes Figure 6-1 Views and Nodes SiteScope collects real-time performance and availability metric data from infrastructure components being monitored such as servers, applications, processes, services, SNMP- enabled devices, etc. The SiteScope DASHBOARD contains the latest available group and monitor status and data readings. At the highest level, the SiteScope node, the DASHBOARD contains a list of groups, the status of each group, the time the status was last updated and an indicator of triggered alerts for the particular group. The data displayed in the DASHBOARD tab represents the context selected in the tree - the global SiteScope view, an individual group view, or a specific monitor. Figure 6-1 shows the SiteScope (global view) and the monitor nodes along with their Dashboard views. 6-2 Dashboard Views and Nodes
  • 118. Managing Groups and Monitors Building Groups Groups are analogous to folders. They act as containers for monitors and other groups. By creating hierarchies of groups and sub groups the user can organize related monitors so that the layout represents logical relationships existing in the monitored infrastructure. Groups are first added to the top-level SITESCOPE node and optionally within other groups to form a hierarchy. Working with Groups involves the following tasks: • Create a group. • Provide a name (Main Settings), and optionally, a description, a dependency and a dependency condition (Advanced Settings). • Configure the CONTENTS tab for the group. • Add monitors to the group and configure alerts. Building Groups 6-3
  • 119. Managing Groups and Monitors Creating a Group Figure 6-2 New Group To create a group, right-click the SITESCOPE node, and then select NEW GROUP. When you select NEW GROUP, a NEW SITESCOPE GROUP window appears. To specify details for a new group, do the following: 1. In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the GROUP NAME field, type a name for the group. 2. In the ADVANCED SETTINGS section: a) In the GROUP DESCRIPTION field, provide a description for the group. b) Create a dependency for the group. 3. Click OK. 6-4 Creating a Group
  • 120. Managing Groups and Monitors Configuring Group Contents Figure 6-3 Group Configurations Figure 6-3 shows the CONTENTS tab of the group that you just created. The buttons in the right panel are used to add monitors and make modifications to the group. Alternatively, you can right-click the group in the tree to make changes to the group. To add a new monitor to the group, click NEW MONITOR. To add a subgroup, click NEW GROUP. To create an alert to be triggered if there is an error, click NEW ALERT. You will learn about creating alerts in Chapter 7: Configuring Alerts. To set an automated management report or quick report to be e-mailed according to the mail settings, click NEW REPORT. You will learn about creating reports in Chapter 9: Generating Reports. Configuring Group Contents 6-5
  • 121. Managing Groups and Monitors Creating a Monitor Figure 6-4 New Monitor To add a new monitor to a SiteScope group, perform the following steps: 1. Select from the following options: – In the monitor tree, right-click the SiteScope group into which you want to add a monitor. From the menu, select NEW MONITOR. The NEW SITESCOPE MONITOR window appears. – Highlight the SiteScope group into which you want to add a monitor. On the CONTENTS tab, click NEW MONITOR. The NEW SITESCOPE MONITOR window appears. 2. From the alphabetical list, select the desired monitor. You can also choose to view only the monitors of a certain category type by selecting the desired monitor category from the Category list. 3. Select the type of monitor you want to add. The applicable ADD MONITOR window appears. 6-6 Creating a Monitor
  • 122. Managing Groups and Monitors 4. Type the configuration settings for the monitor. The MAIN, ADVANCED, and THRESHOLD SETTINGS vary from one monitor type to another. 5. Enable or disable the monitor as required. 6. Enable or disable the alerts associated with this monitor as required. 7. Select from the following options in HP BAC LOGGING: – DO NOT REPORT TO HP BUSINESS AVAILABILITY CENTER – REPORT EVERYTHING (ALL MONITORS AND ALL MEASUREMENTS): This option sends all monitor data to HP Business Availability Center each time that the monitor runs. – REPORT MONITOR LEVEL DATA (NO MEASUREMENTS). This option sends only monitor category, status string, and other basic data each time that the monitor runs. – REPORT MONITOR LEVEL DATA AND MEASUREMENTS WITH THRESHOLDS. This option sends monitor category, status string, as well as performance counter data for any counters that have been set with thresholds (for example, Error If, Warning If). The data is sent each time the monitor runs. – REPORT STATUS CHANGES (NO MEASUREMENTS). This option sends only monitor category, status string, and other basic data only when the monitor reports a change in status. 8. In the CATEGORY SETTINGS section, assign a category to the monitor. This is optional and is done only if there are any categories defined. 9. Click ADD. The monitor is added to the monitor tree. The monitors are ready to monitor other monitors in the network. Creating a Monitor 6-7
  • 123. Managing Groups and Monitors Monitor Types Figure 6-5 Monitor Types When you click NEW MONITOR or select NEW MONITOR from the right-click menu, an alphabetized list of monitor types appears in the right panel, as shown in Figure 6-5. You can also view monitors listed by category. To do this, use the drop down menu on the Category list box to filter the list by a specific category. SiteScope has over 100 built-in types of monitors that are used to collect metric data about different aspects of an IT infrastructure. These include monitors for server hardware, network services, operating systems, applications, and application components, to name a few. You can create instances of these monitor types and configure them to "point" to a specific physical element in the IT infrastructure. For instance, to monitor the CPU utilization on a server, select the CPU type monitor and set its "Server" attribute to address of the server. Some monitors are unlocked by the optional license. 6-8 Monitor Types
  • 124. Managing Groups and Monitors Modifying Monitor Settings To modify the settings for a monitor, select the monitor in the left tree and click the PROPERTIES tab in the right panel. The available sections in the PROPERTIES tab are: • MAIN SETTINGS • ADVANCED SETTINGS • ENABLE/DISABLE MONITOR • ENABLE/DISABLE ALERTS • THRESHOLD SETTINGS • CUSTOM PROPERTIES • HP BAC LOGGING • CATEGORY SETTINGS Modifying Monitor Settings 6-9
  • 125. Managing Groups and Monitors Modifying Main Settings Figure 6-6 Main Settings To modify a monitor’s configuration, click EDIT in the PROPERTIES tab for the monitor. Figure 6-6 shows the MAIN SETTINGS section of an example monitor of the PING monitor type. In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the EDIT SERVICE panel, you can edit the following settings: Name, Frequency of monitoring, Specific server to monitor, and, in the case of a "Service"-type monitor, the name of the service to be monitored. 6-10 Modifying Main Settings
  • 126. Managing Groups and Monitors Modifying Advanced Settings The ADVANCED SETTINGS section enables you to provide detailed specifications for the monitor. The following are key fields in this section: • SHOW RUN RESULTS ON UPDATE check box: Use this check box to run the monitor automatically whenever changes are made. • VERIFY ERROR check box: Use this check box to make the monitor rerun immediately if it returns an error status. This feature provides an accurate assessment for incidental errors by minimizing false positives. However, enabling this property adds a significant load to the SiteScope server. Enable this property only for troubleshooting or for the most critical monitors. • ERROR FREQUENCY field: Use this field to enable a monitor to run more frequently or less frequently if the monitor detects an error. The monitor reverts to its standard run interval when it returns to the OK state. • MONITOR SCHEDULE field: Use this field to select a schedule if you want the monitor to run only on certain days or on a fixed schedule. • DEPENDS ON field: Use this field to make the running of this monitor dependent on the status of another monitor. Modifying Advanced Settings 6-11
  • 127. Managing Groups and Monitors Editing Monitor Dependencies Figure 6-7 Monitor Dependencies The ADVANCED SETTINGS section enables you to set monitor dependencies. It is used to specify the following dependency settings: • DEPENDS ON tree: Enables you to make the running of the monitor being configured dependent on the status of another monitor or group. For instance, you can instruct SiteScope that the TNS Listener (key Oracle service) monitor is dependent on the port monitor checking the status of port "1521" (standard Oracle database port). • DEPENDS CONDITION list: Enables you to select the status category or condition of the DEPENDS ON monitor that ensures that the monitor, which is being configured, run normally. The monitor being configured runs normally as long as the monitor selected in the DEPENDS ON field reports the condition selected in this field. For instance, you can instruct SiteScope to run the TNS Listener monitor only if the port monitor checking port 1521 returns an OK status. 6-12 Editing Monitor Dependencies
  • 128. Managing Groups and Monitors • MONITOR DESCRIPTION field: Enables you to provide a monitor description. You can add HTML tags to the description for format and style. These descriptions help customized the look and feel of the application and act as in-line documentation describing the purpose and effect of the monitors being configured. • REPORT DESCRIPTION field: Enables you to clarify the role of a monitor by specifying descriptions such as Network Traffic or Main Server Response Time. This description is displayed on each bar chart and graph in management reports. Editing Monitor Dependencies 6-13
  • 129. Managing Groups and Monitors Enabling or Disabling a Monitor Figure 6-8 Enable or Disable a Monitor The ENABLE/DISABLE MONITOR section shown in Figure 6-8 is used to enable or disable a monitor temporarily or indefinitely. You can choose to disable the monitor immediately or for a time interval in the future. Although the monitor schedule remains in place, the monitor does not run for the duration that it is disabled. You can choose to temporarily disable a monitor if the monitor it depends on is in error. For instance, there would be no point in checking the availability of port 80 on the web server if the web server itself is down. Disabling a monitor indefinitely seriously impacts the effectiveness of system availability monitoring in complex environments. The disabled monitors are forgotten if buried in an infrequently viewed subgroup. It is recommended that you disable monitors for only a limited time. 6-14 Enabling or Disabling a Monitor
  • 130. Managing Groups and Monitors Enabling or Disabling Alerts Figure 6-9 Alert Enable or Disable The ENABLE/DISABLE ALERTS section shown in Figure 6-9, is used to enable and disable alert actions triggered by individual monitors or by groups. If one or more alerts are defined for a monitor, an expandable tree fragment is displayed. This tree lists all alerts of the monitor, which are relative to the hierarchy element to which the alert is assigned. For example, if a single alert is assigned to a monitor, the tree displays only the monitor and the alert. If a global alert and an alert for the monitor group are defined, the tree displays the SITESCOPE node and the group node along with the alert nodes for those elements. Enabling or Disabling Alerts 6-15
  • 131. Managing Groups and Monitors Understanding Threshold Settings Figure 6-10 Threshold Settings You use the THRESHOLD SETTINGS section to set logical conditions that determine the reported status of each monitor instance. The status is determined after comparing the monitor result to the threshold settings. For instance, if the CPU monitor status is configured as "Good" when the CPU utilization reads at 80% or lower, and the CPU monitor returns 30% utilization, then the monitor will report a “Good” status. The THRESHOLD SETTINGS section is used to customize the requirements for the GOOD, WARNING, and ERROR status definitions. Shown in Figure 6-10, we have the default status for the Ping Windows 2003 Server Monitor set to "Good." The status will turn to "Error" if the service does not respond to ping (no packets are returned from a ping request) and back to "Good" when the service is running (all packets are returned). 6-16 Understanding Threshold Settings
  • 132. Managing Groups and Monitors Using Baselines to Set Thresholds Figure 6-11 Baselining Instead of setting logic conditions manually in the THRESHOLD SETTINGS for each monitor instance, you can have SiteScope calculate thresholds for one or more monitor instances using a baseline. Baseline data is gathered from monitor performance metrics over a period of time and is used to provide a comparison for establishing acceptable or expected threshold ranges. Baselines enable you to understand how your applications typically perform and determine whether a performance problem is an isolated incident or a sign of a significant downward performance trend. To enable SiteScope to begin calculating baselines, right-click the SiteScope node container, a group, or a monitor, and select BASELINING > CALCULATE. You can select the schedule ranges used for collecting baseline threshold data. This enables you to restrict to certain days or hours of the week the periods during which SiteScope collects data for the baseline calculation. For example, you may want the monitor status to be based on results gathered during peak business hours only. The baseline engine calculates the baseline for each schedule using measurements collected from the monitors during the data collection period. Using Baselines to Set Thresholds 6-17
  • 133. Managing Groups and Monitors Baseline Settings Figure 6-12 Baseline Settings You can view and define the values of global SiteScope baseline settings in INFRASTRUCTURE SETTINGS PREFERENCES. This includes calculation and activation priority settings, the number of days of historical data to include in baseline calculations, the minimum number of days and samples required to calculate the baseline, and the offset for calculating the error boundary. Note: Before the baseline is calculated, the monitor should be enabled and allowed to run for a period long enough for SiteScope to accumulate sufficient data to calculate the baseline. This period depends on the BASELINE SETTINGS. 6-18 Baseline Settings
  • 134. Managing Groups and Monitors Reviewing the Baseline Data Figure 6-13 Review and Activate the Baselines Once the baseline calculations have been completed, you can review the summary of calculated monitors and baseline data by right-clicking the SiteScope node, a group, or a monitor and select BASELINING > REVIEW & ACTIVATE. The REVIEW & ACTIVATE dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-13, includes the SiteScope monitor name and the date on which the baseline was calculated. The ERROR STATUS REDUCTION and WARNING STATUS REDUCTION columns display the reduction in the number of error or warning statuses for a monitor if the baseline threshold were applied. For example, suppose you manually configure the threshold status for CPU Utilization to Error if >= 65% and there are 5 error statuses for the CPU monitor (of which 3 errors Reviewing the Baseline Data 6-19
  • 135. Managing Groups and Monitors are for data samples between 65%-70%, and 2 errors for above 70%). If you have SiteScope calculate the threshold using a baseline and the threshold is set to Error if >= 70%, the ERROR STATUS REDUCTION would be 3. The VIEW GRAPHS link displays a graphical representation of baseline data for all the measurements of the monitor, as shown in Figure 6-14 Figure 6-14 Threshold Graph The graph shows: • The current warning and error thresholds. • The baseline warning and error thresholds. • Historic data of all baseline-related monitor measurements over a 24-hour time period (from 00:00-23:59). Activate the Baseline Settings To activate the baseline settings, select the monitors for which you want to set thresholds using the calculated baseline and click ACTIVATE. Note: If you want to revert to the current monitor configuration, select the option to save the current monitor configuration before activating the baseline configuration. 6-20 Reviewing the Baseline Data
  • 136. Managing Groups and Monitors Baseline Status Figure 6-15 Baseline Status To create a report showing information about each monitor in the selected context, including each monitor's baseline status and baseline status description, right-click the SiteScope node, a group, or a monitor and select BASELINING > STATUS REPORT. You can also track the baseline status for a monitor in the monitor's Main Settings. See Figure 6-16. Baseline Status 6-21
  • 137. Managing Groups and Monitors Modifying Baseline Thresholds Figure 6-16 Modifying Baseline Thresholds In the THRESHOLD SETTINGS, you can view the baseline thresholds and manually fine- tune the thresholds by changing the percentile value from which the threshold value is derived. As shown in Figure 6-16, the ERROR IF PERCENT USED (%) threshold value is 73.22 (non-editable) and the percentile value is 98. To change the threshold value, you must change the percentile value from which the threshold value is derived. To help you understand what the new threshold value will be after you change the percentile value, click the Percentiles Table icon to open the percentile table that shows the threshold value mapped to each percentile range. Percentiles Table icon 6-22 Modifying Baseline Thresholds
  • 138. Managing Groups and Monitors Acknowledging an Error in Monitoring Figure 6-17 Error Acknowledgement If a monitor displays an error status, the administrator can acknowledge the error to clear the red status from the DASHBOARD and indicate that an action has been taken to investigate and resolve the problem. The DASHBOARD view for a monitor contains a small downward arrow (drop down menu) next to the monitor name. To acknowledge the error, select ADD ACKNOWLEDGEMENT from the drop down menu. An ACKNOWLEDGE dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 6-18. The ACKNOWLEDGE dialog box is used to: • Add a comment for the acknowledgement. • Disable alerts for a specified time period. Acknowledging an Error in Monitoring 6-23
  • 139. Managing Groups and Monitors • Disable alerts based on a one-time schedule. • Undo a one-time schedule. • Add a description for a disabled alert and view the acknowledgement log. Figure 6-18 Acknowledge Window 6-24 Acknowledging an Error in Monitoring
  • 140. Managing Groups and Monitors Modifying an Acknowledgement Figure 6-19 Acknowledgement Modification When you click ACKNOWLEDGE, the ACKNOWLEDGE WINDOW closes and the DASHBOARD view appears, as shown in Figure 6-19. Move the mouse pointer over the check mark in the Acknowledged column to check the acknowledgement status for a monitor. A tool tip is displayed that indicates the acknowledgement status. Click the drop down menu adjacent to the monitor name to edit or delete the acknowledgement. SiteScope keeps a record of when the problem was acknowledged, what actions have been taken, and by which user. In the figure, the check box shows that the monitor was acknowledged by the Administrator. Modifying an Acknowledgement 6-25
  • 141. Managing Groups and Monitors Filter Icon Figure 6-20 Filter Icon DASHBOARD filters enable you to customize the content of the information displayed in the DASHBOARD. Filters are very useful in complex group and monitor implementations when searching for particular monitor types or statuses. For example, you may want to view only the monitors that are in a Warning state or only those that are in Error. Figure 6-20 shows the FILTER icon on the far right of the DASHBOARD view. 6-26 Filter Icon
  • 142. Managing Groups and Monitors Filtering Views in SiteScope Figure 6-21 Filter Selection Filters are used to specify the criteria to display monitors in the DASHBOARD view to generate a list of monitors meeting certain search condition. To display the DASHBOARD FILTER view, as shown in Figure 6-21, click the FILTER icon in the DASHBOARD view. This interface lets you define filtering settings. The most common filters types are the following: • MONITOR TYPE lets you filter monitors using monitor type. • STATUS lets you select the status for the filter. • ACKNOWLEDGED lets you filter based on whether the alerts have been acknowledged. Filtering Views in SiteScope 6-27
  • 143. Managing Groups and Monitors Moving Objects Figure 6-22 Object Copy When working with SiteScope you can move objects such as groups, monitors, alerts, and reports in the explorer tree. To move an object in the explorer tree, you need to: • Copy the object. • Paste the object. • Delete the original object. To copy an object, right-click the object and select COPY. To paste an object, right-click the target group and select PASTE. To delete an object, right-click the original object and select DELETE. A confirmation window appears. Click OK to delete the object. 6-28 Moving Objects
  • 144. Managing Groups and Monitors Summary In this chapter, you learned: • The acknowledgement feature in the SiteScope DASHBOARD view enables you to acknowledge monitor errors. • The CONTENTS tab enables you to create new groups, monitors, alerts, and reports. • The PROPERTIES tab enables you to modify monitor, alert, and report configurations. • Threshold settings can set logical conditions for a monitor and baselining can be used to set dynamic thresholds. Summary 6-29
  • 145. Managing Groups and Monitors Review Questions Answer the review questions in your book. setoN rotcurtsnI Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the end of the day. The answers to the questions below will be printed in the instructor book; the student book will show blank lines after each question. 1. Where can you change the frequency of a monitor? The frequency of a monitor can be changed in the MAIN SETTINGS section in the PROPERTIES tab of the monitor. ______________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 2. Which tab enables you to add a new monitor to a group? A new monitor can be added to a group in the CONTENTS tab. ______________ 3. How can you temporarily disable a monitor? A monitor can be temporarily disabled in the ENABLE/DISABLE MONITOR section in the PROPERTIES tab. _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 4. How can you move a monitor in the left tree of the SiteScope interface? To move a monitor, use the right-click menu to copy the monitor, paste it to a new location, and delete the original monitor._______________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 5. What is the FILTER icon used for? The FILTER icon enables customization of the display information. For example, you may use the FILTER icon to see only those monitors that are in warning state. _______________________________________________________________ 6-30 Review Questions
  • 146. Managing Groups and Monitors Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Familiarize yourself with the steps to create and test a new simple monitor. Specific Objectives At the end of this exercise, students should be able to do the following to create and test a new simple monitor: - Create a new group. - Create a new SERVICE monitor. - Test the monitor. Considerations In this exercise, students are requested to stop the Messenger service. Ensure that classroom computers have the Messenger service. If not, investigate the services on the student training computers to find one or two services common to all classroom machines that do not disable the computer if stopped. Windows Time, Themes, Task Scheduler are possible candidates. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to create and test a new monitor. • Part 1: Create a new group. • Part 2: Create a new SERVICE monitor. • Part 3: Test the SERVICE monitor. Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor 6-31
  • 147. Managing Groups and Monitors Part 1: Create a New Group 1. Right-click the SITESCOPE node container. 2. Select NEW GROUP. 3. In the GROUP NAME field, type a name for the group and click OK. 6-32 Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor
  • 148. Managing Groups and Monitors Part 2: Create a New Service Monitor Note: Go to the CONTROL PANEL ->ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS directory on your test system. Locate the services that are running on the system (whose status is STARTED). Choose a service to monitor, such as MESSENGER, DHCP, or HTTP. For the purpose of this lab, the MESSENGER service is used. 1. Right-click the new group that you created and select NEW MONITOR. 2. In the NEW SITESCOPE MONITOR section, click SERVICE. 3. In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the NAME field, type a name for the monitor. 4. In the FREQUENCY field, set the frequency to 30 seconds. 5. From the SYSTEM SERVICES list, select MESSENGER. 6. Click OK. The RUN dialog box appears. 7. Click CLOSE to close the dialog box. Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor 6-33
  • 149. Managing Groups and Monitors Part 3: Test the Service Monitor 1. Right-click the new monitor and click RUN. The RUN dialog box appears, showing the STATUS as GOOD. 2. From ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS > SERVICES in CONTROL PANEL, stop the service temporarily. 3. Repeat step 1. The RUN dialog box appears, showing the STATUS as ERROR. 4. Restart the service from ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS > SERVICES. 5. Repeat step 1. The RUN dialog box appears, showing the STATUS as GOOD. 6-34 Exercise: Creating and Testing a New Monitor
  • 150. Configuring Alerts Configuring Alerts 7 setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose This chapter describes how to configure alerts in SiteScope. It discusses identification of alerting strategies, how to use the LOG FILES tab, and recovery scripts. Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: • Define and configure alerts. • Identify the purpose of alert filters. • View alert logs. 7-1
  • 151. Configuring Alerts Defining an Alert SiteScope alerts are notification actions triggered when there is a change in the monitor status. SiteScope alerts are configured for individual monitors or group of monitors. The SiteScope DASHBOARD indicates the existence of configured alerts with a small red triangle icon to the right of each group or monitor. The icon signifies that one or more alerts have been configured for that particular group or monitor. A SiteScope monitor status may change from GOOD to ERROR if the monitored component experiences a failure or returns a data reading which is classified as ERROR according to the thresholds being setup. For instance, the CPU monitor's status may change to ERROR if the CPU utilization climbs to 80% or higher. In addition to email and pager alerts there are also advanced alerts. A special case of alert is the Script Alert. The SCRIPT alert can respond to problems and automatically initiate recovery scripts. You can configure the SCRIPT alert to execute a command to restart a server or a service which appears to be "hung". SCRIPT alert is covered later in the chapter. 7-2 Defining an Alert
  • 152. Configuring Alerts Types of Alerts • Database alerts can forward system fault data and other status information to any SQL-compliant database. • Disable or Enable Monitors alerts can turn on or turn off the triggering of alerts for monitors. This is useful for times when server maintenance or other activities are being performed that would logically result in errors for some monitors and cause unnecessary alerts to be generated. • Email alerts forward event notifications from SiteScope to a designated e-mail address. • Log Event alerts can be used to extend the types of events that are logged to a Windows Application Event Log. This provides a way to forward event data to log query systems that may not normally be logged by the Windows operating system. • Pager alerts forward event notifications from SiteScope to designated electronic pagers. • Post alerts use the Common Gateway Interface protocol to forward POST data to a CGI enabled program. This can be used to forward event data to CGI script on another server that is a front-end for a trouble ticket system or reporting database. This alert type also provides a way of sending alert information through a firewall using HTTP or HTTPS without having to make other security changes. • Script alerts can automatically initiate recovery scripts. You can configure a Script alert to execute a command to restart a server or a service. • SMS alerts are designed to transmit the name of the SiteScope monitor that has reported an event condition and the status of that monitor only in the content of the message. • SNMP Trap alerts forward event data from any type of SiteScope monitor to an SNMP enabled host or management system. This means that SiteScope can be used to monitor and report events for applications and systems that do not have their own SNMP agent. For example, this can be used to send measurement data from a SiteScope Windows Performance Counter based monitor type or a URL monitor in the form of an SNMP trap. • Sound alerts play a specific audio file when an alert is generated. Types of Alerts 7-3
  • 153. Configuring Alerts Preventing Alert Floods Figure 7-1 Alert Floods Heartbeat elements are services that indicate the availability of a particular business system or resource. They are used to set dependencies in the IT infrastructure. A good monitoring and alerting strategy minimizes monitor error floods and alert floods. For example, consider the model in Figure 7-1. In this model, a Heartbeat monitor pings the Oracle server. Also, a group of Oracle stats are dependent on the Oracle server ping monitor, which is the Heartbeat monitor. You can set up a dependency relationship such that the Oracle stats group runs only if the ping monitor returns an OK status. Therefore, if there are 50 alerts associated with various Oracle stats, and one alert associated with the Oracle Heartbeat, in the event of an error, you receive only one alert, which is for the Heartbeat monitor. 7-4 Preventing Alert Floods
  • 154. Configuring Alerts Configuring Alerts Alerts can be configured for an individual monitor or a group of monitors. By default, whenever a new monitor is created, no alerts are configured. To configure alerts, you need to go through the process of creating alerts using the Alert Actions Wizard. After alerts are created, the alerts can be edited and refined further through the addition of filters. To view the alerts configured for a particular group or monitor, access the alert icon. Configuring Alerts 7-5
  • 155. Configuring Alerts The Alert Icon Figure 7-2 The Alert Icon To view the alerts that are configured for a monitor, highlight the monitor. The absence of an alert icon indicates that there are no alerts for that monitor. Figure 7-2 shows that an alert exists under the monitor entry on the left. The right-click options let you edit, copy, delete, and test the alert. 7-6 The Alert Icon
  • 156. Configuring Alerts Adding New Alerts To create a new alert, do the following: 1. In the explorer tree, select the SiteScope group or monitor with which you want to associate the alert definition. Right-click to select the NEW ALERT menu option or, alternatively, display the CONTENTS tab from the right panel view menu. or If you are inside the CONTENTS tab, at the top of the CONTENTS view or at the bottom of the ALERTS section of the CONTENTS area, click the NEW ALERT button. Alternately, you can right-click the container in the left menu to display the container action menu and select NEW ALERT. The ADD ALERT selection page is displayed in the content panel. 2. The New Alert window displays. From the New Alert window, enter a name for the alert that you want to create. 3. Click ADD ACTION to open the Alert Action Wizard to create actions for the alert. Adding New Alerts 7-7
  • 157. Configuring Alerts Alert Action Wizard: Step 1 Figure 7-3 Alert Action Wizard: Step 1 Select the type of alert action that you want to create from the list of possible alert types. For a description of alert types, see “Types of Alerts” on page 7-3. 7-8 Alert Action Wizard: Step 1
  • 158. Configuring Alerts Alert Action Wizard: Step 2 Figure 7-4 Alert Action Wizard: Step 2 Step 2 of the Alert Action Wizard requires you to define the actions that should be taken when an alert is generated. For example, in Figure 7-4, the email alert action type requires you to enter the names and email adresses associated with the people who should receive the email alert when a monitor or group’s status changes. Select the Mark this action to close alert option to close the alert. When the status changes and the alert trigger condition is no longer true, this action closes the alert and sends a close notification by adding the word Close to the message sent. Alert Action Wizard: Step 2 7-9
  • 159. Configuring Alerts Alert Action Wizard: Step 3 Figure 7-5 Alert Action Wizard: Step 3 TRIGGER - This category is used to select the monitor status category that should be used to trigger the alert action. Alerts are triggered when the monitor status changes from one state to another. The options are: • Error. Alerts are triggered if the monitor was previously reporting a status of Good. • Good. Alerts are triggered if the monitor was previously reporting a status of Error. • Unavailable. Alerts are triggered if the monitored machine was previously available and is no longer. • Warning. Alerts are triggered if the monitor was previously reporting a status of Good. 7-10 Alert Action Wizard: Step 3
  • 160. Configuring Alerts Alert Action Wizard: Step 4 Figure 7-6 Alert Action Wizard: Step 4 TRIGGER SETTINGS – This option is used to select the number of times the applicable monitor status condition should be met before action is dispatched. The default is to trigger the alert ONCE, AFTER CONDITION OCCURS EXACTLY 1 TIMES. The TRIGGER SETTINGS options are as follows, depending on the ALERT CATEGORY selected: – ESCALATE, AFTER ACTION OCCURRED EXACTLY N TIMES – ALWAYS, AFTER THE CONDITION HAS OCCURRED AT LEAST N TIMES – ONCE, AFTER THE CONDITION OCCURS EXACTLY N TIMES – INITIALLY AFTER X TIMES, AND REPEAT EVERY Y TIMES AFTERWARDS – ONCE, AFTER X GROUP ERRORS – ONCE, AFTER ALL MONITORS IN THIS GROUP ARE IN ERROR Alert Action Wizard: Step 4 7-11
  • 161. Configuring Alerts Adding Multiple Actions to an Alert Figure 7-7 Multiple Alert Actions You can create multiple alert actions for an alert scheme. For example, you can create an alert action to send a sound alert and another alert action to send an e-mail alert. Both are sent when the alert is triggered. You can also set different schedules for the different actions within the same alert definition. For example, you can schedule an e-mail alert action to be sent during regular working hours and an SMS alert action for evening and night hours. Both are triggered by the same change in condition but are sent at different times, depending on when the alert is triggered. You can also make one alert action dependent on another alert action. This enables you to instruct SiteScope to send one type of alert when the trigger condition is first met and send another type of alert only when the first type of alert has been sent a number of times. Creating alert actions for an alert enables you to copy those alert actions into other monitors or groups for use by other alerts. To use alert actions for other alerts, you must copy the alert and paste it into another monitor or group. All the alert actions for the alert are copied into the new alert. You can then edit the alert to be triggered for the new target monitor or group. 7-12 Adding Multiple Actions to an Alert
  • 162. Configuring Alerts Setting Filters Figure 7-8 Filter Settings Alert filters define the scope of the alert target. The FILTER SETTINGS section provides the following filtering options: • NAME MATCH - Only alert for monitors with a name matching the specified value. • STATUS MATCH - Only alert for monitors with a status matching the specified value. • MONITOR TYPE MATCH - Only alert for monitors of the specified type. Note that the NAME MATCH and STATUS MATCH fields accept REGULAR EXPRESSIONS. Figure 7-8 shows the FILTERING SETTINGS options, where you select a monitor type alert filter to limit the alert action. In the CATEGORY SETTINGS section, you can use the CATEGORY attribute to assign an alert to an already defined category. The ADVANCED SETTINGS section enables you to provide a thorough description of the alert. This description is available only while you edit an alert or view alert properties. Setting Filters 7-13
  • 163. Configuring Alerts Viewing Alert Logs Figure 7-9 Alert Logs SiteScope maintains log files that are useful for: • Understanding performance issues • Troubleshooting monitor and alert problems • Reviewing SiteScope management actions You can access the SiteScope log files in the LOG FILES tab. The LOG FILES tab is available only on the SITESCOPE root node and the HEALTH node in the monitor tree. Click the log type to view the log. Alert logs record alert information whenever SiteScope generates an alert. This can be used to troubleshoot alert actions and to confirm that alerts were sent. 7-14 Viewing Alert Logs
  • 164. Configuring Alerts Summary In this chapter, you learned: • SiteScope supports the following types of alerts: – E-MAIL, PAGER, DATABASE, DISABLE OR ENABLE MONITORS, LOG EVENT, POST, SMS, SNMP TRAP, SCRIPT, and SOUND • SiteScope alerts are notification actions triggered when there is a change in the status of a monitor. • You can set detailed alert parameters, such as the number of times it should be triggered and when it should be stopped. • Alert logs record alert information whenever SiteScope generates an alert. This can be used to troubleshoot alert actions and to confirm that alerts were sent. Summary 7-15
  • 165. Configuring Alerts Review Questions Answer the review questions in your book. setoN rotcurtsnI Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the end of the day. 1. What are SiteScope alerts? SiteScope alerts are notification actions triggered when monitored conditions match the alert definition. Alerts send notification of events or changes in status of an element or a system in the infrastructure._______________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 2. List the types of alerts provided by SiteScope. SiteScope provides the following types of alerts: DATABASE, DISABLE OR ENABLE MONITORS, E-MAIL, LOG EVENT, PAGER, POST, SMS, SNMP TRAP, SCRIPT, and SOUND. _________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 3. What does a red triangle to the right of each entry on the screen imply? The red triangle indicates that one or more alerts have been configured for that entry.___________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 4. What is the purpose of the FILTER SETTINGS option? The FILTER SETTINGS option is used to define an alert and apply filters to it so that only certain monitors within the selected list trigger the alert. ______________ _______________________________________________________________ 5. What are the steps to view ALERT LOG in SiteScope? 7-16 Review Questions
  • 166. Configuring Alerts Click the LOG FILES tab to access the log files. The LOG FILES tab is available only on the SITESCOPE root node and the HEALTH node in the monitor tree. Click ALERT LOG to view the alert logs. __________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ Review Questions 7-17
  • 167. Configuring Alerts Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Become familiar with the steps to create and test a sound alert in SiteScope. Specific Objectives At the end of this exercise, students should be able to do the following to create and test a sound alert in SiteScope: - Use the SERVICE monitor for the MESSENGER service that was created in the previous chapter exercise. - Add a SOUND alert for the monitor. - Test the SOUND alert. This exercise familiarizes you with steps to create a sound alert in SiteScope. • Part 1: Use the SERVICE monitor for the MESSENGER service (or another service) that was created in the exercise from the previous chapter. • Part 2: Add a SOUND alert for the monitor. • Part 3: Test the SOUND alert. 7-18 Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert
  • 168. Configuring Alerts Part 1: Use a Service Monitor for a Started Service Use the Service Monitor that you you created in the exercise from the previous chapter. Note: View ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS -> SERVICES in CONTROL PANEL to ensure that the MESSENGER service (or other service that you choose to monitor) is running on your system. Be sure to choose a service that can be stopped without causing problems on the system. Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert 7-19
  • 169. Configuring Alerts Part 2: Add a Sound Alert for the Monitor 1. Right-click the monitor that you created and select NEW ALERT. The NEW ALERT screen appears. 2. In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the NAME field, type a name for the alert. 3. Click ADD ACTION. The Action Alert Wizard opens. 4. From the ACTION TYPE screen , in the ACTION NAME field, type a name for the action, select SOUND, and then click NEXT. 5. From the ACTION TYPE SETTINGS screen, select the type of sound file to be played, and then click NEXT. 6. From the TRIGGER screen, select ERROR, and then click NEXT. 7. From the TRIGGER SETTINGS screen, select the desired frequency of the sound alert when an error occurs. 8. Click FINISH. 9. In the NEW ALERT screen, verify the information in the ALERT ACTIONS and then click OK. 7-20 Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert
  • 170. Configuring Alerts Part 3: Test the Sound Alert 1. Stop the MESSENGER service (or other service that is being monitored). 2. View the status of the alert. It shows an error. You should hear the sound alert that you had set above. 3. Restart the service and view the status again. The service displays OK status and plays the sound alert. Exercise: Creating and Testing a Sound Alert 7-21
  • 171. Configuring Alerts Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Become familiar with the steps to restart a service that is down in SiteScope. Specific Objectives At the end of this exercise, students should be able to do the following to restart a service that is down in SiteScope: - Create a group. - Create a script to start the PRINT SPOOLER service. - Create a SERVICE monitor for the PRINT SPOOLER service. - Add a SCRIPT alert to the SERVICE monitor. - Test the SCRIPT alert. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to restart a service that is down in SiteScope. • Part 1: Create a new group named SPOOLER. • Part 2: Create a script to start the PRINT SPOOLER service. • Part 3: Create a SERVICE monitor for the PRINT SPOOLER service. • Part 4: Add a SCRIPT alert to the SERVICE monitor. • Part 5: Test the SCRIPT alert. 7-22 Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down
  • 172. Configuring Alerts Part 1: Create a New Group Named Spooler 1. Create a new group named SPOOLER. Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the SITESCOPE HELP. Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down 7-23
  • 173. Configuring Alerts Part 2: Create a Script to Start the Print Spooler Service 1. Open the command prompt window and navigate to the C:SITESCOPESCRIPTS directory. 2. Type COPY CON STARTSPOOLER.BAT and press ENTER. 3. Type NET START SPOOLER and press ENTER. 4. Hold down CTRL and press Z. 5. Press ENTER. 6. Close the command prompt window. 7-24 Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down
  • 174. Configuring Alerts Part 3: Create a Service Monitor for the Print Spooler Service Note: View ADMINISTRATIVE TOOLS -> SERVICES in CONTROL PANEL to ensure that the PRINT SPOOLER service is running. 1. Create a service monitor for the PRINT SPOOLER service with a frequncy of 20 seconds. Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the SITESCOPE HELP. Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down 7-25
  • 175. Configuring Alerts Part 4: Add a Script Alert to the Service Monitor 1. Add a SCRIPT alert to the PRINT SPOOLER SERVICE monitor you created. 2. In the NEW ALERT section, click SCRIPT. 3. In the SCRIPT list, select STARTSPOOLER.BAT. Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the SITESCOPE HELP. 7-26 Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down
  • 176. Configuring Alerts Part 5: Test the Script Alert Note: 1. Stop the PRINT SPOOLER service. 2. The PRINT SPOOLER service restarts in 20 seconds. When you stop the PRINT SPOOLER service, the SERVICE monitor for the PRINT SPOOLER service generates an error in its next run. This error causes the SCRIPT alert to run. The script restarts the PRINT SPOOLER service. Exercise: Restarting a Service that is Down 7-27
  • 177. Configuring Alerts Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Become familiar with the steps to prevent an alert flood in SiteScope. Specific Objectives At the end of this exercise, students should be able to do the following to prevent an alert flood in SiteScope: - Create new groups named HEARTBEAT and SERVER STATS. - Create a SERVICE monitor in HEARTBEAT for the SERVER service. - Create CPU, DISK SPACE, and MEMORY monitors in SERVER STATS. - Make the SERVER STATS group dependent on the SERVICE monitor. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to prevent an alert flood. • Part 1: Create new groups named HEARTBEAT and SERVER STATS. • Part 2: Create a SERVICE monitor in HEARTBEAT for the SERVER service. • Part 3: Create CPU, DISK SPACE, and MEMORY monitors in SERVER STATS. • Part 4: Make the SERVER STATS group dependent on the SERVICE monitor. 7-28 Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood
  • 178. Configuring Alerts Part 1: Create New Groups Named Heartbeat and Server Stats 1. Create 2 new groups. – HEARTBEAT – SERVER STATS Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the SITESCOPE HELP. Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood 7-29
  • 179. Configuring Alerts Part 2: Create a Service Monitor in Heartbeat for the Server Service 1. In the HEARTBEAT group, create a service monitor for the SERVER service with a frequncy of 20 seconds. Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the SITESCOPE HELP. 7-30 Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood
  • 180. Configuring Alerts Part 3: Create CPU, Disk Space, and Memory Monitors in Server Stats 1. Create the following monitors in the SERVER STATS group: – CPU, frequency = 20 seconds – DISK SPACE, frequency = 20 seconds – MEMORY, frequency = 20 seconds Note: If you need details on how to complete this step, refer to previous exercises or the SITESCOPE HELP. 2. Stop the SERVER service on your computer. 3. Click the SERVER STATS group in the explorer tree and view the status of the monitors in the DASHBOARD tab. All the monitors are in error. This shows an alert flood. All the monitors show error status because the SERVER service was stopped. 4. Restart the SERVER service on your computer. Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood 7-31
  • 181. Configuring Alerts Part 4: Make the Server Stats Group Dependent on the Service Monitor 1. In the explorer tree, click the SERVER STATS group. 2. Click the PROPERTIES tab and click EDIT. 3. Expand the ADVANCED SETTINGS section. 4. In the DEPENDS ON tree, expand HEARTBEAT and check the SERVICE monitor check box. 5. Click OK to make the SERVER STATS group dependent on the SERVICE monitor. 6. Stop the SERVER service on your computer. 7. In the explorer tree, click the SITESCOPE node container and view the STATUS of the groups in the DASHBOARD tab. The SERVER STATS group has no data and only the HEARTBEAT group is in error. 7-32 Exercise: Preventing an Alert Flood
  • 182. Using Templates Using Templates 8 setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose This chapter explains the concepts of reusability and repeatability of monitor, group, and alert creation through the use of templates. This chapter discusses the following types of templates: user-defined, monitor set, solution, and dynamic update. Objectives After completing this chapter, you will be able to: • Identify the role of templates. • Create user-defined templates. • Modify templates by applying user-defined and system variables. • Deploy user-defined and solution templates. • Use the Publish Template Changes wizard. 8-1
  • 183. Using Templates Using Templates to Deploy Monitoring Figure 8-1 Using Templates Templates are objects you use to reproduce servers, monitors, and alerts according to a predefined pattern and configuration. Templates include group, server, monitor, and alert template objects as placeholders representing the type and configuration of corresponding items that you want to deploy in your monitoring environment. SiteScope provides 2 types of templates to speed the deployment of monitors across the enterprise through standardization of group structures, monitor types and configuration settings: User-Defined and Solution Templates. SiteScope also provides template examples for monitoring in Windows and UNIX environments. You can use the template examples to help you become familiar with using SiteScope templates. 8-2 Using Templates to Deploy Monitoring
  • 184. Using Templates Template Attributes Templates in SiteScope are used to standardize a set of monitor types and configurations into a single structure. This structure can then be repeatedly deployed as a group of monitors targeting multiple elements of the monitored infrastructure. A template defines the hierarchy and a structure of groups, monitors, alerts, and dependencies. After a template is created, it becomes readily available and is easily deployed in a preconfigured state. This encourages consistency and enforces conventions. Template building blocks include: • Hierarchy of monitors – Each template defines a grouping structure and monitors inside the groups. • Monitor-level alerts – Each template may also define alerts for individual monitors. • Group-level alerts – Each template may define alerts applicable to specific or all groups inside the template. • Template variables – Template variables provide a way to tailor specific template properties to the targets being monitored. • User variables – Much like variables but created and named by the user creating the template, not provided by SiteScope. • System variables – Out of the box variables holding system information. • Dependencies – A dependency refers to the ability to control the execution of a monitor or a group of monitors based on the state of another monitor or a group of monitors. Template Attributes 8-3
  • 185. Using Templates User-Defined Templates Figure 8-2 User-defined Templates User-Defined Templates provide the following benefits and key features: • Templates are portable. They can be imported and exported for use across other SiteScope installations. • Templates are stored in binary format in SiteScope with no associated text file thus eliminating the need for manual file editing. • Templates can make use of powerful system and user-defined variables which facilitates their creation and eliminates the requirement for knowledge of monitor classes, internal parameters, or syntax. • Working with templates can be accomplished with by simple "point and click" mouse operations enabling fast creation of structure, hierarchy, and dependencies. Due to GUI limitations user-defined templates are not visible in the classic SiteScope. They can however co-exist with legacy msets created and imported from prior versions. 8-4 User-Defined Templates
  • 186. Using Templates User-Defined Templates Concepts Figure 8-3 User-Defined Templates Template: A template is an aggregation of objects used for speedy and repeatable deployment of identical assets to multiple SiteScope instances or within branches of the monitoring hierarchy inside the same SiteScope instance. An individual template consists of variable definitions, SiteScope object such as groups, monitors, alerts, and specific configurations and relationships between the objects such as a hierarchy, dependencies, and so on. A template can only be added to a template container node. Template Container: A template container is used for storing and managing one or more templates. Template containers group and organize multiple templates in ways that describe their purpose or classification. They are added only to the SiteScope node. Template Variable: A template variable is used to prompt for user input during template deployment. Template variables are added as children of the template container in which they are referenced. User-Defined Templates Concepts 8-5
  • 187. Using Templates Templates Planning When you plan to deploy templates, consider the following questions: • Which monitor types do you want to replicate using templates? • Which monitor configuration properties will need to vary from one template deployment to another? • What common properties will be the same from one template deployment to another? • What group structure will be used to organize the monitors? • Will alerts be deployed as part of the template? • What action will be associated with the alerts? 8-6 Templates Planning
  • 188. Using Templates User-Defined Template Containers Figure 8-4 Creating Templates To create a user-defined template, perform the following steps: 1. In the tree, right-click the SITESCOPE node. The SiteScope action menu appears. 2. Select NEW TEMPLATE CONTAINER. The NEW TEMPLATE CONTAINER window appears in the content area. 3. In the NAME text box, type a name for the template container. The maximum length of the name is 250 characters. 4. Optionally, if there are any categories defined in this enterprise, you can assign a category to the template container under the CATEGORY SETTINGS section. You can assign a description to the template container under the ADVANCED SETTINGS section. 5. Click OK to create the template container. User-Defined Template Containers 8-7
  • 189. Using Templates Adding Templates to Containers Figure 8-5 New Template Menu Selection After you create a template container object, perform the following steps to add a template object to the container: The template is the object into which you add or create monitor and group configuration objects. 1. From the template container, select NEW TEMPLATE. 2. Add groups, subgroups, monitors, dependencies, and alerts as desired. – These can be copied from other groups in SiteScope. 3. Parameterize numeric and other property values through the use of built-in (system) and user-defined variables. – User Variable Syntax: %%error_classifier%% – System Variables: $$SERVER_LIST$$, $$SERVER_NAME$$, $$SERVER_NAME_BARE$$, $$DATE$$, $$TIME$$ 8-8 Adding Templates to Containers
  • 190. Using Templates Shortcut to Creating Templates The easiest way to get started creating templates is to use an existing group, monitor, or alert as a basis for the template. To create a template using an existing group, monitor, or alert, do the following: 1. Select the group, monitor, or alert to copy. Right-click, and then select COPY. 2. Select the template to modify. Right-click, and then select PASTE. The contents of the group, monitor, or alert are now copied into the template. 3. Review the contents of the template and decide which components of the template will change when the template is deployed to another group, monitor, or alert. For example, is there an IP address, URL address, email address, server name, and so on that will vary depending on the deployment. 4. Create variables for each of the components of the monitors that will change when the template is deployed. a) Right-click on the template, and select NEW VARIABLE. b) Enter a variable name and description for each variable created. 5. After variables are created, replace existing text in the template with the appropriate variable names. a) Use %% around user-defined variables in the template; for example, %%DNS_SERVER%% b) Use $$ for system-defined variables; for example, $$SERVER_LIST$$ Shortcut to Creating Templates 8-9
  • 191. Using Templates Deploying Templates After the template is created, it can be deployed for use by copying and pasting it into a group. When the template is deployed, SiteScope prompts you to input values for the all system and user-defined variables created. The values are mapped to the variables and used to replace these variables everywhere they appear in the template. If you subsequently want to make changes to the source template, you can automatically publish the changes to SiteScope objects deployed by the template using the Publish Template Changes Wizard. 8-10 Deploying Templates
  • 192. Using Templates Publish Template Changes Wizard Figure 8-6 Run the Publish Template Changes Wizard To open the Publish Template Changes Wizard, perfom the following: 1. In the monitor tree, right-click a template and click PUBLISH CHANGES. Note: The wizard opens only if there are deployments associated with the selected template. The PUBLISH TEMPLATE CHANGES WIZARD contains: • Select Deployed Groups Page • Review Compliancy Page • Content Changes Dialog Box • Modify Variables Page • Publish Results Summary Page • Publish Template Changes Summary Report Publish Template Changes Wizard 8-11
  • 193. Using Templates Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 1 Figure 8-7 Select Deployed Groups Select the related template groups that you want to update. You can also select the ENABLE DELETE ON UPDATE option to delete SiteScope objects from the deployed groups that are not in the source template. 8-12 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 1
  • 194. Using Templates Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 2 Figure 8-8 Review Compliancy To view content differences in the template objects, click the VIEW DIFFERENCES link to open the CONTENT CHANGES dialog box. This link only appears if there is a content difference. Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 2 8-13
  • 195. Using Templates Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 3 Figure 8-9 Viewing Content Changes Review the details of the content changes to be performed on the object’s properties. 8-14 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 3
  • 196. Using Templates Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 4 Figure 8-10 Modify Variables Add values for any new variables in the template. Variable values that are mandatory are indicated by a red asterisk (*). You can also edit values of existing variables. Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 4 8-15
  • 197. Using Templates Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 5 Figure 8-11 Publish Results Summary Review the results of the publish template changes and, if necessary, retry publishing the changes to the deployed groups that failed to update. Optionally, you can export the publish changes results to a summary report (.pdf file). 8-16 Publish Template Changes Wizard: Step 5
  • 198. Using Templates Publish Template Changes Summary Report Figure 8-12 Publish Results Summary Report The Publish Template Changes Summary Report displays information about the template changes published to the deployed groups. It also displays information for group objects that failed to update. Publish Template Changes Summary Report 8-17
  • 199. Using Templates Overview of Solution Templates Figure 8-13 Solution Templates Solution Templates enable rapid deployment, because they contain a built-in enterprise application set of monitors. Solution templates are licensed SiteScope extensions. They provide support for AIX, Linux, Solaris, and Windows Hosts, Active Directory, Exchange, Microsoft IIS, Microsoft SQL, Oracle, SAP, Siebel, WebSphere, WebLogic, and many other enterprise applications. Solution templates are system templates and therefore not editable. 8-18 Overview of Solution Templates
  • 200. Using Templates Summary In this lesson, you learned: • Templates are used to speed up the deployment of multiple monitors across your IT environment. • The types of templates are: – User-defined templates – Solution templates • Use existing group, monitor, or alert definitions as a basis for creating templates by using COPY and PASTE. • Use user-defined and system variables to create templates that can be repeatedly deployed. • Use the Publish Template Changes wizard to publish the changes to SiteScope objects deployed by templates. Summary 8-19
  • 201. Using Templates Review Questions Answer the review questions in your book. setoN rotcurtsnI Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the end of the day. 1. What is the purpose of templates? Templates in SiteScope are used to standardize a set of monitor types and configurations into a structure that is deployed as a group of monitors repeatedly across multiple elements in the infrastructure. __________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 2. What is the use of a template container? A template container is used to store and manage one or more templates. _____ 3. What is the purpose of solution templates? Solution templates enable rapid deployment of a standard enterprise application set of monitors. _____________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 8-20 Review Questions
  • 202. Using Templates Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Become familiar with the steps to create a user-defined template in SiteScope. Specific Objectives At the end of this exercise, students must be able to do the following to create a user-defined template in SiteScope: - Create a container for the template. - Create a new template. - Create template variables. - Add monitors to the template. - Edit the monitors to replace hard-coded values with variables. - Deploy the template in a designated group. In this exercise you will create a user-defined template which contains four monitors: • Part 1: Create a container for your user-defined template. • Part 2: Create a new user-defined template. • Part 3: Create template variables. • Part 4: Add monitors to the template. • Part 5: Edit monitors to replace hard-coded values with variables. • Part 6: Deploy the template in a designated group. Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template 8-21
  • 203. Using Templates Part 1: Create a Container For Your User-defined Template 1. Right-click the SITESCOPE node container. 2. Click NEW TEMPLATE CONTAINER. 3. In the NAME field, type a name for the template container. 4. Click OK. 8-22 Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template
  • 204. Using Templates Part 2: Create a New User-defined Template 1. Right-click the template container you created. 2. Click NEW TEMPLATE. 3. In the NAME field, type a name for the new template. 4. Click OK. Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template 8-23
  • 205. Using Templates Part 3: Create Template Variables Create template variables. 1. Right-click your template. 2. Click NEW VARIABLE. 3. In the NAME field, type a name for the new template. This is the name that must be used when referring to the variable in other template objects. 4. Enter DISPLAY NAME, DESCRIPTION, and DEFAULT VALUE as needed. 5. Click OK. Create the following variables in your template. • Server Instead of defining a user variable for SERVER, you can use the system variable SERVER_NAME_BARE to define the target server being monitored. • Frequency • Host • URL For the URL variable, provide a default value that may be changed when deploying the template. Some hints: • The FREQUENCY variable is the monitor’s frequency. • Refer to the TEMPLATE EXAMPLES. 8-24 Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template
  • 206. Using Templates Part 4: Add Monitors to the Template Create a template group. 1. Right-click your template in the monitor tree. 2. Click NEW GROUP. 3. In the GROUP NAME field, type a name for the template group. 4. Click OK. Create monitors in your template group for the following: • CPU • Disk • Memory • URL Some hints: • You can take a shortcut to developing the template by copy and paste already created monitors into the template you are creating, and then edit the templates. • Each monitor name should reference the target server, such as ‘Memory on %%server%%’ or ‘Memory on $$SERVER_NAME_BARE$$’ if you chose to use the system variable for the target server. • Remember to refer to the variables using the appropriate syntax: %%server%% and %%url%% when using them in the monitor definitions. • For the URL monitor, use the %%host%% variable as a part of the target URL to monitor. • Refer to the TEMPLATE EXAMPLES. Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template 8-25
  • 207. Using Templates Part 5: Edit Monitors to Replace Hard-coded Values With Variables For any monitors that you copied into your template, replaced the hard-coded values with the appropriate template variables. 8-26 Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template
  • 208. Using Templates Part 6: Deploy the Template in a Designated Group When done, create a new group, and deploy the template inside that group. Exercise: Creating a User-Defined Template 8-27
  • 209. Using Templates Exercise: Change Template and Publish Changes setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Become familiar with the steps to update a user-defined template in SiteScope and publish the changes to all objects deployed by the template. Specific Objectives At the end of this exercise, students must be able to do the following to update a user-defined template in SiteScope and publish the changes using the Publish Template Changes Wizard: - Select the template created in the previous exercise. - Add a ‘Ping’ monitor and make the CPU, Memory and Disk monitors depend on the Ping monitor. - Change the ‘Warning’ threshold to 80% for the CPU monitor. - Publish the template changes. - Create a PDF of the Publish Template Changes Summary Report. In this exercise, you will modify the user-defined template from the previous exercise, and publish the changes using the Publish Template Changes Wizard. • Part 1: Add a ‘Ping’ monitor to your user-defined template. • Part 2: Add the ‘Ping’ monitor as a dependency for the CPU, Memory and Disk monitors. Note: If you need details on how to complete these steps, refer to previous exercises or the SITESCOPE HELP. • Part 3: Change the ‘Warning’ threshold for the CPU monitor to 80%. • Part 4: Launch the Publish Template Changes Wizard. • Part 5: Verify the Content Changes • Part 6: Create a PDF of the Summary Report. Note: If you need details on how to complete these steps, refer to the SITESCOPE HELP. 8-28 Exercise: Change Template and Publish Changes
  • 210. Using Diagnostic Tools Using Diagnostic Tools 9 setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose This chapter provides an overview of diagnostics tools in SiteScope and their usage. Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • Become familiar with the available diagnostic tools in SiteScope. • Build monitors using the appropriate diagnostic tools. • Use the diagnostic tools to solve problems and troubleshoot monitoring issues. 9-1
  • 211. Using Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Tools SiteScope provides a variety of diagnostic tools and utilities. Diagnostic tools can be used to troubleshoot a faulty monitor, fine tune a monitor configuration, or examine more closely the data returned by a monitor in an attempt to troubleshoot problems reported by a particular monitor. Diagnostic tools are configurable utilities that make a one-time data request and send queries to a specific system. They also capture the returned data and make it available for viewing inside the SiteScope interface. For example, you can use the PING diagnostics tool to test network connectivity after having provided the IP address of the server to be pinged. Or, to verify database connectivity and logon authentication, you can trigger the DATABASE tool after providing specific database connectivity parameters. Diagnostics tools should be leveraged when creating and testing complex monitor functionality. For instance, you can use the REGULAR EXPRESSIONS tool to test the validity of a particular regular expression before the associated monitor is actually created. 9-2 Diagnostic Tools
  • 212. Using Diagnostic Tools Types of Diagnostic Tools The diagnostic tools in SiteScope are grouped into the following categories: • Application tools Examples of application diagnostic tools include DNS LOOKUP, DATABASE CONNECTION, and FTP SERVER. • Server tools Examples of server diagnostic tools include NETWORK, PROCESSES, and SERVICES. • Advanced tools Examples of advanced diagnostic tools include EVENT LOG, LDAP AUTHENTICATION, and NEWS SERVER. Types of Diagnostic Tools 9-3
  • 213. Using Diagnostic Tools Examples of Diagnostic Tools SiteScope diagnostic tools help troubleshoot different aspects of a monitored system or simply confirm the availability and responsiveness of specific system components and services. In this chapter, you will learn more about the following diagnostic tools: • DNS LOOKUP • EVENT LOG • FTP SERVER • LDAP AUTHENTICATION • NETWORK 9-4 Examples of Diagnostic Tools
  • 214. Using Diagnostic Tools Using the DNS Lookup Tool Figure 9-1 DNS Lookup Tool The DNS LOOKUP tool looks up names from a Domain Name Server (DNS). The tool displays the IP address for a domain name and information about the server names for the domain. If there is a problem in the network, the DNS server does not provide the correct IP address for the servers. You can use the DNS LOOKUP tool to verify that the DNS server returns the correct address for your servers. This tool is also used to verify that the DNS server can look up the addresses for external domains. To run the DNS LOOKUP tool: 1. Expand the TOOLS node in the explorer tree and click DNS LOOKUP. 2. On the DNS LOOKUP TOOL page, in the DNS ADDRESS field, type the IP address of a DNS Server. 3. In the HOST NAME field, type a domain name. 4. Click DNS LOOKUP. Using the DNS Lookup Tool 9-5
  • 215. Using Diagnostic Tools Using the Event Log Tool Figure 9-2 Event Log Tool The EVENT LOG tool displays event log entries on a server. To run the EVENT LOG tool: 1. On the EVENT LOG TOOL page, in the SERVER NAME field, type the name of the server for which you want to view the log. By default, this tool displays the log for the SiteScope server. 2. From the EVENT LOG list, select the type of event log you want displayed. By default, SYSTEM is selected. 3. In the ENTRIES TO SHOW field, type the number of entries to list for the event log. The default value is 10. 4. Click SHOW EVENT LOG ENTRIES. 9-6 Using the Event Log Tool
  • 216. Using Diagnostic Tools Using the FTP Server Tool Figure 9-3 FTP Server Tool The FTP SERVER tool tests the connection to an FTP server. For example, if you receive an alert from SiteScope indicating that an FTP server is not working properly, you can use the FTP SERVER tool to investigate the error. To run the FTP SERVER tool: 1. On the FTP SERVER TOOL page, in the FTP SERVER field, type the name of the FTP server. 2. In the FILE NAME field, type the name of the file to retrieve. 3. In the USER NAME and PASSWORD fields, type the correct user name and password information, respectively. 4. If you are accessing the FTP server through a firewall, check the USE PASSIVE check box to enable passive FTP access. 5. Click CHECK FTP SERVER. Using the FTP Server Tool 9-7
  • 217. Using Diagnostic Tools Using the LDAP Authentication Tool Figure 9-4 LDAP Authentication Tool The LDAP AUTHENTICATION tool tests an LDAP server by requesting a user authentication. To run the LDAP AUTHENTICATION tool: 1. On the LDAP AUTHENTICATION TOOL page, in the SECURITY PRINCIPAL field, type the name of the principal for authenticating the caller to the service. 2. In the SECURITY CREDENTIAL field, specify the appropriate credential based on the authentication scheme. 3. In the URL PROVIDER ADDRESS field, type the constant that holds the configuration information for the service provider to use. 4. In the LDAP QUERY field, specify an object query to search for an LDAP object. 5. In the SEARCH FILTER field, specify a search filter to perform a search using a filter. 6. Click AUTHENTICATE USER. 9-8 Using the LDAP Authentication Tool
  • 218. Using Diagnostic Tools Using the Network Tool Figure 9-5 Network Tool Figure 9-5 shows the NETWORK tool. This tool uses the netstat command to determine the network interface statistics and the number of active connections. The NETWORK tool enables you to determine whether your network interface is saturated or in an erroneous state. The tool also shows the number of connections. To run the NETWORK tool, on the NETWORK TOOL page, click RUN NETWORK. Using the Network Tool 9-9
  • 219. Using Diagnostic Tools Monitor-Specific Tool Selection Figure 9-6 Monitor-Specific Tool Selection The monitor-specific tools are accessed from the Dashboard. When accessed in this way, SiteScope selects the tool, pre-populates the fields, and runs the test. This is useful in diagnosing monitor errors. In this example, SiteScope chose to run the NT Performance Test, as shown in Figure 9-7. 9-10 Monitor-Specific Tool Selection
  • 220. Using Diagnostic Tools Figure 9-7 NT Performance Counter Test Monitor-Specific Tool Selection 9-11
  • 221. Using Diagnostic Tools Summary In this chapter, you learned: • SiteScope provides a variety of diagnostic tools useful when troubleshooting monitoring problems and developing and testing monitors. • Diagnostic tools can be categorized into application, server, and advanced diagnostics tools. • The DNS LOOKUP tool looks up names from a DNS server. • The EVENT LOG tool displays event log entries on a server. • The FTP SERVER tool tests an FTP Server. • The LDAP AUTHENTICATION tool tests an LDAP server by requesting a user authentication. • The NETWORK tool checks whether the network interface is saturated or in error. 9-12 Summary
  • 222. Using Diagnostic Tools Review Questions Answer the review questions in your book. setoN rotcurtsnI Conduct these review questions immediately after the module, or save the questions from several modules to be conducted at the end of the day. The answers to the questions below will be printed in the instructor book; the student book will show blank lines after each question. 1. Name the three categories of diagnostic tools. The three types of SiteScope diagnostic tools are APPLICATION, SERVER, and ADVANCED DIAGNOSTIC tools._______________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 2. How does DNS LOOKUP tool work? The DNS LOOKUP tool looks up names from a Domain Name Server. The tool displays the IP address for a domain name and information about the name servers for the domain. ___________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 3. What does the EVENT LOG tool display? The EVENT LOG tool displays event log entries on a server. ________________ 4. Which command does the NETWORK tool use to determine the network interface statistics and the number of active connections? The NETWORK tool uses the netstat command to determine the network interface statistics and the number of active connections. _________________________ _______________________________________________________________ Review Questions 9-13
  • 223. Using Diagnostic Tools Exercise: Running the Event Log Tool setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Familiarize yourself with the steps to run the EVENT LOG tool in SiteScope. Specific Objective At the end of this exercise, students should be able to: - Run the EVENT LOG tool in SiteScope. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to run the EVENT LOG tool in SiteScope. Part 1: Run the EVENT LOG tool in SiteScope. 9-14 Exercise: Running the Event Log Tool
  • 224. Using Diagnostic Tools Part 1: Run the Event Log Tool in SiteScope 1. Open the SiteScope interface. 2. In the explorer tree, expand the TOOLS node. 3. Click EVENT LOG. 4. In the SERVER NAME field, type the name of the Training Server. 5. From the EVENT LOG list, select APPLICATION. 6. Click SHOW EVENT LOG ENTRIES to view the results. Exercise: Running the Event Log Tool 9-15
  • 225. Using Diagnostic Tools Exercise: Running the Ping Tool setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Familiarize yourself with the steps to run the PING tool in SiteScope. Specific Objective At the end of this exercise, students should be able to: - Run the PING tool in SiteScope. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to run the PING tool in SiteScope. Part 1: Run the PING tool in SiteScope. 9-16 Exercise: Running the Ping Tool
  • 226. Using Diagnostic Tools Part 1: Run the Ping Tool in SiteScope 1. Expand the TOOLS container. 1. Click PING. 2. In the DOMAIN NAME OR IP ADDRESS field, type the computer name or IP address of the Training Server. 3. Click PING to view the results. Exercise: Running the Ping Tool 9-17
  • 227. Using Diagnostic Tools Exercise: Running the Services Tool setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Familiarize yourself with the steps to run the SERVICES tool in SiteScope. Specific Objective At the end of this exercise, students should be able to: - Run the SERVICES tool in SiteScope. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to run the SERVICES tool in SiteScope. Part 1: Run the SERVICES tool in SiteScope. 9-18 Exercise: Running the Services Tool
  • 228. Using Diagnostic Tools Part 1: Run the Services Tool in SiteScope 1. Expand the TOOLS container. 2. Click SERVICES. 3. Click SHOW SERVICES to view a list of the services running on your computer. Exercise: Running the Services Tool 9-19
  • 229. Using Diagnostic Tools Exercise: Running the Trace Route Tool setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Familiarize yourself with the steps to run the TRACE ROUTE tool in SiteScope. Specific Objective At the end of this exercise, students should be able to: - Run the TRACE ROUTE tool in SiteScope. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to run the TRACE ROUTE tool in SiteScope. Part 1: Run the TRACE ROUTE tool in SiteScope. 9-20 Exercise: Running the Trace Route Tool
  • 230. Using Diagnostic Tools Part 1: Run the Trace Route Tool in SiteScope 1. Click TRACE ROUTE. 2. In the DOMAIN NAME OR IP ADDRESS field, type the computer name or IP address of the Training Server. 3. Click TRACE ROUTE to view the results. Exercise: Running the Trace Route Tool 9-21
  • 231. Using Diagnostic Tools 9-22 Exercise: Running the Trace Route Tool
  • 232. Generating Reports Generating Reports 10 setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose This chapter lists the types of reports in SiteScope and explains the method to generate these reports. Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • Understand the business purposes of reports. • Identify the different types of reports in SiteScope. • Generate reports based on business requirements. 10-1
  • 233. Generating Reports Reports Specific to User Figure 10-1 User-Specific Reporting SiteScope reports hold information about how the servers and applications you are monitoring have performed over time. SiteScope reports are important tools in monitoring and troubleshooting operational performance and availability and reviewing the monitored environment. You can generate a report for a single monitor, several monitors, or even several monitor groups. Report definitions include several report content options including tables of specific monitor measurements, summaries of results, and graphs. SiteScope reports can be valuable to many people in your organization, including management personnel in Sales, Marketing, Customer Support, and Operations. SiteScope User accounts can be created to allow these users restricted access to the SiteScope service to view reports, as shown in Figure 10-1. 10-2 Reports Specific to User
  • 234. Generating Reports Types of Reports Figure 10-2 Types of Reports You can generate the following types of reports in SiteScope: • Alert Reports ALERT reports are ad hoc or custom reports used to display SiteScope alerts sent over specific time periods. Alert reports do not support exporting data. The settings for an Alert report are not saved to the SiteScope configuration data for later use. • Management Reports MANAGEMENT reports provide a summary of infrastructure availability and performance data for a given time period. You can use these reports to detect emerging trends and correct potential problems before they escalate into a crisis. MANAGEMENT reports are generated automatically based on their preset schedule from data collected by SiteScope monitors. According to the preset schedule, SiteScope reads the applicable log files and generates the report based on the Types of Reports 10-3
  • 235. Generating Reports monitor metrics for the time interval specified. You can save the report data in a file suitable for exporting to third-party applications, such as Microsoft Excel. You can also specify an e-mail address to which a summary of the report is sent whenever the report is generated. The email address is specified in the SEND REPORT BY E-MAIL field in the MAIN SETTINGS section for the report. • Monitor Reports MONITOR reports enable you to review configuration properties and settings for existing monitors. You can export a MONITOR report in one of three text formats: comma-delimited (CSV), tab-delimited (TXT), and HTML. Unlike a MANAGEMENT report, which is generated based on a schedule that you specify, you generate a MONITOR report on an ad hoc basis. In addition, the settings for a MONITOR report are not saved to the SiteScope configuration data for later use. • Quick Reports QUICK reports enable you to view monitor data for specific monitors or groups of monitors for specific time periods. Currently, you cannot export QUICK reports data to a third-party application. Unlike a MANAGEMENT report that is generated based on a schedule that you specify, you generate a QUICK report on an ad hoc basis. In addition, the settings for a QUICK report are not saved to the SiteScope configuration data for later use. You can also specify an e-mail address to which a summary of the report is sent whenever the report is generated. The email address is specified in the SEND REPORT TO E-MAIL ADDRESS field in the MAIN SETTINGS section for the report. 10-4 Types of Reports
  • 236. Generating Reports Working with Management Reports Figure 10-3 New Management Report MANAGEMENT reports are generated based on the schedule specified in their definition in the explorer tree. You can: • View MANAGEMENT reports • Edit MANAGEMENT reports • Delete MANAGEMENT reports • Generate current reports • View current reports • View previous reports Working with Management Reports 10-5
  • 237. Generating Reports Viewing Management Reports Figure 10-4 Management Report View To view a MANAGEMENT report, select the management report in the explorer tree. Select the VIEW REPORT tab. Although you can create as many MANAGEMENT report definitions as you want, it is recommended that you plan and consolidate reports to minimize redundancy. For example, while generating reports on system resources for 20 different remote servers, you can generate a consolidated report for CPU and disk space and another report on the availability of all services and processes. 10-6 Viewing Management Reports
  • 238. Generating Reports Editing Management Reports Figure 10-5 Edit a Management Report To edit an existing MANAGEMENT report definition: 1. Click the node with which the report is associated. 2. Click the CONTENTS tab. 3. Expand the REPORTS section. 4. Click the pencil icon for the report you want to edit. You can also right-click the report definition in the explorer tree and select EDIT to modify report configurations. Figure 10-5 shows the CONTENTS tab, where you can edit a MANAGEMENT report definition. Editing Management Reports 10-7
  • 239. Generating Reports Generating Reports Figure 10-6 Generate Current Report To generate a MANAGEMENT report: 1. Click the report in the explorer tree. 2. Click the VIEW REPORT tab. 3. Click GENERATE. 10-8 Generating Reports
  • 240. Generating Reports Viewing Reports Figure 10-7 View Reports When you click GENERATE, the report appears, as shown in Figure 10-7. Viewing Reports 10-9
  • 241. Generating Reports Viewing Previous Reports Figure 10-8 Previous Report To view a previous report, click MOST RECENT REPORT, as shown in Figure 10-8. 10-10 Viewing Previous Reports
  • 242. Generating Reports Working with Alert, Monitor and Quick Reports SiteScope does not save ALERT, MONITOR and QUICK reports for later use. When working with ALERT, MONITOR and QUICK reports, you will be able to: • Generate reports. • View reports. Working with Alert, Monitor and Quick Reports 10-11
  • 243. Generating Reports Viewing Alert Reports Figure 10-9 New Alert Reports Alert reports are generated only on demand. Alert Reports are ad hoc reports and their definitions are not stored for future use. No report element is added to the monitoring tree for this report type. When you choose to generate an Alert Report, SiteScope reads the applicable log files and generates the report based on the applicable alert triggering information and the time interval you specify. To generate a report: 1. Right-click the container or monitor element to display the container action menu and select NEW REPORT. 2. Select the Alert link. The New SiteScope Report page is displayed. 3. Complete the items in the Main Settings. 4. When the required settings are defined, click APPLY to create the report. The report output is displayed in a new browser window. 10-12 Viewing Alert Reports
  • 244. Generating Reports Viewing Quick Reports Figure 10-10 Quick Reports To generate a QUICK report: 1. Right-click the node from where you want to generate the report. 2. Select NEW REPORT. 3. In the NEW SITESCOPE REPORT interface, click QUICK. 4. In the MAIN SETTINGS and ADVANCED SETTINGS sections, specify the definition parameters that you want to include in the report. 5. Click APPLY to generate the report. To generate a MONITOR report rapidly, in the NEW SITESCOPE REPORT interface, click MONITOR. Viewing Quick Reports 10-13
  • 245. Generating Reports Viewing Monitor Summary Reports Figure 10-11 New Monitor Reports Use the Monitor Summary Report to view setup information on monitors as well as the organization and makeup of groups of monitors. For example, you can use the report to check for monitor dependencies that can impact alerting. Monitor Summary Reports are ad hoc reports and their definitions are not stored for future use. No report element is added to the monitoring tree for this report type. To generate a MONITOR SUMMARY report: 1. Right-click the node from where you want to generate the report. 2. Select NEW REPORT. 3. In the NEW SITESCOPE REPORT interface, click MONITOR. 4. In the MAIN SETTINGS and ADVANCED SETTINGS sections, specify the definition parameters that you want to include in the report. You can use the file export option in the Advanced Settings to export the monitor configuration data to a third-party application, such as a spreadsheet or text editor. 5. Click APPLY to generate the report. 10-14 Viewing Monitor Summary Reports
  • 246. Generating Reports Summary In this chapter, you learned: • The following types of reports are available in SiteScope: ALERT, MANAGEMENT, MONITOR, and QUICK reports. • MANAGEMENT reports provide a summary of infrastructure availability and performance data for a specified period. • MANAGEMENT reports are generated automatically according to their preset schedule. • MONITOR reports enable you to review configuration properties and settings for existing monitors. • ALERT reports enable you to view alert data for a specified time period. • QUICK reports enable you to look at specific periods and monitors. • ALERT, MONITOR, and QUICK reports are generated manually. • To generate a report, right-click the SITESCOPE node or any group in the explorer tree, and then select NEW REPORT. Summary 10-15
  • 247. Generating Reports Review Questions Answer the review questions in your book. setoN rotcurtsnI Conduct these review questions immediately after the module, or save questions from several modules to be conducted at the end of the day. The answers to the questions below will be printed in the instructor book; the student book will show blank lines after each question. 1. Name the three types of reports in SiteScope. The three types of reports in SiteScope are MANAGEMENT, MONITOR, and QUICK. 2. Where can you access monitor data log files? You can access monitor data log files in the LOG FILES tab for the SITESCOPE node. _______________________________________________________________ 3. Where can you edit the retention period for the monitor data log files? You can edit the retention period for the monitor data log files in the LOG PREFERENCES link under the PREFERENCES node. ________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 10-16 Review Questions
  • 248. Generating Reports Exercise: Running SiteScope Reports setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Familiarize yourself with the reports in SiteScope. Specific Objective At the end of this exercise, students must be able to do the following to run reports in SiteScope: - Generate and view SiteScope reports. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to run reports in SiteScope. Part 1: Generate and view reports in SiteScope. Exercise: Running SiteScope Reports 10-17
  • 249. Generating Reports Part 1: Generate and View Reports in SiteScope 1. In the explorer tree, right-click a group and select NEW REPORT. 2. In the NEW SITESCOPE REPORT interface, click MONITOR. 3. In the MAIN SETTINGS section, specify the parameters for the report. 4. Click APPLY to generate the report. 5. View the generated report. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 for a QUICK report. 7. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for a MANAGEMENT report. 8. Click OK to save the report definition. 9. Click the report saved in the explorer tree and click the VIEW REPORT tab. 10. Click GENERATE to generate the report. 11. View the generated MANAGEMENT report. 10-18 Exercise: Running SiteScope Reports
  • 250. Generating Reports Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose of this exercise Familiarize yourself with the steps to generate a month-to-date MANAGEMENT report for a single monitor. Specific Objectives At the end of this exercise, students must be able to do the following to generate a month-to-date MANAGEMENT report for a single monitor: - Save a MANAGEMENT report definition. - Generate the report. This exercise familiarizes you with the steps to generate a month-to-date MANAGEMENT report for a single monitor. Part 1: Save a MANAGEMENT report definition. Part 2: Generate the report. Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor 10-19
  • 251. Generating Reports Part 1: Save a Management Report Definition 1. Right-click the SITESCOPE node in the explorer tree and select NEW REPORT. 2. In the NEW SITESCOPE REPORT interface, click MANAGEMENT. 3. In the MAIN SETTINGS section, in the NAME field, specify a name for the report. 4. In the MONITOR AND GROUPS TO REPORT ON tree, uncheck the SITESCOPE check box. Check the check box for the monitor for which you would like to generate the report. The nodes in the MONITOR AND GROUPS TO REPORT ON tree represent SiteScope groups as present in the explorer tree. Expand the node(s) to reach the monitor for which you want to generate the report. 5. From the TIME PERIOD FOR REPORT list, select MONTH-TO-DATE. 6. You can retain other parameters, such as UPTIME AND READINGS, which are selected by default or you can specify your own parameters, such as THRESHOLDS. 7. Click OK to save the report definition. 10-20 Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor
  • 252. Generating Reports Part 2: Generate the Report 1. In the explorer tree, click the newly created report definition. 2. Click the VIEW REPORT tab. 3. Click GENERATE to show the month-to-date MANAGEMENT report for the monitor that you specified. 4. Scroll to view the complete report. Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor 10-21
  • 253. Generating Reports 10-22 Exercise: Generating a Month-to-Date Management Report for a Single Monitor
  • 254. Maintaining SiteScope Maintaining SiteScope 11 setoN rotcurtsnI Purpose This chapter explains the common administrative and maintenance tasks associated with the maintenance of the SiteScope implementation. The chapter can be used as a high-level guideline to the responsibilities of the SiteScope administrator. Objectives After successfully completing this chapter, you will be able to: • Identify the SiteScope directories and files that require regular backup. • Become familiar with the SiteScope upgrade path. • Identify the patch download location. • Use self-monitoring features and log files. • Understand the SiteScope failover model. • Become familiar with SiteScope security considerations. • Understand the SiteScope licensing model. 11-1
  • 255. Maintaining SiteScope Important Files and Directories As with any production application, SiteScope should be backed up on a nightly basis. But what to backup? This is a frequently asked question, especially in the absence of a failover environment. The files here represent a comprehensive list of directories and files that require backup. • Configuration – SiteScope/groups – SiteScope/persistency • Custom Scripts and Modified Objects – SiteScope/scripts – SiteScope/script.remotes – SiteScope/templates. • Data – SiteScope/logs – SiteScope/htdocs • Custom Drivers and APIs • Security Setup SiteScopegroups contains the master.config file, which stores all the global configuration information for SiteScope. It gets updated when users define alerts, create reports, add remotes, create additional users, and create schedules. Additionally, it updates the global changes made in the PREFERENCES section of the Web console. The rest of the files in the SiteScope/templates.os, SiteScope/templates.mail, SiteScope/templates.mib, SiteScope/scripts, and SiteScope/scripts.remote get updated by manual changes from the user interface or by a User who manually edits the files. Daily logs in the Sitescope/logs directory are written during each run of the monitor until the end of the day, when SiteScope rolls over to a new log file for the next day. Students can be referred to the following KB # 38633 – How to backup SiteScope. 11-2 Important Files and Directories
  • 256. Maintaining SiteScope Patches and Service Packs Figure 11-1 Patches The latest service packs and patches are available at HTTP://SUPPORT.OPENVIEW.HP.COM/SELFSOLVE/PATCHES. Patches and Service Packs 11-3
  • 257. Maintaining SiteScope Health Page Figure 11-2 Health Page SiteScope HEALTH monitors are a built-in group of monitors that display information about SiteScope's own health. HEALTH monitors retrieve data about SiteScope's resource usage, key processes, monitor load server parameters, and the integrity of key configuration files use. SiteScope HEALTH monitoring data is recorded by default in the daily monitor logs. Administrators can use the HEALTH monitors to create reports on SiteScope's performance and operational health. Similar to regular monitors, HEALTH monitors can be edited in order to reconfigure their frequency and thresholds. Administrators can enhance the HEALTH group by adding new monitors targeting additional servers and environments. 11-4 Health Page
  • 258. Maintaining SiteScope Health Page Metrics Figure 11-3 SiteScope Health SiteScope captures information relevant to its performance and level of operability. The collected metrics are grouped in the following areas: • Monitor Load - Information about configure monitors useful in determining whether the volume of running monitors impacts the overall server performance. • The MONITOR LOAD CHECKER displays the following: – CURRENT MONITORS RUN PER MINUTE, CURRENT MONITORS RUNNING, CURRENT MONITORS WAITING – MAXIMUM MONITORS RUN PER MINUTE, MAXIMUM MONITORS RUNNING, MAXIMUM MONITORS WAITING • Health of SiteScope Server - General information about SiteScope resource usage, useful in determining whether the server is sized correctly. Health Page Metrics 11-5
  • 259. Maintaining SiteScope • SiteScope HEALTH checks the disk space usage, available memory, disk blocks statistics, physical memory free, process memory, thread count, handle count, load, free swap space, average CPU, page statistics, swaps, context switches per second, and packets statistics. • LOG MONITOR: Information about exceptional events indicating poor performance or internal error. • LOG EVENT CHECKER: Logs important events from the error log related to skips, restarts, and BAC integration. 11-6 Health Page Metrics
  • 260. Maintaining SiteScope Alert and Error Log Files Figure 11-4 Alert and Error Log File The ALERT LOG file records alert creation and dispatching information whenever SiteScope generates an alert. The ERROR LOG file contains a variety of messages related to the internal workings of SiteScope such as: • Errors related to monitor actions • Communication errors • SiteScope Stop and Start messages • Monitor Skips Alert and Error Log Files 11-7
  • 261. Maintaining SiteScope Run Monitor, BAC, and Operator Logs Figure 11-5 Run Monitor, BAC, Operator The following log files contain key information about monitor execution, integrations, and management activities. • Run Monitor Log - Records information on specific monitor runs and certain actions related to monitor management. • HP Business Availability Center (BAC) Log - Contains information about connectivity and monitor data transfer when SiteScope is configured to report to BAC. • Operator Log - Records SiteScope operator actions. This log is created when an acknowledgement is added to one or more monitors. 11-8 Run Monitor, BAC, and Operator Logs
  • 262. Maintaining SiteScope Failover Overview When configured SiteScope Failover enables the following functions: • Automatic synchronization • Data redundancy • High availability SiteScope Failover is a special edition of SiteScope designed to mirror a primary SiteScope configuration to a failover machine. The SiteScope Failover configuration requires two separate installations of SiteScope: • Primary • Secondary, running a special Failover build with a Failover license Failover Overview 11-9
  • 263. Maintaining SiteScope SiteScope Failover Internals Figure 11-6 SiteScope Failover Features This diagram represents a SiteScope failover implementation. The primary and failover SiteScope get installed on separate boxes. They run the same version of the SiteScope software; the standard build and the failover build. Ideally, SiteScope is installed on the same drive in the same directory on both primary and failover servers. The SiteScope failover instance periodically copies all configuration files from the primary instance to stay current with any changes to the primary monitoring configurations. The failover instance periodically requests the PROGRESS REPORT page from the primary instance as an indicator that primary is still functioning. If SiteScope failover is unable to get to the PROGRESS REPORT page, it becomes the primary SiteScope server and starts running all replicated monitors. SiteScope failover 11-10 SiteScope Failover Internals
  • 264. Maintaining SiteScope continues running as primary until it can obtain the PROGRESS REPORT page from primary SiteScope, indicating that the primary is available again. Note: There a SiteScope Failover Guide with detailed information on the topic. Failover Implementation Considerations Additional considerations when planning the Failover implementation include: • How to manage unsupported monitors. • What to do about preserving data and log integrity while monitoring from the failover system. • What is the impact of configuration changes to the failover system. • How to handle the continuity of reporting to BAC (or another EMS). • What impact do monitor frequency changes have on the failover group. While using SiteScope failover, switching to the backup system will impact log integrity. To ensure continuity of report data across the failover period, you have to merge the data from the failover system to your primary after recovery. Do not make configuration or monitor changes on the failover SiteScope server. While the failover system is in control, configuration and monitor changes are not supported. Any such actions could cause unpredictable results. In the event of such changes, data is lost when the primary SiteScope server regains control. SiteScope Failover Internals 11-11
  • 265. Maintaining SiteScope Security Overview Security in SiteScope is implemented through the following methods: • Access control – User accounts and permissions • Enabling SiteScope to run securely – Restricting the access from ports and IP addresses – Enabling SiteScope to run over Secure Sockets • Retrieving monitor data through secure channels – Using SSH connections 11-12 Security Overview
  • 266. Maintaining SiteScope User Accounts The SiteScope administrator can create custom user profiles with a very granular set of permissions. The configured permissions define the allowed activities a user can carry out on groups, monitors, reports, and alerts. The user profiles should be designed during the planning phase and should map to real-life roles. Another option for automatically creating user accounts is to integrate with LDAP. LDAP is a supported integration well documented in the SiteScope documentation library. Please be aware that by default (out of the box) anybody can access SiteScope using the no-password Administrator account. User Accounts 11-13
  • 267. Maintaining SiteScope SSL Basics Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is implemented in Sun's JSSE (Java Secure Socket Extension) package and included with all major J2EE application servers. Any SSL implementation requires importing a digital certificate to a key store file. As a result the SSL-enabled web site only responds to HTTPS requests funneled through port 443 (default secure port alternative to port 80). This secure behavior can be configured in SiteScope as well. The configuration procedure however needs to be applied to both the SiteScope classic web server and the JBoss web server. Please note that starting with version 8.0, there are two web servers in SiteScope - one supporting the new SiteScope JBoss interface and the other one supporting the classic user interface. To limit all access to SiteScope, the SiteScope Administrator must apply the applicable settings to both web servers. 11-14 SSL Basics
  • 268. Maintaining SiteScope Keytool.exe Figure 11-7 Keytool.exe The keytool.exe is a key and certificate management utility that lets you perform the following: • Administer your own public-private key pairs and associated certificates for authentication using digital signatures. • Cache the public keys of other persons and organizations with whom they communicate. The keytool is included in SiteScope, and is installed in SiteScope/java/bin directory. Keytool.exe 11-15
  • 269. Maintaining SiteScope Configuring SiteScope for SSL The steps to configure SiteScope with SSL are as follows: • Obtain a security certificate. – Request from a certificate authority. – Use a self-signed certificate. • Configure the new SiteScope server for SSL use. – SSL is natively supported in Tomcat. – Requires small changes to the server startup parameters. • Configure the classic SiteScope server for SSL use. – Controlled via property settings in master.config: _httpPort, _httpSecurePort,_httpSecureKeyPassword,_httpSecureKeystorePassword. • Restart the service and use the new URL. Please note that once SSL is enabled, the default SiteScope HTTPS URLs are: https://yoursitescopeserver:8443/sitescope for the new SiteScope GUI https://server_IP_address:8899 for the classic SiteScope GUI There is an exercise in the lab to walk the students through the exact steps. For more information, refer students to KB # 15924 - How to restrict access to SiteScope using SSL and HTTPS. 11-16 Configuring SiteScope for SSL
  • 270. Maintaining SiteScope SSH Basics Figure 11-8 SSH Secure Shell (SSH) is a UNIX-based command interface and protocol used for secure access to a remote computer. Both ends of the client/server connection are authenticated using a digital certificate, and passwords are protected by encryption. The SiteScope machine needs to be configured with an SSH client or a full SSH server installation. This is a prerequisite so that SiteScope can be configured to use SSH for monitoring of remote machine. The remote machines being monitored need to also run the SSH daemon or the full-blown server. SiteScope now includes an SSH client written in Java and native to the SiteScope application code. This client facilitates the setup of SSH connections and uses fewer system resources than external SSH clients. SiteScope for Windows also ships with a copy of the PuTTY SSH client and utilities. The PuTTY SSH client, plink.exe, was used to enable SSH connectivity for SiteScope for Windows prior to the 7.8.1.1 release. SiteScope for Solaris and Redhat Linux use the SSH utilities that are normally bundled with those operating systems, or are available for download. SSH Basics 11-17
  • 271. Maintaining SiteScope SSH Usage Consider the following recommendations and reminders when planning to monitor via SSH: • Use of Native Java Libraries vs. Plink is recommended. • Be aware that the two protocol versions, SSH1 and SSH2, are not compatible. • SSH Client Connection Options: – Integrated Java SSH client – External SSH client • SSH Server Configuration Options: – Cygwin OpenSSH – OpenSSH for Windows – SSH host daemon (SSHD) 11-18 SSH Usage
  • 272. Maintaining SiteScope Managing the SiteScope License The following are some key characteristics of license management in SiteScope: • License Types – General • Evaluation, Permanent, Failover – Option - based • EMS integrations, Solution Template addition • License consumption factors: – Total number of monitor points available – Types of SiteScope monitors in use • Monitor points requirements vary with monitor type: – System monitors consume 1 point per instance – Application monitors consume 1 point per instance per metric – URL/Sequence monitors consume 1 point per step. Managing the SiteScope License 11-19
  • 273. Maintaining SiteScope Summary In this chapter, you learned: • Routine administrative duties include: – Maintaining data integrity. – Keeping current product and service pack versions. – Monitoring SitesScope Health. – Implementing secure communications. – Understanding and managing licenses. 11-20 Summary
  • 274. Maintaining SiteScope Review Questions Answer the review questions in your book. setoN rotcurtsnI Conduct these review questions immediately after the chapter, or save the questions from several chapters to be conducted at the end of the day, or beginning of the next day. The answers to the questions below will only be printed in the instructor book; the student book will only show blank lines after each question. 1. List the configuration and data directories that require backup. SiteScope/groups, SiteScope/persistency, SiteScope/htdocs, and SiteScope/logs. 2. What is the purpose of the SiteScope failover option? SiteScope failover option enables automatic backups, data redundancy, and high availability mechanisms. It is a special SiteScope designed to mirror a primary SiteScope configuration to a failover machine. __________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 3. What is the purpose of the file Keytool.exe? The keytool.exe is a key and certificate management utility. It enables users to administer their own public-private key pairs and associated certificates for authentication using digital signatures and cache the public keys of other persons and organizations with whom they communicate. ________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ 4. What are the types of licenses? There are three types of licenses; evaluation, permanent, and failover. There is also an option-based license. ____________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________ Review Questions 11-21
  • 275. Maintaining SiteScope 11-22 Review Questions
  • 276. Class Evaluation Form (http://www.merc-training.com/survey/publictraining) Class: _____________________________Class Start Date: _________________ Location: ___________________________Instructor: ______________________ 1. How did you register for this class? (check one) On-line Through a Resource Coordinator Someone else registered me Table 11-1. 2. How much do you agree with the following statements regarding the registration process and facility? (Please circle only one rating for each category): Strongly Strongly Agree Neutral Disagree N/A Agree Disagree My registration was handled efficiently. 5 4 3 2 1 - The classroom/facilities were clean and 5 4 3 2 1 on-site well maintained. The classroom equipment worked properly 5 4 3 2 1 on-site and effectively supported the class. 3. How could the registration process or facilities be improved? 4. If there was CBT, WBT or online pre-work that was to be completed before class, did you complete it? There was no pre-work for this class Yes - I completed it before class No - I didn't understand that it was required No - I didn't get the assignment in time Table 11-2. Class Evaluation Form E-1
  • 277. No - I didn't have time to do it No - Skipped it, already familiar with the content No - Couldn't figure out the WBT site No - I started, but the content didn't seem useful Table 11-2. 5. If you completed pre-work for this class, how helpful was it in preparing you for this class? Very helpful Somewhat helpful I’m not sure Not very helpful Not helpful at all 5 4 3 2 1 6. How would you rate your technical ability going into the class? 5 - Highly technical 4 - Above average 3 - Average 2 - Below average 1 - Not at all technical Table 11-3. 7. How would you rate your familiarity with the product going into the class? 5 - I consider myself a product expert 4 - I have above average knowledge of the product 3 - I'm comfortable with common product functions 2 - I've used the product a little 1 - I've never used the product Table 11-4. 8. How much do you agree with the following statements regarding the course content and E-2 Class Evaluation Form
  • 278. materials? Strongly Strongly Agree Neutral Disagree Agree Disagree The objectives laid out in the course description were 5 4 3 2 1 met. The course materials were clearly written and easy to 5 4 3 2 1 follow. There was an appropriate amount of content - not too 5 4 3 2 1 packed or too lean. The lab exercises were well constructed and relevant. 5 4 3 2 1 The graphics in the course materials were clear and 5 4 3 2 1 effective. I would recommend this course to others. 5 4 3 2 1 9. How could the course materials be improved? 10. How much do you agree with the following statements regarding the class instructor? Strongly Strongly Agree Neutral Disagree Agree Disagree The instructor had a thorough knowledge of the 5 4 3 2 1 course content. The instructor encouraged participation from stu- 5 4 3 2 1 dents. The instructor was an effective communicator. 5 4 3 2 1 The instructor conducted the class at an appropriate 5 4 3 2 1 pace. The instructor made the course relevant by using real- 5 4 3 2 1 world examples. I would recommend this instructor to others. 5 4 3 2 1 11. What suggestions do you have for the instructor? 12. How would you rate your overall experience with this class? Excellent Good OK Needs Improvement Poor 5 4 3 2 1 Class Evaluation Form E-3
  • 279. 13. What is your level of confidence after completing the class? I understood the I understood the course concepts, I understood the course concepts, I understood some can apply some course concepts, I had a very hard and can apply most of the course con- without assistance, but will need help time with this course of them without cepts but will need help applying them assistance with others 5 4 3 2 1 14. What recommendations do you have to improve the overall effectiveness of this course? 15. What other courses would you like to see offered by HP Software Global Training? 16. If you have any other comments, please enter them below. If you would like to be contacted regarding your comments, please include your name and contact information. E-4 Class Evaluation Form
  • 281. E-6 Class Evaluation Form